JP2019115421A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase interest in a game different from a variation display game.SOLUTION: A game machine capable of executing a variation display game (special symbol variation display game) on the basis of satisfaction of a predetermined condition and generating a special game state when a result of the variation display game is a special result includes: specific game execution means (performance control device 300) for executing a specific game (e.g. roulette performance) different from the variation display game; and setting means (game control device 100) capable of setting one probability setting value from among a plurality of probability setting values to which the probability values used for lottery of the variation display game are assigned. The probability setting value (currently set probability setting value) set by the setting means can be suggested according to the result mode of the specific game.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 95

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing a variable display game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generating a special game state when the result of the variable display game is a special result.

  Conventionally, as a game machine, a game machine capable of executing a game state notification game in a special game state after the result of the variable display game becomes a big hit as a game different from the variable display game in which a plurality of identification information is variably displayed. Are known. The game state notification game is composed of a card game and the like, and the result of the game state notification game makes it possible to notify the contents (transition to the time saving state and the number of times reduced) of the specific gaming state after the end of the special game state. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2012-110595 A

However, conventional gaming machines have not been able to sufficiently enhance the interest of games different from variable display games.
An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game different from the variable display game.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is:
A gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state when a variable display game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the result of the variable display game is a special result,
Specific game execution means for executing a specific game different from the variable display game;
And setting means capable of setting one probability setting value out of a plurality of probability setting values to which probability values used for lottery of the variable display game are assigned,
It is characterized in that the probability setting value set by the setting means can be suggested by the result mode of the specific game.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the interest of a game different from the variable display game.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a flowchart explaining main processing. It is a flowchart explaining main processing. It is a flow chart explaining timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining a payment command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining a winning a prize mouth switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining probability setting value change processing. It is a flowchart explaining a probability setting value confirmation process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart explaining hard random number acquisition processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure starting opening switch common processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure reservation information determination processing. It is a flowchart explaining special processing usual processing. (A) is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 fluctuation start processing, (b) is a flow chart explaining special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit judging processing. It is a flowchart explaining small hit judging processing. It is a flow chart explaining processing during a special figure change. It is a flowchart explaining a process during special figure display. It is a flowchart explaining a process during special figure display. It is a flow chart explaining common drawing game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a common drawing usual processing. It is a flowchart explaining a process in common drawing fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining a process in common drawing display. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a common drawing. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining the main processing in a production control device. It is a flowchart explaining a reception command check process. It is a flowchart explaining a received command analysis process. It is a figure explaining another example of setting of probability setting value. It is a flowchart explaining the main processing in a 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value change process in a 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the definite condition monitoring process in a 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the main processing in the 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the shift judging processing in the 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining the state of the switch corresponding to the probability setting value in the 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value change process in a 4th modification. It is a figure explaining schematic structure of a setting means and a game control device in the 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value confirmation process in a 6th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the main processing in a 7th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value change process in a 7th modification. It is a flow chart explaining probability setting value change processing in the 8th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value confirmation process in a 9th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value confirmation process in a 10th modification. It is a figure explaining the alerting | reporting aspect in a 11th modification. It is a figure explaining an example of suggestion production. It is a figure explaining an example of suggestion production. It is a figure explaining an example of suggestion production. It is a figure explaining an example of suggestion production. It is a figure explaining an example of suggestion production. It is a figure explaining an example of suggestion production. It is a figure explaining the modification of suggestion production. It is a figure explaining the modification A of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification A of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification A of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification A of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification A of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification A of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of a game board. It is a flow chart explaining a modification of main processing in a production control device. It is a flowchart explaining an assist symbol control process. It is a flowchart explaining variable system command processing. It is a flow chart explaining change production setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining a production | presentation substitution process. It is a figure explaining the modification B of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification C of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification C of a game board. It is a flowchart explaining a replay control process. It is a flowchart explaining pre-reading symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining pre-reading change system command processing. It is a figure explaining the 1st example of a game ball pre-reading effect. It is a figure explaining the 2nd example of a game ball pre-reading effect. It is a figure explaining the 3rd example of a game ball pre-reading effect. It is a figure explaining a game ball storage device. It is a figure explaining a starting winning combination. It is a figure explaining a starting winning combination. It is a figure explaining the modification of an out zone unit. It is a figure explaining the modification of an out zone unit. It is a figure explaining an example of the game which made the false winning a prize a trigger. It is a figure explaining an example of the game which made the false winning a prize a trigger.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

  The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be capable of opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a housing portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 for covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

  In addition, lamps and LEDs are internally incorporated on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 for decoration or effect, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a delivery abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. has an abnormality notification color (for example, red , And a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting a sound (for example, a sound effect). Furthermore, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided at the lower part of the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormal content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. Note that a lamp for notifying a dispensing abnormality may be provided on a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

In the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (reserved plate) for supplying gaming balls to a bat firing device (not shown) and gaming balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 There are provided an upper ball outlet 22 which flows out, a lower plate (a tray) 23 for storing gaming balls which are paid out in a state where the upper plate 21 is full, an operation handle 24 of the ball striking device, and the like. Further, at the upper edge portion of the upper tray 21, a presentation button 25 incorporating a presentation button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player is provided. Further, on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25, a touch panel 29 for receiving a touch operation input from the player is provided. Further, on the lower right side of the front frame 12, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.
Although the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25 in the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25 A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

  Also, to the right of the effect button 25, the ball lending button 27 operated when the player receives a ball loan from the adjacent ball lending machine, and the discharge button operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation handle 24, the ball striking device is fed from the upper plate 21 to the gaming ball 32 toward the gaming area 32 on the front of the gaming board 30. To fire. In addition, the player operates the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 to perform an operation or the like in which the player operates in the variable display game (the decoration special view variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out.

  Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

  A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at four corners of the game board 30, respectively. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 provided with a display device 41 substantially at the center is arranged. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the display area of the display device 41 and to project forward than the display surface of the display device 41 to make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (brown tube). In the area (display area) where an image of the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbol), a character producing a special view variation display game, a background image enhancing a rendering effect, etc. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variable display), and a decorative special view variation display game corresponding to the special view variation display game is performed. In addition, an image (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, and the like) for effect based on the progress of the game is displayed on the display screen.
Further, on the left portion and the right portion of the center case 40, there is provided a panel effect device 44 forming a movable effect device for effecting a game including a special view variation display game by the movable effect member operating. The panel rendering device 44 is operable toward the center of the display device 41 from the state shown in FIG.

  In the lower left portion of the center case 40, a sub-display for displaying the fourth symbol to execute the decorative special view variable display game separately from the decorative special view variable display game displayed on the display device 41, and displaying the number of starting memories An information display device 90 is provided.

  The sub information display device 90 is configured by a single light emitting unit forming a sub game display unit for displaying a fourth symbol for executing the decorative special view variable display game corresponding to the first special view variable display game. A second sub formed of a sub game display portion 91 and a single light emitting portion forming a sub game display portion for displaying a fourth pattern for executing the decorative special view variable display game corresponding to the second special view variable display game And a game display unit 92. Furthermore, a first sub-display unit 93 indicating the number of first start memories, which is the right to execute the first special view variation display game by two light emitting units, and a second special view variation display game by two light emission units And a second sub display unit 94 indicating the number of second start memories, which is the right to do.

  In the first sub game display unit 91 and the second sub game display unit 92, a display indicating that the corresponding special view variation display game is being displayed in a variable manner, and a display indicating the result are extinguished, blinked, or lit of the light emitting unit Can be displayed. In addition, the first sub display unit 93 and the second sub display unit 94 have the numbers of the first start storage (special figure 1 suspension) and the second start storage (special figure 2 suspension) turned off of the two light emitting units, respectively. It can be displayed by blinking or lighting.

  By providing the sub information display device 90 separately from the display device 41, the fourth symbol is displayed on the display device 41 without occupying the display region of the display device 41, and the display region is effectively utilized. be able to. The sub information display device 90 is provided outside the operation range of the board effect device 44 so that the sub information display device 90 is not covered in the process of operation of the board effect device 44. .

On the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate 34 (common view start gate, start area, inflow area) for giving a start condition of the common view variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the common drawing start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).
Further, three general winning openings 35 are disposed on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general winning area is on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the common view starting gate 34. A mouth 35 is arranged. The game ball that has won the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

  Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 (a first start winning opening, a start area, an inflow area) for giving a start condition of the first special view variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

Further, immediately below the start winning opening 36, a normal change winning device 37 (second start winning opening, start area, inflow area) for giving a start condition of the second special figure change display game is provided.
The normal fluctuation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member 37b which can be opened to allow the game ball to easily flow in by opening in the direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side, and the movable member 37b is always A closed closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) to which the game ball can not flow is maintained. Then, when the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the game ball easily flows into the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 by the common electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a drive device. It can be changed to a state (a state advantageous to the player). The game ball that has won the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is detected by the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). In addition, it is possible to be able to win even when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the closed state, and in the closed state, it may be possible to win rather than the open state.
In addition, below the normal fluctuation winning device 37, an out port 30a is provided for collecting gaming balls that did not win a prize.

Furthermore, a special variation that can be converted into a non-accepting state and an easy-accepting state according to the result of the special view variation display game on the lower side of the center case 40 in the gaming area 32 and to the right of the start winning opening 36. A winning device (big winning opening) 38 is disposed.
The special variation winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 38c which can be opened by turning in the direction in which the upper end falls down to the front, and as a result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game The state of closing the big winning opening (blocked state which is disadvantageous for the player) is converted into the opened state (which is advantageous for the player). That is, the special variation winning device 38 has, for example, a special winning opening which is opened and closed by an open / close door 38c driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a drive device. During the state, the game ball is made easy to flow into the big winning hole by converting the big winning hole from the closed state to the open state, and the player is given a predetermined gaming value (prize ball). It has become. In the inside of the special winning opening (winning area), a special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) is disposed as a detecting means for detecting the gaming ball having entered the special winning opening. . In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, two large winning opening switches 38a are provided, and the gaming balls having flowed into the large winning openings are detected by any of the large winning openings switches 38a. As described above, by providing a plurality of large winning opening switch 38a, it is possible to quickly detect the game ball flowing into the large winning opening.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the gaming area 32 where the gaming balls flow down, the area on the left of the center case 40 is taken as the left gaming area, and the area on the right of the center case 40 is taken as the right gaming area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the power and shoots the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left strike) to aim for winning in the start winning opening 36, and fires the game ball to the right side game area (so-called It is possible to aim for winning in the common drawing starting gate 34, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the special fluctuation winning device 38 by right-handing).
Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end portion of the center case 40 is disposed at a position corresponding to the right gaming area, and is discharged to the right gaming area. The gaming ball thus formed is configured to pass through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42. In addition, since the material of at least the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is made of a material that allows the game balls passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visible from the outside, The game ball passing through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, the game ball flowing down the right play area) can be viewed through the flow path forming member 42 from the front of the flow path forming member 42 .

  In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, in the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special view change display game or the second special view change display game and the common view start gate 34 making the special view change display game. A collective display device 50 is provided which displays a common drawing variation display game triggered by winning and various information.

The batch display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 1 display) 51 for a first special figure fluctuation display game including a seven-segment type indicator (LED lamp) or the like and a second special figure The second special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 2 display) 52 for the fluctuation display game, the fluctuation display section 53 for the common drawing fluctuation display game composed of the LED lamps (common drawing indicator), and the same LED lamp And storage display portions 54, 55, and 56 for informing the start memory number of each variable display game configured as described above.
In addition, a first gaming state display unit (a first gaming state indicator, a right strike notification unit) 57 that informs the collective display device 50 that the game state in which the right strike is more advantageous than the left strike is available. The second gaming status display unit (second gaming status indicator, time saving status notification unit) 58 that lights up when a status occurs and reports the occurrence of a time saving condition, and the probability of a big hit when the gaming machine 10 is turned on with a high probability status 3rd game state indicator (3rd game state indicator, probability state indicator) 59 which indicates that it is, round indicator 60 which indicates the number of rounds at the time of big hit (number of times of opening and closing of special fluctuation winning device 38) Is provided.
The collective display device 50 may be further provided with a display unit (display) or the like that lights up when a big hit occurs and notifies of the occurrence of the big hit.

The special view variation display game in the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52 is, for example, the middle of the variation display game, ie, while the decorative special view variation display game is being performed on the display device 41. The segment is driven to blink to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 100 ms. In addition, in the case of this embodiment, in the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51, in addition to the central segment, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of 7 segments is also blinked to drive fluctuation. It is configured to indicate that it is inside.
Then, when the game result is “off”, for example, the central segment is turned on as a result mode of the off, and when the game result is “hit”, the hit result mode (special result mode) is not The game result is displayed with the result mode (for example, numbers and symbols) other than the result mode turned on.

  The common indicator 53 blinks the lamp during fluctuation to indicate that it is fluctuating, and after a predetermined time, displays the game result as a lighting mode or a lighting color according to the result of the game. Further, the common drawing reservation display 56 displays the number of starting memories (= the number of holdings) of the common drawing starting gate 34 serving as the fluctuation start condition of the common drawing display 53 by turning off, blinking and lighting a plurality of LEDs. The special figure 1 reserve display 54 has a plurality of LEDs, including the number of undivided balls (number of start memories = number of reserve) out of the number of winning balls to the start winning opening 36 serving as the variation start condition of the special figure 1 indicator 51. Displayed by turning off, blinking or lighting. The special figure 2 reserve display 55 turns off the plurality of LEDs for the number of start memories (= number of reserve) of the second start winning opening (normal variation winning device 37) which becomes the variation start condition of the special figure 2 indicator 52. Displayed by blinking or lighting.

  The first gaming state display unit (right-handed notification unit) 57 is configured of an LED lamp or the like, and turns off the light if the left-handed game is more advantageous to the player than the right-handed game (normally hit) If the player is in a game state in which the right strike is more advantageous to the player than the left strike (right strike), the lamp is turned on.

  The second game state display unit (time reduction state notification unit) 58 is configured by an LED lamp or the like, and in the normal game state where the time reduction state is not occurring (when the fluctuation time shortening function is not activated) If the time saving condition is occurring (during the fluctuation time shortening function operation), the lamp is turned on.

  The third gaming state display unit (probability state display unit) 59 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and turns off the lamp if the probability state of the big hit is a low probability state (normal probability state) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. If the probability state of the big hit is a high probability state (probable change state) when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the lamp is turned on.

  The round display unit 60 is configured of an LED lamp or the like. For example, the lamp is turned off when not in the special game state, and the lamp corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result in the special game state. Turn on the light. The round display unit may be configured by a 7-segment display.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 is provided with a gaming control apparatus 100, and the gaming control apparatus 100 is a main control apparatus (main substrate) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and a gaming microcomputer 111 (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer). And an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver, and a data bus 140 for connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. .

  The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and serves as a reference clock for the CPU operating clock or timer interrupt and a random number generation circuit. An oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 or the like is generated. The game control apparatus 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control apparatus 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC 32 V, DC 12 V, DC 5 V generated by the power supply apparatus 400 to be operable Be done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 is a normal power supply having an AC-DC converter that generates the DC voltage of 32 V from an AC power supply of 24 V and a DC-DC converter that generates DC voltages of 12 V and 5 V lower than DC voltage of 32 V. A power failure monitoring signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure, having a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the RAM in the gaming microcomputer 111 at power failure and a power failure monitoring circuit. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal.

  In this embodiment, the power supply 400 is configured separately from the game control apparatus 100, but the backup power supply 420 and the control signal generator 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control 100, ie, main It may be configured to be provided on a substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control apparatus 100 are targets of replacement at the time of model change, as in the present embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a substrate different from the power supply 400 Can be removed from the target of replacement and cost reduction can be achieved.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the gaming microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the gaming control apparatus 100, and data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or even after the power is shut off. That is, it is a backup storage means capable of holding data stored even when the game control apparatus 100 is in the power-off state. Then, when power is restored, control can be resumed based on the data held by the backup storage means. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors, for example, the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it falls below 17 V, for example, and changes the power failure monitoring signal. Output Also, at the time of power on or recovery from a power failure, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time. The power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal and causes the entire control system to be reset.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read only ROM (read only memory) 111B, and a random access memory (RAM) 111C which can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111B stores invariable information (program, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a non-volatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a working area of the CPU 111A and storage areas of various signals and random values during game control. It is used as An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

  Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special view variation display game, the contents of the effect, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine a variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start storage. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a falling fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a falling, a big hit fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, tables for determining a second half fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state A table (a first half fluctuation group table, a first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half fluctuation pattern which is a pattern is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device capable of changing the display state, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state is a gaming state (special gaming state) advantageous to the player when the special result mode is obtained, derivation is already made at a stage where a part of the plurality of display results is not yet derived and displayed. This refers to a display state in which the displayed display results satisfy the conditions for the special result mode. In addition, the reach state is deviated from the display condition which is the special result mode even when reaching the stage before the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. Then, for example, the reach state includes a state (so-called all-rotation reach) in which variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result mode is uniform. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition to be the special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special view fluctuation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special view fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right fluctuation display areas in the display device. When displaying the result mode by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle and displaying the result mode, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same The state where the identification information is obtained, but excluding the special result aspect) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  And, this reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result aspect is different (expected values are different) as reach effects such as normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. Expected values are set to increase in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. Further, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special view variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special view variable display game (when it is out of alignment). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is a state in which the possibility of a big hit is higher than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices. 10 Take control of the whole. Also, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various A variation pattern random number for determining the variation display game execution time etc. in reach display or non-reach variation display, and a random number generation circuit for generating a collision random number etc for determining hit of the common drawing variation display game And a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock giving update timing of the random number generation circuit. There is.

  Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the processing relating to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A is a game result (big hit or small hit or break) of the special figure fluctuation display game, and a probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current gaming state Condition), the operation condition (time-saving operation condition) of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 as the current gaming state, the number of starting memories, etc., one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables Get. Here, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize balls. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and performs control for dispensing the ball.

  In the input section 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111, a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, a starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal fluctuation winning device 37, It is connected to the gate switch 34a in the drawing start gate 34, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 38a of the special variation winning device 38, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided which receives a logic signal and converts it into a 0V-5V positive logic signal. The proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7 V-11 V, so the leads of the sensor or proximity switch are improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead is disconnected and floating. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state as it has become and to output an abnormality detection signal.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Note that among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals of the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a and the big winning opening switch 38a are input to the second input port 123 . Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, a detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected is input to the third input port 124.

  Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for detecting fraud which is provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, or a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like. A detection signal of the switch 63 and a detection signal of a main frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main frame) 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 are also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Furthermore, setting value change serving as detection means for detecting an operation in the operation unit for selecting a plurality of probability setting values to which a probability value to be a special result in the special figure fluctuation display game is assigned to the third input port 124 Signals from the switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 are input.

  The setting key switch 152 is for detecting the operation of the setting key operation unit that constitutes the first operation unit of the operation units. The setting key operation unit has a key hole into which the setting key is inserted, and is configured to be able to turn the setting key from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. . The setting key switch 152 is a sensor capable of detecting that it is in the state of being turned to the second position, and is in the on state when it is in the state of being turned to the second position, and in a state of not being turned to the second position. It will be off if there is any.

  The setting value change switch 151 is for detecting an operation of a setting value change button serving as a second operation unit of the operation units. The set value change button is a push-type button, and the set value change switch 151 is turned on when the set value change button is pressed, and turned off when not pressed.

  By operating these operation units, it is possible to select the probability setting value to which the probability value to be the special result in the special figure fluctuation display game is assigned, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value is a game. It is supposed to be used. Here, six of setting 1 to setting 6 are prepared as probability setting values. Probability values assigned to each probability setting value are 1/320 for setting 1, 1/310 for setting 2, 1/300 for setting 3, 1/290 for setting 4, 1/280 for setting 5, and 6 for setting 6 It is said to be 1/270. This probability value is the probability value in the normal probability state, and the probability value in the high probability state is 10 times the probability value in the normal probability state.

  When selecting the probability setting value, first, the front frame 12 is opened, and the setting key operation unit setting key is turned to the second position, and the probability setting value is obtained by turning on the power of the gaming machine. The probability setting value can be changed by pressing the setting value change button in this probability setting value changing state. The selected probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153.

  Also, when the power is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operating unit turned to the second position with the front frame 12 closed, or after the game machine is powered on, the setting key of the setting key operating unit is In the case of turning to the second position, the probability setting value confirmation mode in which the currently selected probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 but the probability setting value can not be changed.

  The probability setting value display device 153 is a 7-segment display, and is configured to display the probability setting value with numbers 1 to 6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, as long as the display mode can recognize the probability setting value. In addition, a display device of another type such as a liquid crystal display device may be used, or the probability setting value may be indicated by the lighting mode or emission color of one or a plurality of LEDs. In addition, the probability setting value display device 153 may not be provided, and information on the probability setting value may be displayed using the state display device 160 for displaying the calculated base value and the character / object ratio. In this case, while operating on the probability setting value (probability setting value change state, probability setting value confirmation mode, etc.), information on the probability setting value is displayed, and in the other cases, the calculated base value and item ratio Give priority to the display.

  In the present embodiment, a setting value change button, a setting key operation unit, a probability setting value display device 153 and the like are provided in the game control apparatus 100, and the probability value used by the game control apparatus 100 for lottery of the special view fluctuation display game The probability setting value to which is assigned is a setting means that can be selected from a plurality of types of probability setting values by the operation of the operation unit. The function of the setting means may be provided on the setting sub-board and connected to the game control apparatus 100. That is, setting means may be provided separately from the game control apparatus 100. In this case, an operation signal of the setting value change switch 151 or the setting key switch 152 may be input to the game control apparatus 100 and the probability setting value may be changed by the game control apparatus 100. The probability setting value may be changed and determined based on the operation of the setting value change switch 151 or the setting key switch 152, and the determination result may be transmitted to the game control apparatus 100.

  Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main substrate 100 to the non-illustrated test shot test apparatus via the relay substrate 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for the operation of a normal IC from the power supply device 400. It has become.

  The data held by the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to a valid level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

  The input unit 120 also receives a frame radio wave unauthorized signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payment control device A signal indicating whether or not 200 can accept a command), a payout abnormal status signal (a status signal indicating a payout abnormal), a shoot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a shortage of gaming balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that gaming balls are stored in the lower plate 23 more than a predetermined amount (full)), Touch switch signal (input of a touch switch provided on the operation handle 24) Based on the detection at the out switch detecting all the game balls which have been fired to the game area 32 and finished the game. The first input port 122 is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 is provided via the data bus 140 takes in the Ku signal).

  In addition, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like. Has a function to remove noise from the The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise is removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, by outputting the reset signal RESET directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, the test injection test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test injection test apparatus is turned off. Is configured as. In addition, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be able to be output to the test irradiation test apparatus via the relay substrate 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to each port 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. It is necessary to reset the data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET enters, but it is necessary to reset the data of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET enters. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed in a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is set as one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal from the side of the effect control device 300 to the game control device 100.

  Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data indicating the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a test shot test device of a recognized organization (not shown) via a relay board 70 etc. An output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control apparatus (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as a real machine (mass-produced article for sale) installed in a game arcade. A detection signal of a switch which does not need to be processed, such as a starting opening switch, output from the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the test shooting test apparatus through the relay substrate 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals that can not be supplied to the test shooting test device as they are like the magnetic sensor 61 and the board radio wave sensor 62 are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. It is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay substrate 70 as an error signal indicating that it can not be done to the trial shot test apparatus. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test shot test device, and a connector that relays and transmits a signal line of a detection signal of a switch that does not pass the buffer. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and a signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test shooting test apparatus.

  The output unit 130 also includes a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 38 b connected to the data bus 140 to open the special fluctuation winning device 38 and a solenoid (common electric solenoid) 37 c opening the movable member 37 b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37. A second output port 134 is provided to output open / close data of In addition, the second output port 134 outputs display data of the state display device 160 for displaying the calculated base value and the bonus ratio.

  The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of FIG.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as the big hit information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or a game arcade internal management device (hall computer) etc.) installed in the game arcade. It can be supplied to an external device. The fifth output port 137 also outputs a release permission signal to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132. Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a sixth output port 170 for outputting display data of the probability setting value display device 153 for displaying the selected probability setting value.

  Furthermore, a first driver (drive circuit) 138a that generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal in response to the open / close data signal of the special winning opening solenoid 38b or the common power solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134 to the output unit 130. The second driver 138 b for outputting the on / off driving signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and the current of the batch display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136 Third driver 138c outputting on / off driving signal of lead-in side digit line, fourth driver 138d outputting external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to external device such as management device to external information terminal board 71 , The fifth for receiving the display data output from the second output port 134 and causing the state display device 160 to display Driver 138e is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC 32 V as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive a solenoid operating at 32 V. Further, DC 12 V is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment lines of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line according to the display data, the power supply voltage may be 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive system is achieved by flowing a current into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12 V and extracting the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in step S1 and is turned on. The fourth driver 138 d for outputting the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with 12 V DC to give a level of 12 V to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the relay board 70 side, not on the output section 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, the main board.

  Furthermore, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection apparatus 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can exchange data with the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such transmission and reception of data are performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, no ports like the input ports 122, 123, 124 are provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described using FIG. 4.
The effect control device 300 is for displaying an image on the display device 41 in accordance with a command and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 which comprises an amusement chip (IC) like the game microcomputer 111 and the main control microcomputer 311. A video display processor (VDP) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound to reproduce various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 has a program ROM 321 consisting of a program executed by the CPU and a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing various data, a RAM 322 for providing a work area, and storage contents even when power is not supplied at the time of power failure. A FeRAM 323 which can be held, and an RTC (real time clock) 338 which is a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (date, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the effect, and instructs the VDP 312 the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to play the sound, lights up the decoration lamp, and motor Execute processing such as driving control of the solenoid and management of presentation time.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area, and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. In addition, the VDP 312 is an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to expand and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) Is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, transmission / reception of data is performed between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the serial case.

  A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decoration lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30 to the microcomputer for main control 311 from the VDP 312, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT or the like is also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A voice ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The decoration control command signal (rendering command (rendering command, etc.) is transmitted via the command I / F 331 to the decoration special drawing reservation number command, decoration special drawing command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. Receive as). Since the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with the function of converting the signal level There is.

  In addition, in the effect control device 300, a panel decoration LED control circuit for driving and controlling a panel decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and the sub information display device 90. 332, a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15; a game board 30 (including the center case 40) A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided which drives and controls the provided panel effect device 44 (for example, a movable character that enhances the effect effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling the lamp, the motor, the solenoid and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. In addition, the glass frame 15 is provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect) and the like, and forms a movable effect device which performs game effects including a special view change display game A presentation device may be provided, and a frame presentation movable body control circuit may be provided to drive and control the frame presentation device.

  Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, the effect button switch 25a incorporated in the effect button 25 provided in the glass frame 15, the touch panel 29 provided in the glass frame 15, the initial position of the motor in the panel effect device 44, etc. To detect the on / off state of the effect combination product switch 47 (rendering motor switch) to detect the detection signal input to the main control microcomputer 311, the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 And a switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V of DC, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motor and LED, DC5V used as power supply voltage of command I / F 331, generates voltage of DC15V for driving motor, LED and speaker It is configured to Furthermore, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC − for generating 3.3 V DC or 1.2 V DC based on 5 V DC. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in a reset state. In addition, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling the lamp and motor etc Signal) to reset them. Further, a cooling fan 45 for cooling each part of the game machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling fan 45 is driven in a state where the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by striking a gaming ball (pachinko ball) from a launch device (not shown) toward the gaming area 32. The shot game balls run down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by turning members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the common view starting gate 34 and the general winning opening 35 The start winning hole 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 or the special fluctuation winning device 38, or flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32, and is discharged from the game area 32. And, when the game ball wins the general winning a prize opening 35, the starting winning a prize opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning a prize device 37 or the special fluctuation winning a prize device 38, the prize balls of the number according to the kind of the winning a prize opening won out From the dispensing unit controlled according to FIG. 3), it is discharged to the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 23 of the glass frame 15.

  A gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) including a non-contact switch or the like for detecting the gaming ball having passed through the common view start gate 34 is provided in the common view start gate 34, and the game area 32 When the game ball driven in passes through the inside of the drawing start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100, the number of common drawing start memories is an upper limit number (for example, four) based on the input of the detection signal of the gaming ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the common drawing start gate 34. If it is less than (1), the common drawing start memory number is added (+1) and one common drawing start memory is stored in the ROM 111B. The number of memories of the common drawing start winning combination is displayed on the common drawing reservation display 56 of the batch display device 50. Further, the common drawing start memory stores a random number value (hit random number) for hit determination for determining the result of the common drawing variation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the gaming ball from the gate switch 34a. It is supposed to be

  If the common drawing start memory is present and the common drawing fluctuation display game can be started, that is, the common drawing fluctuation display game is not being executed, and the common drawing fluctuation display game hits and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is converted to the open state. If it is not the hit state, the hit determination random number value stored in the first stored common drawing start memory is compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit deviation of the common drawing fluctuation display game And perform a process of starting a common drawing variation display game. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the common drawing variation display game becomes a hit, and a specific result aspect (common drawing identification result) is derived.

  Further, the game control apparatus 100 predetermines a plurality of lighting patterns predetermined for a predetermined fluctuation time in the common drawing indicator 53 provided on the collective display device 50 as processing for executing the common drawing fluctuation display game. After displaying the common map during the repeated display in the above order, a processing for displaying the common map change display game is performed to stop and display the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result. In addition, the ordinary drawing display 53 is configured by the display device 41, and for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc. are used as ordinary identification information, and after being displayed for a predetermined period of time, it is stopped and displayed. You may configure.

  If the result of the popular drawing variation display game is a hit, the lighting pattern which becomes any of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol which makes a special result aspect in the common symbol display 53 according to the type of hit. The stop display is performed, and the common power solenoid 37c is operated to perform control to open the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). When the result of the common drawing variation display game is a release, control is performed to display a lighting pattern which is a result of the deviation on the common drawing display 53.

  In addition, the winning balls to the start winning hole 36 and the winning balls to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a respectively provided inside. In the CPU 111A of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100, the first start memory, which makes a start memory (a special figure start memory) based on winning on the start winning hole 36, is limited to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). In addition to storing, the second starting memory which makes starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on the prize winning to the normal fluctuation winning a prize device 37 is stored with a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four pieces) as a limit. A big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as start memory information based on winning on the starting winning opening 36 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the extracted disturbances are extracted The numerical values are stored in the RAM 111B as the first start storage and the second start storage. Then, the number of stored start-up memories is displayed on the special view 1 reserve display 54 and the special view 2 reserve display 55 of the collective display 50, and the special view start store is also displayed on the display 41 of the center case 40. Displayed as a display. In addition, it is displayed also on the first sub display unit 91 and the second sub display unit 92 of the sub information display device 90.

  The CPU 111A of the game control device 100 stores the first start memory corresponding to the special view change display game to be started when the first special view change display game or the second special view change display game can be started. The determined big hit determination random number value is compared with a determination value stored in the ROM 111B and set according to the probability setting value, and a process of determining the hit of the special figure fluctuation display game is performed. Furthermore, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs, to the effect control device 300, a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special view variation display game to be executed.

  And, when executing the first special figure fluctuation display game, a plurality of lighting patterns predetermined by the special figure 1 display 51 (the fluctuation display device) are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order over a predetermined fluctuation time. After the special figure 1 is displayed during the change, a process is performed to display a first special figure change display game in which a lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is displayed in a stopped state. In addition, when the second special figure fluctuation display game is executed, a plurality of lighting patterns predetermined by the special figure 2 display 52 (the variable display device) are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order over a predetermined fluctuation time. After the special figure 2 is displayed during the change, a process of displaying a second special figure change display game in which a lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed.

  Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, characters) corresponding to the special view change display game on the display device 41 (the change display device). A process of displaying a decorative special view variable display game in which a symbol etc. is variably displayed is displayed. Further, the sub game display unit of the sub information display device 90 performs processing for displaying a decorative special view variable display game in which the light emission mode of the light emitting unit is changed corresponding to the special view variable display game. Furthermore, the effect control device 300 performs processing of setting of effect state, output of sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, control of light emission of various LEDs, and the like based on a control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling an effect on a game (a variable display game or the like).

  The decoration special figure variation display game in the display device 41 is, for example, a left variation display area (first special symbol), a right variation display area In each of the second special symbol) and the middle variation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is variably displayed (high speed variation) at a speed that makes identification difficult. Then, the symbols changing after a predetermined time are stopped sequentially in the order of the left change display area, the right change display area, and the middle change display area, and stopped in each of the left change display area, the right change display area, and the middle change display area. It is performed by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result mode configured by the displayed identification information. In addition, in the display device 41, various effect display such as appearance of a character is performed to improve interest.

  And, if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 becomes a special result aspect or a small hit result aspect to the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52. While displaying a lighting pattern, the processing which generates a special game state and a small hit game state is performed. In addition, the result mode of the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 corresponding to this is also a special result mode or a small hit result mode.

  In the processing to generate the special gaming state and the small hitting gaming state, for example, the CPU 111A of the gaming control device 100 opens the open / close door 38c of the special variation winning device 38 by the big winning opening solenoid 38b, and plays the game into the big winning opening Control to allow inflow of balls. Then, until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls win in the special winning opening, or a predetermined openable time elapses from the opening of the special winning opening, the special winning opening is achieved. Is a round, and the control (cycle game) is performed to repeat (repeat) this for a predetermined number of rounds. That is, when the stop result mode is the special result mode, the game control apparatus 100 forms a special winning opening / closing control means that performs control to open and close the special winning opening. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is disapproval, control is performed to display a result mode of the deviation on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state is a state in which the probability of being a hit result in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that of the normal probability state. In addition, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure even in the high probability state based on the result form of the special figure fluctuation display game of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game Both of the variable display games are in high probability state.

  Further, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game, the game control apparatus 100 can generate the time saving state (specific gaming state, common drawing high probability state, second operation state) as the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state It has become. In this short time state, the probability (common drawing probability) to be the hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is set to a high probability (general drawing high probability state) higher than 0 which is the normal probability (general drawing low probability state) Is possible. As a result, control is performed so that the opening time of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 per unit time is larger than that in the case where the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the low probability state. Here, in the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 in the present embodiment, the drawing probability is set to 0 so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state. That is, the operation state of the normal fluctuation winning a prize device 37 is controlled in any one of the first operation state and the second operation state in which winning is easier than the first operation state. .

  Further, in the time saving state, the execution time of the common drawing variation display game (general drawing fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 ms, and the common drawing stop time for displaying the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is, for example, 600 ms, When the common game variation display game hits and results in the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 being opened, the opening time of the first hit stop symbol (general electric station opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500 ms × 1 time), The opening time of the second stop symbol (general power opening time) and the number of opening (for example, 1700 ms × 2 times), the third opening time of the stopping symbol (general power opening time) and the number of opening (for example, 1700 ms × It can be set to be 3 times).

  In addition, the execution time of the common drawing fluctuation display game, the common drawing stop time, the number of times of general electric power release, and the general electric power release time are appropriately set to perform control to set the common fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the short time operation state. For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (general drawing fluctuation time) of the common drawing fluctuation display game described above to be a second fluctuation time shorter than the first fluctuation time. (For example, 10000 ms is 1000 ms). Moreover, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the common drawing stop time for displaying the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms is 704 ms). Further, in the time saving state, when the common drawing fluctuation display game hits and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (the general public opening time) is the normal state (general drawing low probability state) It is possible to control to become the 2nd opening time longer than 1 opening time (for example, 100 ms is 1352 ms). Also, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 (the number of times of general electric power release) is greater than the number of first open times (for example, 2 times) with respect to one hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second opening number of times (for example, four times). Also, in the time saving state, the probability of becoming a hit result of the common drawing variation display game (general drawing probability) is higher than the normal probability (general drawing low probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operating state. It is possible to have a probability (generally high probability state, for example, 250/251).

  In the short time state, the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the common drawing fluctuation time, the common drawing stop time, the number of common power release times, the common power release time, and the common drawing probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. Moreover, it is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states which are different from each other. In the case of a hit, either the first open mode or the second open mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be made different. Also, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently of each other, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

  The special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display, but each special view fluctuation display so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game is displayed. Also, the display device 41 may use separate display devices or separate display areas in the first special view variable display game and the second special view variable display game, or use the same display device or display area. The decoration special feature variation display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently and simultaneously, though it is good. Further, the special view variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41 without providing the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52 in the gaming machine 10. In addition, the second special view variation display game is executed with priority over the first special view variation display game. That is, when there is a start memory of the first special view variation display game and the second special view variation display game and the execution of the special view variation display game becomes possible, the second special view variation display game It is to be executed (prioritized). Further, in the description of the present embodiment, when the first special view variation display game and the second special view variation display game are not distinguished from one another, they are simply referred to as a special view variation display game.

  Although not particularly limited, the start opening 1 switch 36a in the start winning opening 36, the start opening 2 switch 37a in the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, the special winning opening switch 38a, an out switch for detecting all the game balls that have been shot into the game area 32 and finished the game, has a coil for detecting magnetism, and utilizes the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when metal approaches the coil. Non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as proximity switch) for detecting Also, a micro-switch having a mechanical contact on the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like and the body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 etc. Can be used.

  Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine which performs such a game will be described. First, control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 5 and 6 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7 which is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be described. The main process is started by turning on the power. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 6, after the process of prohibiting the interrupt (step S1) is performed first, the start address of the area for saving the value of the register etc when the interrupt occurs. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of this embodiment, the range of the address of the RAM is 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the upper order, and the head 00h is set in step S4. Next, a signal for stopping the emission is output to set the emission permission signal to the prohibited state (step S5). The release permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop the release, and the release of the game ball is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 3 (third input port 124) is read (step S6), and a process of setting the power on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, the program of the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) which performs various controls in accordance with the instruction from the game control device 100 forming the main control means by setting a predetermined initial value. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) to wait for normal activation is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 temporarily rises first, and sends a command to the slave control apparatus before the slave control apparatus (for example, the payout control apparatus 200 or the presentation control apparatus 300) starts up. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control apparatus 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control apparatus (the payout control apparatus 200, the effect control apparatus 300, etc.) It constitutes a standby means for setting a standby time.

  Further, the power-on delay timer counts time by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register other than the validity determination target) which is not a target of the validity determination (check sum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area is calculated, it is not necessary to exclude and calculate a part of the RAM area, and it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

  A signal from the setting value change switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 and a signal from the main frame opening detection switch are input to the third input port 124, and the third input port 124 receives the third waiting time before the start of the standby time. By reading the state of the input port 124, the state of the setting value change switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 when the power is turned on, and the open state of the front frame 12 (body frame) can be grasped. That is, the game control device 100 forms an open / close detection means capable of detecting the open / close state of the front frame 12. As described above, when the power is turned on with the front frame 12 open and the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position, the probability setting value change state in which the probability setting value can be changed It becomes. In addition, when the power is turned on while the setting value change button is pressed without setting the setting key of the setting key operation unit to the second position, the RAM 111C is cleared (initialized). ing. Since the setting key operation unit and the setting value change button can not be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened, it is considered that the front frame 12 is opened.

  By reading the state of the third input port 124 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the setting value change button can be reliably detected. That is, if the state of the set value change switch 151 is read after the standby time has elapsed, it is necessary to continue operating the set value change button from the power on to the elapse of the standby time. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it is not necessary to perform such a bothersome operation, and it is possible to prevent a situation where the initialization operation performed at the time of power on can not be accepted.

  After the process of setting the power on delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the waiting time and monitoring the occurrence of the power failure during the waiting time (steps S8 to S12) are performed. First, set the number of times (for example, 2 times) to read the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 through the port and data bus and check (step S8), and determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (step S9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). Then, if the on state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination (step S9) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. If the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process waits for the power of the gaming machine to be shut off. As described above, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period, thereby appropriately coping with a failure at the time of power on can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 functions as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to cope with a power failure that has occurred during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that forms the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a problem at the time of power on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the previous power-off are kept, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the waiting time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, if a power failure does not occur, the power on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11). Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the value of the timer is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, if the waiting time is over, the access permission of read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step S13). And outputs the off data to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port provided in advance in the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15).
Next, it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example 5 Ah) (step S16), and if normal (step S16; Y), the power failure in the RWM It is determined whether the value of the inspection area 2 is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S17). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S17; Y), the checksum calculation processing of calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S18), and the calculated checksum and power off It is determined whether the check sums of the two match (step S19). That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes validity determination means for determining whether the information stored in the storage means at the time of power on is valid. If the checksums match (step S19; Y), the RAM clear start address 2 is set (step S20), and it is determined whether or not the probability setting value change state (step S21). If the probability setting value change state is in effect, it can be determined because the probability setting value changing flag is set.

  If it is in the probability setting value change state (step S21; Y), the process proceeds to step S35 to perform processing of initializing the RAM and changing the probability setting value to a probability setting value change state. Here, it is determined that the probability setting value is being changed when the power is shut off while the probability setting value is changing, and the data in the RAM is normally backed up. In this case, the probability setting is again set. The value is changed. If it is not in the probability setting value change state (step S21; N), it is determined whether the main body frame (front frame 12) is in the open state from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier (step S22).

  In the storage area of the RAM 111C, an area for probability setting values, an area for initial value random numbers, an area for variation pattern random numbers, an area for game control, and an area for state display are set in order from the top. In the area for probability setting value, there is a probability setting value area for storing information on the probability setting value currently set, and a working area for temporarily storing various information in the process of changing or confirming the probability setting value. Be done. The work area includes a work probability setting value area for storing information on the probability setting value selected in the probability setting value change state, and an area for storing various flags. In the area for initial value random numbers, a big hit symbol initial value random number, a small hit symbol initial value random number, a hit initial value random number, and a hit symbol initial value random number which are updated as needed are stored. In addition, fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 updated as needed are stored in the area for fluctuation pattern random numbers. Further, in the area for game control, a work area in which information (various data and programs) necessary for performing game control is stored, and a stack area are set. Further, in the work area for displaying a state, a work area in which information necessary for displaying a base value, a feature ratio, and the like is stored, and a stack area are set.

  The base value is calculated from the number of game balls detected at the out switch that detects all the game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been fired into the game area 32 and finished the game and the number of payouts based on the winnings in the winning area. The information required to display the base value includes, for example, information on the number of detected gaming balls at the out switch and information on the number of payouts based on the winning in the winning area. In addition, the item ratio is the jackpot state (that is, fanfare and ending of the total number of balls (total number of balls) obtained by winning the winning opening from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 until the present time The percentage (the so-called continuous character ratio) of the number of winning balls (the number of balls earned by character) obtained by winning the big winning opening in the middle) is the information necessary to display the character ratio For example, includes information on the total number of winning balls (total number of winning balls), and information on the number of winning balls (number of balls obtained by character).

  The RAM clear top address 2 is the top address of the area for the initial value random number, and the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variation pattern random number, and the area for the random value random number are processed by clearing the RAM with this address set. The game control area is cleared. The area for the initial value random number and the area for the variation pattern random number may not be included in the clear target. Also, the RAM clear top address 1 described later is the top address of the area for probability setting value, and the area for probability setting value, initial value random number is obtained by performing processing to clear the RAM with this address set. The area for the area, the area for the variation pattern random number, and the area for the game control (the work area and the stack area) are cleared. Furthermore, the RAM clear top address 3 described later is the top address of the game control area, and the game control area is cleared by performing processing to clear the RAM with this address set. Become.

  The status display area is judged to be correct in status display edit output processing in timer interrupt processing to be described later, and is initialized if it is abnormal, but the backed up information is not normal. In the process of clearing the RAM in the state where the RAM clear top address 1 set in the case is set, the state display area may also be initialized. That is, in the process of clearing the RAM in the state where the RAM clear top address 1 is set, all areas of the RAM 111C may be initialized.

  In the checksum calculation process of step S18 and later-described step S57, the checksum is calculated for only the work area for game control. Note that one or more of the area for probability setting value, the area for initial value random number, the area for variation pattern random number, the area for game control, and the area for state display may be used. When a plurality of areas are targeted, the checksums of the respective areas may be calculated individually, and the legitimacy may be determined individually, or the checksums of the respective areas may be summed and the legitimacy may be calculated. It may be determined collectively.

  If the body frame is in the open state (step S22; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the on state from the state of the third input port 124 read in advance (step S23). When the setting key switch is in the on state (step S23; Y), the process proceeds to step S35, and performs processing of initializing the RAM and processing of changing the probability setting value to the probability setting value changing state. If the setting key switch is not on (step S23; N) or if the body frame is not open (step S22; N), the process proceeds to step S24, and the state of the third input port 124 read in advance Then, it is determined whether or not the setting value change switch is in the on state (step S24).

  When the setting value change switch is not in the on state (step S24; N), the process proceeds to step S30, and the process in the case of normal recovery from the power failure is performed. If the setting value change switch is on (step S24; Y), the process proceeds to step S41, and initialization of the area for initial value random numbers, the area for variation pattern random numbers, and the RAM area for gaming control Do the processing. That is, the setting value change switch 151 also has a function as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 is data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. The initialization means to initialize the

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the power failure inspection area is not normal check data (step S16; N or step S17; N), and if it is determined that the checksums do not match (step S19; N), the process proceeds to step S25. Then, the process of initializing all RAM areas is performed. That is, the RAM area for probability setting value and the RAM area for state display are initialized only when the RAM abnormality occurs. Further, the area for initial value random numbers, the area for variation pattern random numbers, and the RAM area for game control are not only when the setting value change switch 151 is turned on as described above, but also when a RAM abnormality occurs. Is also initialized.

  First, the RAM clear start address 1 is set (step S25), and it is judged from the state of the third input port 124 read in advance whether the body frame (front frame 12) is in the open state (step S26). If the body frame is in the open state (step S26; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the on state from the state of the third input port 124 read in advance (step S27). If the setting key switch is in the on state (step S27; Y), the process proceeds to step S35 to perform processing of initializing the RAM and processing of changing the probability setting value to the probability setting value changing state. As described later, the RAM is initialized in steps S35 and S36. In this case, since the RAM clear start address 1 is set, the area for probability setting value, initial value random number is used. The area of the variable pattern random number area and the area for game control (work area and stack area) are cleared to save the initial value. The state display area may also be initialized here.

  If the setting key switch is not on (step S27; N) or if the body frame is not open (step S26; N), the command (specific information) for setting change instruction is sent to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S28), the RAM access is inhibited (step S29), the control is stopped, and the power of the gaming machine is waited for. In the effect control device 300, the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, and the operation of the panel effect device 44 based on receiving the setting change instruction command. The notification that prompts the user to change the probability setting value is performed, for example, by outputting voices from the speakers 19a and 19b. This notification continues until the power of the gaming machine is shut off.

  In this case, the power supply of the gaming machine is turned off, and then the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position with the front frame 12 opened. If the power is turned on again, the setting key is processed in step S27. The switch is determined to be on (step S27; Y), and the process proceeds to step S35 to perform a process of initializing the RAM and a process of changing the probability setting value to a probability setting value change state. When the control is stopped by shifting to step S29, the power supply of the gaming machine is shut off and then the front frame 12 is not opened or the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not rotated to the second position. When the power is turned on again, the data in the RAM remains abnormal and the state can not be shifted to the probability setting value change state, so that the processes in steps S28 and S29 are performed again.

  In addition, although it is made to alert | report by transmitting setting change instruction | command command to the production control apparatus 300 in step S28, you may make it the game control apparatus 100 alert | report. For example, notification may be performed on the batch display device 50 controlled by the game control apparatus 100, and a display not used as identification information is performed on the special view 1 display 51 or the special view 2 display 52. It is also possible to provide a display for reporting an abnormality.

  In step S30 of FIG. 6 as processing when the power is restored normally from the power failure, the initial value upon power failure restoration is saved in the area to be initialized (step S30). The area to be initialized here is an area relating to a power failure inspection area, a checksum area and an error fraud monitoring. Note that the busy signal status area storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can receive a command, is also cleared to indicate that the state of the payout busy signal is not determined. It is in an undetermined state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the touch switch signal state is set to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal is not determined. Thereafter, the area storing the gaming state in the RWM is checked to determine whether the probability state of the special view fluctuation display game is the high probability state (step S31).

  Here, when it is not in the high probability of the special view (step S31; N), the process skips steps S32 and S33 and shifts to step S34. Also, when the special drawing is in high probability (step S31; Y), the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S32), and the high probability notification LED (error indicator) provided on the game board 30 (On) data is saved in the segment area (step S33).

  And the command at the time of a power failure restoration corresponding to the processing number prepared in order to rationally execute the below-mentioned special figure game processing is transmitted to the production control board (presentation control device 300) (step S34), step S45 Go to In the case of the present embodiment, in step S34, a model designation command, a special figure 1 pending number command, a special figure 2 pending number command, a probability information command, probability setting value information which is information of selected probability setting value, screen designation A plurality of commands such as commands (for example, a customer waiting demo command in the customer waiting state, and a recovery screen command in other cases) are transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, the presentation frequency information command and the high probability frequency information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting probability setting value information that is information of the probability setting value selected to the effect control device 300, performing an effect according to the probability setting value, or providing a game effect according to the probability setting value It is possible to execute an effect of suggesting or notifying a probability setting value, such as making the selection probability different.

  The screen designation command transmits a command according to the resumed game state. When the special view variation display game interrupted due to the power supply interruption is resumed with the restart of control, the recovery screen command forming the recovery information is transmitted as the screen designation command. Further, in this case, the information on the result of the special view fluctuation display game to be resumed is also transmitted. In addition, when the power is shut off while waiting for customers and the control is resumed in the waiting for customers state due to restoration of the power supply, the customer waiting demo command is transmitted as a screen specification command. Further, when the special gaming state interrupted by the power-off is to be resumed along with the resumption of control, the special gaming state resume command is transmitted as the screen designation command.

  Further, in step S35 of FIG. 6, the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (step S35) to initialize the process of initializing the RAM and changing the probability setting value to a state where the probability setting value can be changed. The initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area (step S36). Here, when the backed up information is normal and the process proceeds from step S21 or S23, since the RAM clear top address 2 is set, an area for initial value random numbers, an area for fluctuation pattern random numbers, and game control The RAM area (work area and stack area) is cleared to 0 and the initial value is saved. That is, the area for the probability setting value and the area for the state display are not initialized. However, the area for the initial value random number and the area for the variation pattern random number may not be cleared.

  On the other hand, when the backed up information is abnormal and the process proceeds from step S27, since the RAM clear start address 1 is set, the area for the probability setting value, the area for the initial value random number, and the area for the variation pattern random number And the game control area (work area and stack area) is cleared and the initial value is saved. That is, the game control apparatus 100 forms an initialization unit capable of initializing the storage unit based on the operation of the operation unit (here, the setting key operation unit). The state display area may also be initialized here.

  Further, the area to be initialized is an area where it is desired to set a value other than 0 among the areas cleared to 0, for example, an area related to setting of a customer waiting demo area and an effect mode. When all the RAM areas are cleared to 0, the probability setting value becomes setting 1 by setting 0 in the probability setting value area. By setting the probability setting value with the lowest probability, it is possible to minimize the damage to the game arcade even when the RAM is cleared due to an abnormality or a wrongdoing. If a value other than 0 is set as the initial value, it is possible to set a specific probability setting value (for example, setting 3) when all of the RAM area is initialized.

  Thereafter, a probability setting value change in progress flag is set as processing for changing the probability setting value to a probability setting value change state (step S37). As a result, the probability setting value is changed. Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S38). As a result, information of the probability setting value currently set on the probability setting value display device 153 can be displayed.

  Then, the value of the probability setting value area is loaded and saved in the operation probability setting value area (step S39), and the command under the probability setting change is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S40) , Shift to step S45. In the effect control device 300, the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, and the display of the panel effect device 44 based on receiving the command under probability setting change. A notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed is provided by the operation, the output of voices by the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like. Although the RAM is initialized, the command at the time of RAM initialization is not transmitted to the effect control device 300 here. In addition, setting for outputting a security signal is also performed. In this case, the timer may be set to output the security signal for a predetermined time, or the security signal may be continuously output during the period in which the probability setting value is changed. Further, since the initialization of the RAM has not been performed yet, the setting for outputting the security signal may not be performed.

  Further, as the process of initializing the RAM area for game control, at step S41 of FIG. 6, the RAM clear start address 2 is set (step S41), and the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (step S42). The initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be stored (step S43). As a result, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variation pattern random number, and the RAM area (the work area and the stack area) for game control are cleared to 0 and the initial value is saved. In addition, setting of a timer for outputting a security signal is also performed. That is, the game control apparatus 100 forms an initialization unit capable of initializing the storage unit based on the operation of the operation unit (here, the setting value change button).

  Then, a command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S44), and the process proceeds to step S45. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S44, a model designation command, a special figure 1 pending number command, a special figure 2 pending number command, a probability information command, probability setting value information which is information of selected probability setting value, RAM initial A plurality of commands such as an activation command (a command for displaying a notification of RAM initialization with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) while transmitting a customer waiting demo screen) are transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, the presentation frequency information command and the high probability frequency information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting probability setting value information that is information of the probability setting value selected to the effect control device 300, performing an effect according to the probability setting value, or providing a game effect according to the probability setting value It is possible to execute an effect of suggesting or notifying a probability setting value, such as making the selection probability different.

  In step S45, processing is performed to activate a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator). The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating the random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process of step S45, the random number generation circuit is activated and set (step S46). Specifically, setting of a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit to a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit is performed by the CPU 111A. Further, setting of bit transposition pattern of hard random numbers (here, big hit random numbers) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also performed. The bit transposition pattern is a method to replace the bit arrangement of the extracted random number (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and store it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after the bit transposition in the lower row) Is a pattern that determines By replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the secrecy of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Also, it may be set arbitrarily by the user.

  Thereafter, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on are extracted, and corresponding various initial value random numbers (in the case of the present embodiment, random numbers for determining symbols per special drawing) (Big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random number to determine the hit of the common drawing (hit random number), RWM specified as the initial value (start value) of the random number to determine the hit symbol of the common drawing (hit symbol random number) After saving in the area (step S47), the interrupt is permitted (step S48). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment is configured to change the initial value of the soft random number register every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing this, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software, and to make it difficult for the player to obtain an incorrect random number.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number updating process (step S49) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers and break the regularity of the random numbers. In the present embodiment, in the initial value random number update process, the big hit symbol initial value random number, the small hit symbol initial value random number, the hit initial value random number, and the hit symbol initial value random number are updated (for example, +1 updated). Here, "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that becomes the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure variation display game, "small hitting symbol initial value random number" is the special figure variation display It is a random number which becomes the initial value of the random number which decides the small hitting stop design of the game. In addition, "the initial value random value per hit" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit for the common pattern variation display game, and "the initial value random symbol per pattern" is a stop symbol for the common pattern variation display game A random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines Thus, the randomness of the random number can be enhanced by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time allows in the main processing. In addition, small hit design random numbers naturally do not exist in models without small hits. In addition, depending on the model, there is also a gaming machine in which there is no hit symbol initial value random number.

  Also, although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, the hit symbol random number are generated using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. Is configured as. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" updated based on a clock equal to or faster than the CPU operation clock, and the big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, hit symbol random number is a program processing It is a "low-speed counter" updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC 2 different from CTC (CTC 0) in timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as timer interrupt processing as a unit. Also, in the big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, hit symbol random number, so-called "initial value changing method of changing the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number makes a round Is adopted. Each of the random numbers may be a counter type update by +1 or -1, or may be a random type update in which all values within the range appear apart without overlapping until one round. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number is a random number updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number updating process in step S49, the number of times (for example, 2) for checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 via the port and data bus and checking is set (step S50). It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step S51). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S51; N), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process (step S49). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the check (loop processing) of the power failure monitoring signal are repeated. By permitting the interrupt (step S48) before the initial value random number update process (step S49), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is performed. By waiting for the initial value random number updating process, it is possible to avoid the pressure on the interrupt process.

  In addition to the main processing, there is also a method of performing initial value random number update processing in the timer interrupt processing in addition to the main processing, and when such a method is adopted, the initial value random number update processing in step S49 above In order to prevent the value random number update process from being performed, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit the interrupt and then update and cancel the interrupt. There is no problem in canceling the interrupt before the initial value random number update process if the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed but is performed only in the main process, and the main process It has the advantage of being simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S51; Y), it is determined whether the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks set in step S50 (step S52). Then, if the on state of the power failure monitoring signal for the number of checks has not continued (step S52; N), the process returns to the determination (step S51) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. In addition, when the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step S52; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the processing for temporarily prohibiting the interrupt (step S53) A process (step S54) of outputting off data to the output port is performed.

  Thereafter, the blackout inspection area check data 1 is saved in the blackout inspection area 1 (step S55), and the blackout inspection area check data 2 is saved in the blackout inspection area 2 (step S56). Further, a checksum calculation process (step S57) for calculating a checksum at power-off of the RWM, and a process (step S58) for saving the calculated checksum, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S59) ) And wait for the power to the game machine to shut off. As described above, by saving check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating a checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is determined whether or not the information stored in the RWM is correctly backed up before the power shutdown. It can be judged at the time of reinjection.

  From the above, main control means (game control apparatus 100) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and slave control means (disbursement control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. Standby control means for setting a predetermined standby time for waiting for activation of the slave control device by delaying activation of the main control device when the power is turned on. And 100) and the blackout monitoring means (game control apparatus 100) for monitoring the occurrence of blackout in the predetermined standby time.

  Further, the power supply device 400 for supplying power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that the power failure has occurred.

  Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (setting value change button, setting key operation unit) capable of external operation, and an initialization operation unit. And initialization means (game control apparatus 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time. It becomes.

  Also, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

  In the above main process, after performing the process of step S28, the process may return to the process of step S26, and the processes of steps S26 to S28 may be repeated until the setting key switch is turned on. . That is, the control of the game may be stopped to wait until the setting key switch is turned on. In this case, in steps S26 and S27, the determination is made not based on the state of the third input port 124 read in step S6, but on the basis of the state of the third input port 124 at the present time. Furthermore, when the state in which the processes in steps S26 to S28 are repeatedly performed continues for a predetermined time, the process may move to step S29 to wait for the interruption of the power.

  Furthermore, here, the condition for shifting to the probability setting value change state where the probability setting value can be changed is that the main frame (front frame 12) is in the open state and the setting key switch is in the on state. The open state of the frame 12 may not be a condition. In addition, both the opening of the front frame 12 and the opening of the glass frame 15 may be conditions, or the opening of the glass frame 15 may be only.

  Further, without providing the setting key switch, the state may be shifted to the probability setting value changing state only on the condition that the setting value changing switch is in the on state. That is, without performing the processes of steps S22 and S23, the process may move to step S35 of FIG. 6 when the setting value change switch is on at step S24 (step S24; Y). In this case, although the process of steps S41 to S44 in FIG. 6 for initializing the area for initial value random numbers, the area for variation pattern random numbers, and the area for game control is not performed, the setting is changed in the probability setting value change state. It is possible to initialize only the area for initial value random numbers, the area for variation pattern random numbers, and the area for game control by ending without setting or setting the same probability setting value. By shifting to the probability setting value changing state only on the condition that the setting value changing switch is on as described above, the configuration of the RAM clear switch in the conventional pachinko gaming machine can be diverted.

  From the above, it is possible to execute the game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, in the gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state for giving the player a gaming value The control unit (game control apparatus 100) for performing control, the probability setting value to which the probability value used for drawing the game is assigned, the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value Storage means (RAM 111 C) which comprises setting means (gaming control apparatus 100) capable of selecting from a plurality of probability setting values by operation of the change switch 151), and the control means is capable of holding stored contents even when the power is shut off ), The validity determination means (game control apparatus 100) for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is valid when the power is turned on, and the probability setting value is selected. And an initialization unit (game control apparatus 100) capable of initializing the storage unit based on the operation of the operation unit, and the validity determination unit determines that the information stored in the storage unit is not valid. When it is determined that the notification has been made, the notification to prompt the selection of the probability setting value is performed. Therefore, it is possible to urge return to a normal state. In addition, by initializing the RAM 111C, the information on the probability setting value set in the game arcade is also lost and the initial value is set. However, the initialization prompting to select the probability setting value is performed. It is possible to prevent the probability setting value being unintended by the game arcade from being set.

  The control means is configured to be able to select the probability setting value when the operation unit is operated when the power is turned on, and the information stored in the storage means by the validity determination means is If it is determined that the notification is not valid, the notification to prompt the selection of the probability setting value is continued until the power is shut off. Therefore, it is possible to urge recovery to the normal state and prevent the gaming machine from remaining in the state where the probability setting value is not set by the initialization.

  Further, the control means is configured to stop the control of the game and wait for the selection of the probability setting value when the validity determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not valid. It will be. Therefore, it is possible to urge recovery to the normal state and prevent the gaming machine from remaining in the state where the probability setting value is not set by the initialization.

  The game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game and effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect based on the information from the game control means are provided. When it is determined by the validity determination means that the information stored in the storage means is not valid, the specific information is transmitted to the effect control means to stop the control of the game, and the effect control means On the basis of the reception of the probability setting value. Therefore, it is possible to urge recovery to the normal state and prevent the gaming machine from remaining in the state where the probability setting value is not set by the initialization.

  Further, when the specific information is received, the effect control means continues to notify the user to select the probability setting value until the power is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to urge recovery to the normal state and prevent the gaming machine from remaining in the state where the probability setting value is not set by the initialization.

  In addition, the game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is controlled in the gaming machine capable of generating the special gaming state for giving the player the gaming value The first operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)) and the second operation unit (setting value) are control means (game control apparatus 100) and probability setting values to which probability values used for lottery of the game are assigned. A setting unit (game control apparatus 100) capable of selecting from a plurality of probability setting values by operation of a change button (setting value change switch 151)), and the control unit can hold stored contents even when the power is shut off If the first operation unit and the second operation unit are not operated when the power is turned on, recovery is performed based on the information stored and held in the storage unit, and the power is turned off. At the same time, when the first operation unit is operated, it is in a changeable state that allows the probability setting value to be changed by the setting means, and when only the second operation unit is operated when the power is turned on, storage is performed. It means that the means has been initialized. Therefore, the work of changing the probability setting value and clearing the RAM can be selectively performed using the minimum operation unit, and the work efficiency in the game arcade can be improved. In addition, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, which can reduce the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced.

  Further, the setting means can change the probability setting value by operating the second operation unit in the changeable state. Therefore, the operation of selecting the probability setting value and the operation of selecting initialization can be performed using the same operation unit, and the work efficiency in the game arcade can be improved. In addition, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, which can reduce the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced.

  In addition, the control means includes legitimacy determination means (game control apparatus 100) for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is valid when the power is turned on, and the validity determination means stores the information in the storage means. If it is determined that the information being processed is not valid and the first operation unit has not been operated, a notification prompting initialization of the storage means is performed. Therefore, it is possible to urge return to a normal state.

  Further, the control means is configured to be in a changeable state enabling change of the probability setting value by the setting means and to initialize the storage means when the first operation unit is operated when the power is turned on. And the first operation unit is operated when it is determined that the information stored in the storage unit is not valid by the validity determination unit and the first operation unit is not operated. The notification for prompting the user to turn on the power is performed. Therefore, it is possible to urge return to a normal state.

  In addition, the game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is controlled in the gaming machine capable of generating the special gaming state for giving the player the gaming value Control means (game control apparatus 100) and probability setting values to which probability values used for lottery of the game are assigned, a plurality of operation units (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change Necessary for controlling the game by setting means (game control apparatus 100) which can be selected from plural types of probability setting values by the operation of the switch 151) and control means including information of probability setting values selected by the setting means Storage means (RAM 111C) capable of storing information, and the control means is configured to turn on the game machine when a predetermined operation unit of the plurality of operation units is operated. Storage means so that the was is initialized. Therefore, the work of changing the probability setting value and clearing the RAM can be selectively performed using the minimum operation unit, and the work efficiency in the game arcade can be improved. In addition, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, which can reduce the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 7, the timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 7 is started.

  When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step S101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same process as step S4 in the main process is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input from various sensors and switches, and taking in of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S103) is performed. Then, based on the output data set in the various processes, an output process (step S104) is performed to control the drive of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b, a common power solenoid 37c). Note that when a signal for stopping the emission is output in step S5 in the main processing, the output processing causes the emission permission signal to be output, and the emission permission signal can be set to the permission state. The launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing is performed. Further, the release permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of release permission seen from the game control device, and a second signal (release permission signal) indicating the state of release permission viewed from the payout control device is also the payout control. It is generated in the device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the gaming ball is configured to be in a state where it can be launched.

  Next, random number update process 1 (step S105) for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, hit symbol random number, which is the target of the initial value random number update processing (step S105) First, random number update processing 2 (step S106) is performed to update the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 2. After that, monitoring whether or not there is an input of a normal signal from start opening 1 switch 36a, start opening 2 switch 37a, gate switch 34a of common drawing, winning opening switch 35a, big winning opening switch 38a, monitoring of error ( A winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S107) is performed to determine whether the front frame and the glass frame are opened.

  Next, a probability setting value change process (step S108) is performed to perform processing regarding change and confirmation of the probability setting value, and it is determined whether or not the probability setting value is changed (step S109). If the probability setting value change state is in effect, it can be determined because the probability setting value changing flag is set. If it is not in the probability setting value change state (step S109; N), it is determined whether it is in the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S110). In the probability setting value confirmation mode, the probability setting value can not be changed but the probability setting value currently being set can be confirmed.

  When it is not the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S110; N), a payout command transmission process (step S111) for outputting a command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 as a process related to the progression of the game. A special drawing game process (step S112) for performing a process related to a figure variation display game and a common drawing game process (step S113) for performing a process related to a common drawing variation display game are performed. On the other hand, if it is in the probability setting value change state (step S109; Y) or if it is in the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S110; Y), the process proceeds to step S114 without performing the above processing relating to the game. That is, in the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode, it is determined that the game can not be progressed.

  If the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode is selected, the payout command transmission processing (step S111), the special figure game processing (step S112), and the common-play game processing (step S113) are not performed. However, one or more of these may be performed. For example, the payout command transmission process (step S111) may be performed to pay out the winning balls. Also, processing other than the above-described processing may be included as processing not performed in the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode. For example, the random number updating process 1 (step S105) or the random number updating process 2 (step S106) is not performed in the probability setting value change state, and the random number update is not performed in the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode. You may Further, the types of processing for not executing in the probability setting value change state and the probability setting value confirmation mode may be different.

  Next, segment LED editing processing (step S114) provided in the gaming machine 10 to drive the segment LED for displaying the special view variation display game and displaying various information related to the game to display desired content (step S114) Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S115) which performs processing to check the detection signal from the sensor to determine whether there is an abnormality or board radio fraud that performs processing to check the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is an abnormality A monitoring process (step S116) is performed. Then, external information editing processing (step S117) of setting signals output to various external devices to the output buffer is performed, and a base value is obtained from the number of detected gaming balls at the out switch and the number of payouts based on winnings in the winning area. The state display editing and output process is performed to calculate the and the like (step S118), and the timer interrupt process is ended.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying the register bank 0) Automatically at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Note that, depending on the CPU to be used, there are gaming machines that need to be instructed to execute a process of restoring an interrupt disabled state and a process of restoring a register bank specification.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (step S104) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 8, in the output process, first, off data is output (reset) to the output port 135 which outputs data of the segment of the batch display device (LED) 50 (step S141). Next, the data to be output to the output port 134 for outputting the data of the special winning opening solenoid 38b and the common control solenoid 37c are synthesized and output (step S142).

  Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S143), and the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is obtained (step S144). In the case of this embodiment, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3. Next, the acquired data and external information data are combined (step S145), and the combined data (for example, data of "door / frame open" data of "security signal") are output ports for digit / external information output It outputs to 136 (step S146).

  Thereafter, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S147), and the loaded data is output to the output port 135 for segment output (step S148). As a result, the plurality of light emitting display portions provided in the collective display device 50 are controlled by dynamic control.

  Subsequently, various output data of external information are synthesized (step S149), and the synthesized data (for example, data of "big hit signal 1", data of "big hit signal 2", data of "big hit signal 3", "big hit signal" Output data of 4 ", data of" pattern decision number signal ", data of" starting opening signal ", data of" main prize ball signal ") and output data of firing permission (step S150), and the synthesized data is The information is output to the output port 137 for outputting the external information / emission permission signal (step S151).

  Next, off output data of probability setting value display is set as display content in the probability setting value display device 153 (step S152), and it is determined whether a probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S153). The probability setting value display permission flag is a flag that is set when the probability setting value display device 153 is permitted to display the probability setting value.

  If the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S153; Y), the probability setting value display data is loaded from the probability setting value display data area (step S154), and the display data is output of the probability setting value display The data is output to the port 134 (step S155). As a result, the probability setting value display unit 153 displays the probability setting value. On the other hand, when the probability setting value display permission flag is not set (step S153; N), the display data is output to the output port 134 of the probability setting value display (step S155). In this case, the off output data set in step S152 is set, and nothing is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153.

  Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test injection test device is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S156). Thereafter, data output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 which outputs a test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S157).

  Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test injection test device is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S158). Furthermore, the data output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S159). Then, data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs a test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S160).

  Next, test signal output data of the probability setting value is loaded (step S161). Here, the probability setting value display data is loaded as test signal output data from the probability setting value display data area. That is, for the information on the probability setting value among the test signals to the test sampling device, the display data of the probability setting value display device 153 is used as it is. As a result, the processing is simplified, and the information of the probability setting value does not change, and accurate information can be output. Of course, display data may be converted into value information and output.

  Then, it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the on state (step S162), and when it is not in the on state (step S162; N), the process proceeds to step S184. If it is on (step S162; Y), the loaded data and the setting key switch on information are combined (step S163), and the process proceeds to step S184. Thereafter, the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 6 on the relay substrate 70 which outputs a test signal to the test shooting test apparatus (step S164), and the output processing is completed.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step S111) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 9, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

  The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control apparatus 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The prize number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out the prize balls, and the prize for which the payout command has not been transmitted yet The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 forms a winning ball command counter capable of storing information on the winning ball command.

  The winning number counter area 2 is for transmitting a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of prize balls (the expected number of payouts) generated by the winning on the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here 10). In the area to be used, data of winning corresponding to the winning balls not subjected to the generation processing of the main winning ball signal is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 forms a main winning ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main winning ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, a payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). It is possible to monitor fraudulent payments by collating these two signals.

In these winning number counter areas, the winning number counter area is set according to the number of winning balls set for each winning opening (three winning balls, 10 winning balls, 14 winning balls in the case of this embodiment). The counter number of the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by one based on the winning on the winning opening. That is, the information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. The winning number counter area 1 is assigned a wider area than the winning number counter area 2 so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, while transmission may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 to which the payout command is the transmission destination. This is because data may be accumulated.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, up to 65535 winnings can be stored in the three prize ball counter area, the ten prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 1, respectively. The three prize ball counter area, the ten prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 2 are configured to be able to store up to 255 prizes.

  In the process of checking whether there is a count in winning number counter area 2 (step S181), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each winning ball number, “0” in the winning number counter area to be checked. Determine if there is a non-count number. Then, when there is no count number (step S181; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is judged whether the checking of the counting numbers of all winning number counter areas is completed. It determines (step S183). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S192. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S183; N), the process returns to step S181 and the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area → 10 prize ball counter area → 14 prize ball counter area.

  If it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S184), and the target winning number counter area 2 The number of payouts corresponding to the address is acquired (step S185). Then, the value of the winning balls remaining number area and the acquired number of payouts are added (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the remaining winning balls area (step S187). In addition, as the value of the remaining number area of winning balls before this processing, a fraction which does not meet a predetermined number serving as a reference of the output of the main winning ball signal is stored.

Thereafter, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189), and if it is not 0 or more (step S189; N), the process proceeds to step S192. If the number is 0 or more (step S189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, whenever the number of remaining winning balls is ten, the number of outputs of the main winning ball signal is updated by +1.
Then, the subtraction result is saved in the remaining number area of the winning balls (step S191), and the process returns to the process of step S188. As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control apparatus 100 forms an external information output unit that outputs a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out with the winning of the game ball in the predetermined pay area. . In addition, when the payout of the game ball such as during a big hit is concentrated by outputting the main prize ball signal, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game ball, and the accurate occurrence occurred during the big hit It is possible to prevent such a problem that the number of winning balls can not be counted.
Here, the process of steps S181 to S191 is a process of updating (increasing) the number of outputs of the main winning ball signal, and the process of steps S192 to S201 is a process of transmitting a payout command.

  In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become "0" (step S193). If the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process is ended. If the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is in the busy state (step S194).

  The payout busy signal indicates whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control, and the payout busy signal is in the on state (busy state) when the payout control can not be immediately started. Be done. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal makes a state signal indicating whether the payout control means (the payout control device 200) can start the payout control.

  If the payout busy signal is in the busy state (step S194; Y), the payout command transmission process is ended. That is, in the present embodiment, the payout command is not transmitted for each timer interrupt, but a predetermined time elapses (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 can pay the prize ball. When in the state, it is configured to transmit a payout command. As described above, when the payout control device 200 can not immediately start the payout control and does not transmit the payout command, it is possible to perform the useless processing by preventing the subsequent processing regarding the transmission of the payout command. We try to prevent and reduce the burden of control.

  The conditions for the payout busy signal to be in the on state (busy status) are, for example, during the payout operation, the ball lending operation, the shoot ball out error, the overflow error, the frame radio wave illegal occurrence, the payout ball detection switch (dispensed The number of prize balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control device 200 during an abnormality of a switch for monitoring a shot ball, a shortage of payout error, a payout excess error, and the number of unpaid balls Etc) (when it is not = 0) etc.

  If the payout busy signal is not in the busy state (step S194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195). In the process of checking whether there is a count in winning number counter area 1 (step S195), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each winning ball number, "0" in the winning number counter area to be checked. Determine if there is a non-count number.

  Then, when there is no count number (step S195; N), the address of winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196), and it is judged whether the checking of the counting numbers of all winning number counter areas is completed. It determines (step S197). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step S 197; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 and the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area → 10 prize ball counter area → 14 prize ball counter area.

  If it is determined in step S195 that there is a counted number (step S195; Y), the counted number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198), and the target winning number counter area 1 The payout amount command corresponding to the address of is acquired (step S199). Then, the acquired payout amount command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is ended. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and 200 ms is set as an initial value, for example.

  As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one winning in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls the payout of a predetermined number of winning balls based on the payout command. That is, the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control output from the payout control means (the payout control device 200) indicates that the game control device 100 can start the payout control. In this case, the winning ball command transmitting means transmits the winning ball command to the payout control means.

  As described above, since the game control apparatus 100 controls the game ball command to be transmitted based on the state signal output from the payout control apparatus 200, the award is made only when the payout control apparatus 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winnings that have not been paid out will be held on the game control device 100 side, so when a power failure occurs, it will be backed up by the game control device 100 and backed up to the payout control device 200. Accurate dispensing control can be realized without providing the function for

  In a conventional gaming machine (e.g., the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when the power is shut off due to some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its own storage means, and immediately before the power is shut off. The payout control state based on the data of is maintained. However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the cost increases because the function for backing up is required. According to the present invention, accurate dispensing control can be realized without providing the dispensing control device 200 with a function for backup.

  Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to an external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay, and the external device such as a hall computer can pay out the prize balls. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be grasped accurately. Further, since the prize ball instruction counter capable of storing information on the prize ball instruction and the main prize ball signal counter capable of storing the information on the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball instruction and the main prize ball having different transmission timings Information on signals can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

  From the above, the game control is generally performed, and the game ball to the winning area (start winning hole 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37, general winning hole 35, special fluctuation winning device 38) provided in the game area 32 Game control means (game control apparatus 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of the game, and payout control means (payout control device) for controlling the payout of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means 200), and the game control means controls the payout ball command based on the status signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control. The control to transmit to the means is performed, and when a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, the payout ball command is immediately issued even if the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is outputted from the payout control device. Payment The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means in response to the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is continuously output from the payout control means over the predetermined period without transmitting to the control means. It will be like that.

  In addition, the game area 32 is provided with a plurality of winning areas with different numbers of winning balls (start winning hole 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37, general winning hole 35, special fluctuation winning device 38), and the game control means (game control device 100) The prize ball command counter (game control apparatus 100) which can specify the presence or absence of non-transmission of the prize ball command which instructs the payout control of the game ball for every prize ball number, the state signal can start the payout control , And when there is an unsent winning ball command in each winning ball command counter, the winning ball command is sent to the payout control means (the payout control device 200), and the status signal indicates the payout control means It will be made to specify before specification of whether or not the payout control can be started before specification of whether or not there is an unsent winning ball command in each winning ball command counter.

  In addition, the game control is performed in an integrated manner, and a winning ball command is issued based on the winning of the gaming ball to a predetermined winning area (start winning hole 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37, general winning hole 35, special fluctuation winning device 38). A game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a game, and a payout control means (payout control device 200) for performing a payout control of a game ball based on a prize ball command sent from the game control means; The control means is configured to control the payout ball command when the status signal output from the payout control means and indicating that the payout control means can start the payout control indicates that the payout control can be started. A prize ball signal transmitting means (game control apparatus 100) to be sent to the means, and a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal) including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out with the winning of the gaming ball in a predetermined prize area. Of the gaming machine The external information output means (game control apparatus 100) to output to the unit, and the external information output means determines whether the state signal output from the payout control means can start the payout control or not The output of the winning ball signal is performed regardless of.

  In addition, even if the prize ball command transmission means (game control apparatus 100) generates a power failure and returns from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately issued even if the status signal indicates that payout control can be started. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (the payout control device 200), and the winning ball command is issued in response to the state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started continues for a predetermined period. It will be transmitted to the payout control means.

  In addition, the game control means (game control apparatus 100) can store information on the award ball signal counter (game control apparatus 100) capable of storing information on the award ball command and the information on the award ball signal (main award ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control apparatus 100) is provided, and the prize ball command transmission means (game control apparatus 100) has a predetermined winning area (start winning hole 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37, general winning hole 35, special fluctuation) The winning ball command is generated on the basis of one winning to the winning device 38), and one winning ball command is paid out when the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started. The game ball command counter (game control apparatus 100) can store information on the winnings in units of one winning on a predetermined winning area, and can play the game on the predetermined winning area. Ball winning The number of award ball commands not transmitted can be stored by updating in response to the transmission to the award ball command to the payout control means, and the external information output means is configured to perform predetermined winnings. It is configured to accumulate the number of winning balls determined to be paid out with the game ball to the area, and to output a winning ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine every time the accumulated value reaches a predetermined number, and the winning ball signal counter The information of the winning can be stored on the basis of one winning in a predetermined winning area, and the game ball is updated at the time of winning in a predetermined winning area, and the number of winning balls by the external information output means is accumulated. By updating in accordance with the processing, it is possible to store the number of winning balls that have not been subjected to the accumulation processing.

Further, in the present embodiment, a main prize ball signal is output from the game control device 100 every time the planned number of game balls to be paid out becomes ten, and the payout control device 200 has ten game balls paid out. The main prize ball signal is output each time
Specifically, the game control apparatus 100 updates the main prize ball number signal output frequency by +1 (subroutine in the payout command transmission process) every 10 payout schedules (every time the payout command is transmitted), and updates (subroutine in the payout command transmission process) The main prize ball signal is output as many times as the number of outputs set.
Since the prize ball signal is transmitted from the payout control device 200 every time 10 pieces of payout are actually performed for the main prize ball signal outputted for each schedule, the schedule and the result can be matched, It is possible to respond to fraudulent withdrawals. In addition, even if you win during the big hit period, the payout is delayed due to a lack of balls, etc., and even if it is paid out after the big hit, the hall computer (hall computer) is accurate by the main prize ball signal output at the time of winning Information can be collected (judged).

[Prize port switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 10 shows the winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S107) in the timer interrupt process. In this winning opening switch / state monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value changing state is set (step S299). If the probability setting value change state is in effect, it can be determined because the probability setting value changing flag is set. If it is not in the probability setting value change state (step S299; N), it is determined whether it is in the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S300). In the probability setting value confirmation mode, the probability setting value can not be changed but the probability setting value currently being set can be confirmed.

  When it is not the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S300; N), the process after step S301 is performed as a process regarding progress of a game. On the other hand, if it is in the probability setting value change state (step S299; Y) or in the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S300; Y), the process proceeds to step S309. That is, in the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode, it is determined that the game can not be progressed without performing the processing relating to the winning.

  In the probability setting value change state or in the probability setting value confirmation mode, it is to monitor the fraud and prize of the special fluctuation winning device 38, monitor the fraud and prize of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and can always win the prize opening. It is not necessary to monitor the winnings of the above, but one or more of these may be monitored. For example, the fraud monitoring of the special variation winning device 38 or the normal variation winning device 37 may be performed. Also, processing other than the above-described processing may be included as processing not performed in the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode. For example, the processing after step S309 may not be performed. Further, the types of processing for not executing in the probability setting value change state and the probability setting value confirmation mode may be different.

  In step S301, the winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one big winning opening switch 38a in the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) is prepared (step S301), and the large winning opening is large despite the opening. The fraud & prize monitoring process (step S302) is performed to monitor whether there is an illegal prize at the prize opening and to detect a normal prize.

  In the winning opening monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether there is an input on the target switch, a lower address of fraud monitoring information, a lower address of a fraud winning number area, a fraud winning error notification command, a fraud winning The information of the number upper limit value (the number of irregularities judged), the address of the winning opening switch table, and the notification timer update information (permission / update) is defined. In addition to the number of repetitions of monitoring (number of switches) in the winning table of the winning opening monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit, lower address of winning number counter area 1, winning number counter area 2 for each switch. The lower address information of is defined. The winning opening monitoring table is prepared for each of the switches to be monitored.

  Thereafter, the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other big winning opening switch 38a in the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) is prepared (step S303), and the large winning is achieved despite the fact that the special winning opening is not open. An illegal and prize monitoring process (step S304) is performed to monitor whether there is an illegal prize in the mouth and to detect a normal prize.

  Next, prepare a winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in Puden (step S305), and monitor whether there is an unfair winning in the Fuden despite the fact that it is not open At the same time, a fraud & prize monitoring process (step S306) is executed to detect a normal prize. Then, the prize hole monitor table of the prize hole switch (for example, the starting hole 1 switch 36a and the prize hole switch 35a of the general prize hole 35) which can always be prized is prepared (step S307) A process (step S308) is performed.

  Next, a state scan counter for specifying in order which switch or signal of the plurality of switches whose state should be monitored and which signal is to be the target of the current monitoring is updated (step S309). In the case of the present embodiment, the state scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Thereafter, in accordance with the value of the state scan counter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared (step S310). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S311) is performed to determine whether or not an error has occurred.

  In the case of the present embodiment, by referring to the value of the status scan counter in the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, when the value of the status scan counter is “0”, a switch abnormality is output due to the occurrence of connector disconnection or the like of the switch. The monitoring of the state based on one signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “1”, the monitoring of the state based on the shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the status scan counter is “2”, monitoring of the status based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is “3”, monitoring of the status based on the payout abnormality status signal is configured. Ru.

  Next, in accordance with the value of the state scan counter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared (step S312). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S313) is performed to determine whether or not an error has occurred.

  In the case of the present embodiment, by referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, when the value of the state scan counter is "0", it is based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch 63. The monitoring of the state is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “1”, the monitoring of the state based on the signal output from the main body frame opening detection switch 64 is set. Moreover, when the value of the state scan counter is "2", monitoring of the state based on the frame radio wave illegal signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "3", monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is It is set.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S314). If the value of the error scan counter is not "0" (step S314; N), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is performed. finish. In this case, there is no monitoring target of the state in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. If the value of the error scan counter is "0" (step S314; Y), the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S315), and the gaming machine determines whether or not an error has occurred. A state check process (step S316) is performed.

  In the case of this embodiment, by referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, when the value of the state scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality is output due to the occurrence of connector disconnection or the like of the switch. Monitoring of the state based on two signals is set. The gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is "1" to "3".

  Thereafter, a payout busy signal check process (step S317) is performed to check a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control, and the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is ended. Note that the processing in steps S315 to S317 is executed only when the value of the status scan counter updated at each timer interrupt is “0”, so that it is executed at a rate of once every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processes of steps S315 to S317 are performed every 16 ms.

Probability setting value change processing
FIG. 11 shows the probability setting value changing process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process. In this probability setting value changing process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value changing state is set (step S401), and if it is not the probability setting value changing state (step S401; N), a process of enabling confirmation of the probability setting value The probability setting value confirmation process is performed (step S422), and the probability setting value changing process is ended.

  If the probability setting value change state is determined (step S401; Y), if the probability setting value extinguishing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S402), and it is determined whether the probability setting value extinguishing timer is 0 . If the probability setting value extinguishing timer is 0 (step S403; Y), the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S404), and the process proceeds to step S405. In this case, information on the probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 by the above-described output process (see FIG. 8). If the probability setting value extinguishing timer is not 0 (step S403; N), the process proceeds to step S405. In this case, the probability setting value display permission flag is not set, and nothing is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 by the above-described output processing.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the probability setting value has been changed (step S405). The probability setting value changed is a state in which a probability setting value to be used in the game is newly set by performing a determination operation described later, and in this case, a probability setting value changed flag is set. If the probability setting value has been changed (step S405; Y), the process proceeds to step S416. If the probability setting value has not been changed (step S405; N), it is determined whether there is an input from the setting value change switch (step S406).

  Then, in the determination whether there is an input from the setting value change switch (step S406), it is determined whether the input state from the setting value change switch has changed to the on state. That is, it is determined whether the probability setting value change button has been pressed. If there is no input from the setting value change switch (step S406; N), the process proceeds to step S411.

  In addition, when there is an input from the setting value change switch (step S406; Y), the value of the work probability setting value area is updated by +1 in the range of 0-5. The values of 0 to 5 in the working probability setting value area correspond to setting 1 to setting 6, respectively, and the value of the working probability setting value area is updated by +1 each time the setting value change button is pressed. The probability setting value to be selected changes sequentially. When the value of the work probability setting value area is updated by 1 in the state of 5, it returns to 0. Further, at this stage, only the value of the work probability setting value area is changed, and the value of the probability setting value area storing the probability setting value used for the game does not change. The probability setting value selected based on the determination operation described later is saved in the probability setting value area. Moreover, although the number of probability setting values is six here, it is also possible to set it as numbers other than this.

  Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the work probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S408). Thus, the data displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 becomes information of the newly selected probability setting value. Then, an initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the probability setting value extinguishing timer area (step S409), and the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (step S410). As a result, the display of the probability setting value display device 153 is turned off and blank display is performed without displaying anything as a specific display for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms) from the operation of the setting value change button. Will be displayed. By doing this, it can be understood that the display has been updated.

  Here, a blank display in which nothing is displayed is set as the specific display, but a display other than this may be used. For example, when displaying with probability setting value by 1 to 6 numbers, display other than this number may be specified display. That is, the specific display may not be used as the display of the probability setting value. In addition, when displaying the display of the probability setting value in a continuous lighting state, the display of the probability setting value after updating may be blinked as a specific display. That is, the specific display may be a display mode different from the display mode after the elapse of the specific display. Examples of the display mode used as the specific display include a display mode to blink, a display mode in which the flickering cycle is different from when it is not the specific display, and a display mode in which the display color is different from the case where the display is not specific .

  Further, information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the operation of the setting value change button, and the display of the display device 41 or the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 or the panel decoration device 46, the panel effect device 44 The specific notification which is the notification that the selected probability setting value has been changed may be performed by the operation of the above, the output of the sound by the speakers 19a and 19b, or the like. That is, specific notification may be performed in combination with or in place of the specific display. Further, the display similar to the probability setting value display device 153 may be performed on the display device 41, the special view 1 display 51, and the special view 2 display.

  Next, it is determined whether there is an input from a touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 (step S411). The touch switch is a sensor capable of detecting the touch of the human body on the operation handle 24, and outputs a signal when there is a touch. If there is no input from this touch switch (step S411; N), the probability setting value change processing is ended. If there is an input from the touch switch (step S411; Y), the value of the working probability setting value area is loaded and saved in the probability setting value area (step S412). Thereby, the selected probability setting value is set as the probability setting value to be used for the game. That is, it is a determination operation of determining the probability setting value selected by touching the operation handle 24. Of course, an operation other than this operation may be used as the confirmation operation, or an operation unit for the confirmation operation may be provided in the setting means.

  Thereafter, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S413). Next, the probability setting value changed flag is set (step S414), a command of probability setting value change is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S415), and the probability setting value changing process is ended. . In the effect control device 300, the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, and the display of the panel effect device 44 based on receiving the command of probability setting value change. The notification that the probability setting value has been changed is performed by the operation, the output of voice by the speakers 19a, 19b, or the like.

  On the other hand, if the probability setting value has been changed (step S405; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is off (step S416). If the setting key switch is not turned off (step S416; N), that is, if the setting key of the setting key operation unit is in the second position, the probability setting value changing process is ended. If the setting key switch is off (step S416; Y), that is, if the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not at the second position, the RAM clear start address 3 is set (step S417). The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S418), and the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S419).

  As a result, the RAM area (work area and stack area) for game control is cleared to 0 and the initial value is saved. In addition, setting of a timer for outputting a security signal is also performed. That is, the area for the probability setting value, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variation pattern random number, and the area for the state display are not initialized. However, the area for the initial value random number and the area for the variation pattern random number may be cleared. In addition, the area related to the change work such as the work probability set value area for temporarily storing information of the probability set value selected in the probability set value change state and various flags in the area for the probability set value is cleared. Ru. Therefore, since the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared, the display on the probability setting value display device 153 is ended. In addition, since the probability setting value changing flag is cleared, the probability setting value changing state ends.

  Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S420), and the probability setting change end command is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) Step S421) The processing proceeds to step S48 of the main processing shown in FIG. In the effect control device 300, the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, and the display of the panel effect device 44 based on receiving the command of probability setting value change. The notification that the change of the probability setting value has ended is performed by the operation, the output of the sound by the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like. This notification also serves as a notification that the RAM has been initialized.

  In the case of the present embodiment, in step S421, model designation command, special figure 1 pending number command, special figure 2 pending number command, probability information command, probability setting value information which is information of selected probability setting value, probability setting A plurality of commands such as a command to end change (displaying a customer waiting demo screen, and a command for notifying of the RAM initialization with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)) are transmitted. The command of termination of probability setting change may be a RAM initialization command. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, the presentation frequency information command and the high probability frequency information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting probability setting value information that is information of the probability setting value selected to the effect control device 300, performing an effect according to the probability setting value, or providing a game effect according to the probability setting value It is possible to execute an effect of suggesting or notifying a probability setting value, such as making the selection probability different.

  From the above, it is possible to execute the game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, in the gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state for giving the player a gaming value Based on the operation of the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)), probability setting values to which probability values used for lottery are assigned are set to a plurality of probability setting values. And a display unit (probability setting value display device 153) for displaying information of the selected probability setting value, and the setting unit is based on the operation of the operation unit. When the display of the display unit is updated in response to the selection operation of the probability setting value, the specific display is performed over a predetermined period from the update. Therefore, it can be made easy to understand that the display has been updated, and the selected probability setting value can be clearly grasped.

  Further, the setting means displays a display not used as a display of the information of the probability setting value as the specific display. Therefore, it can be made easy to understand that the display has been updated, and the selected probability setting value can be clearly grasped.

  In addition, the setting means displays the updated information in a manner different from that after the elapse of the predetermined period over the predetermined period as the specific display. Therefore, it can be made easy to understand that the display has been updated, and the selected probability setting value can be clearly grasped.

[Probability setting value confirmation processing]
FIG. 12 shows the probability setting value confirmation process (step S422) in the probability setting value changing process. In this probability setting value confirmation process, it is first determined whether or not the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress (step S431). In the probability setting value confirmation mode, the probability setting value can not be changed but the probability setting value currently being set can be confirmed. In this probability setting value confirmation mode, it can be determined because the probability setting value confirmation mode in-progress flag is set.

  If the mode is not the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S431; N), the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (step S432). As a result, a state in which nothing is displayed as the display of the probability setting value display device 153 is set. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a game is being played (step S433).

  During the game is during the execution of the special figure change display game, during the execution of the common view change display game, during the special game state or during the hit state of the common view. That is, it is a case where the state of the game is a prohibition state which prohibits the probability setting value confirmation mode from being started. If the game is in progress (step S433; Y), the probability setting value confirmation process is ended. That is, when in the game, it does not shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode. In this case, information may be transmitted to the effect control device 300 indicating that it is not possible to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode since the game is being played, and notification may be made to that effect.

  The conditions for determining that a game is in progress (prohibited state) is not limited to the one described above. The special figure variation display game may be executed, the special figure variation display game is being executed, the special gaming state, or one or more states selected from among the hitting state of the general figure as a condition, for example, the special figure A game may be in progress if any of the variation display game is being executed or in the special game state. In addition, conditions other than the above may be added. For example, when the operation handle 24 is operated and there is an input from the touch switch, it may be determined that the game is in progress and the mode does not shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode.

  In addition, even if it does not shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode as the game is in progress for a predetermined period after detecting the gaming balls with the out switch which detects all the gaming balls which are shot to the game area 32 and finished the game. good. In addition, while the front frame 12 is closed, it may be determined that the game is in progress and the mode does not shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode. In addition, it is possible not to shift to the probability setting value check mode during the power saving mode, which is shifted when a certain period of time elapses while a game is not being performed. The power saving mode is released as the front frame 12 is opened, and being in the power saving mode can be regarded as the front frame 12 being closed.

  If the game is not in progress (step S433; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the on state, that is, the operation unit is operated to be in the predetermined state (step S434). If the setting key switch is not in the on state (step S434; N), the probability setting value confirmation process is ended. If the setting key switch is on (step S434; Y), the probability setting value confirmation mode in-progress flag is set (step S435), and the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S436). As a result, the probability setting value confirmation mode is started, and information of the probability setting value currently set as the display of the probability setting value display device 153 is displayed.

  Thereafter, the initial value is saved in the security signal control timer area (step S437), and the command under confirmation of the probability setting value is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S438). finish. When the probability setting value confirmation mode is started, a security signal is output over a predetermined period as external information. Further, in the effect control device 300, the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, and the panel effect based on reception of the command under probability setting value confirmation. By the operation of the device 44, the output of voices by the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like, notification that the probability setting value is being confirmed is provided.

  On the other hand, when in the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S431; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the on state (step S439). If the setting key switch is in the on state (step S439; Y), the probability setting value confirmation process is ended. In this case, the probability setting value confirmation mode continues.

  If the setting key switch is not on (step S439; N), the probability setting value confirmation mode in-progress flag is cleared (step S440), and the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (step S441). As a result, the probability setting value confirmation mode ends, and a state in which nothing is displayed as the display of the probability setting value display device 153 is set. Then, a command for ending the probability setting value confirmation is transmitted to the effect control board (the effect control device 300) (step S442), and the probability setting value confirmation process is ended. In the effect control device 300, the notification that the confirmation of the probability setting value is in progress is ended based on the reception of the command of the probability setting value confirmation end.

  That is, the probability setting value confirmation mode is started by turning the setting key of the setting key operation unit to the second position in a state where the power is turned on, and is ended by returning from the second position. When the power is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position, the probability setting value is changed.

  As described above, by not shifting to the probability setting value confirmation mode even when the setting key switch is turned on when playing the game, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being known while the game is in progress. , Fairness of the game can be secured. It should be noted that although in the game, the setting key switch is not switched to the probability setting value confirmation mode even when the setting key switch is turned on, but the setting key switch is turned on during the game and the game is not in progress When it becomes, it transfers to probability setting value confirmation mode from that time. By doing this, since it becomes possible to automatically check the probability setting value when the game does not progress, the efficiency of the confirmation operation can be improved.

  In addition, although the condition for preventing the transition to the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress during the game, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the condition transitions to the probability setting value confirmation mode according to the state of the game controlled by the game control device 100 What is necessary is to select whether or not to. For example, when in the high probability state, the mode may not shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode. Further, as described later, when a predetermined abnormality occurs, the mode may not shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode.

  From the above, it is possible to execute the game based on the establishment of the start condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, in the gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state for giving the player a gaming value The control unit (game control apparatus 100) for performing control, the probability setting value to which the probability value used for drawing the game is assigned, the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value Setting means (game control apparatus 100) capable of selecting from a plurality of probability setting values by the operation of the change switch 151), and the setting means is based on the operation unit being operated to be in a predetermined state If it is possible to set a confirmation state in which confirmation of the probability setting value is possible and the gaming state controlled by the control means is a prohibition state that prohibits the start of the confirmation state, Work unit is that it has not to a confirmation state be a predetermined state. Therefore, it becomes possible to select whether or not to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode according to the state of the game, and it is possible to prevent the inconvenience due to the indication of the probability setting value.

  Also, the prohibited state is that the game is in progress. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being known while the game is in progress, and to ensure the fairness of the game.

  In addition, the prohibited state is a state in which a special gaming state is in progress. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being known while the game is in progress, and to ensure the fairness of the game.

  In addition, the game ball can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball can not be won, and an open state in which the game ball can be won easily, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 capable of generating the right to execute the game by winning is satisfied. Based on the regular drawing game (general drawing variation display game) is executed, and when the result of the general drawing game becomes a specific result, the hit state (general drawing hit state) to convert the normal fluctuation winning device 37 to the open state A normal fluctuation winning device control means (game control device 100) which can be generated, and the prohibited state is a state in which the regular game is being executed or in the hit state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being known while the game is in progress, and to ensure the fairness of the game.

  In the setting means, the operation part is brought into the predetermined state in a state in which the state of the game controlled by the control means is in the prohibition state, and the prohibition state is ended when the prohibition state is ended while being in the predetermined state. It will be in a confirmation state based on the end. Therefore, since it becomes possible to automatically check the probability setting value when the game does not progress, the efficiency of the checking operation can be improved.

[Special figure game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game process (step S112) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the special view game process, the monitoring of the input of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the control of the entire processing related to the special view variation display game, and the setting of the display of the special view are performed.

  As shown in FIG. 13, in the special view game process, first, a starting opening switch monitoring process (step A1) is performed to monitor winning of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when there is a winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variation winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (big hit random numbers etc.) are extracted, A game result prior determination is performed in which the game result based on the winning is determined in advance before the start of the figure variation display game.

  Next, the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, processing is performed to monitor the detection of the gaming ball at the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variation winning device 38.

  Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A3). In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4). If the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, reference is made to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number. The special figure game sequence branch table to be set is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game process number (step A7).

At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "0", the variation start of the special figure variation display game is monitored, and the setting of the variation start of the special figure variation display game, the setting of the effect, the special figure variation A special drawing routine processing (step A8) is performed to set information necessary for performing processing.
At step A7, when the special figure game process number is "1", the special figure variation process which performs setting of the stop display time of the special figure, setting of information necessary for performing the special figure display process, etc. (Step A9) is performed.

  If the special figure game processing number is "2" at step A7, and if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit, the big winning opening of each big hit The special chart display process (step A10) is performed to set the fan fare time according to the release pattern, set the information necessary for performing the fan fare / interval process, and the like.

If the special figure game processing number is "3" at step A7, the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening and the updating of the number of times of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the special winning opening opening process, etc. A fanfare / interval process (step A11) is performed.
At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "4", while the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the interval command, the processing of setting the ending command when the final round, the big winning opening remaining A special winning opening open process (step A12) is performed to set information necessary for ball processing.

If the special figure game processing number is "5" in step A7, if the big hit round is the final round, the process for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, the big hit end processing A special winning opening remaining ball process (step A13) is performed to set information necessary for the execution.
If the special figure game process number is "6" in step A7, a big hit end process (step A14) is performed to set information necessary for performing the special figure routine process.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is “7”, to set the opening time and opening pattern of the big winning opening when the small hit occurs, to set the fanfare command, to perform the small hit middle processing A small hit fanfare middle process (step A15) is performed to set necessary information.
At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "8", the small hitting middle process (step A16) is performed to set the ending command and the information necessary for performing the small hitting residual ball processing, etc. .
At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "9", a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining ball that has won in the big winning opening during the small hit middle process, a small hit end process The small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the above.
At step A7, when the special figure game process number is "10", small hit ending process (step A18) is performed to set information etc. necessary for performing the special figure routine process.

  Thereafter, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special view 1 display 51 (step A19), the symbol variation control process (step A20) related to the control of the special symbol variation by the special view 1 display 51 is performed . And after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (step A21), the symbol fluctuation control processing (step A22) concerning the control of the fluctuation of the special symbol by the special figure 2 display 52 is performed , The special figure game processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" at step A4 (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

  Note that the small hit is a result mode without the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device. The condition device is operated when a big hit occurs in the special view variation display game (big hit symbol stop display). When the condition device is activated, for example, a big hit occurs and it is special as a special motorized role. It means that a specific flag for operating the fluctuation winning device 38 continuously is set (the character continuous operating device is operated). If the condition device does not operate, it means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small hit lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag turned on / off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch turned on / off electrically. In addition, "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is required for continuous operation of a motorized accessory, and the same applies in this specification as well. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (step A1) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the starting opening switch monitoring process, first, the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36), a prize monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and hard random number acquisition processing (step A102) is performed. (1) It is determined whether or not there is a winning on the starting opening (step A103).
When it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning on the first starting opening (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a winning on the first starting opening (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special drawing time is short (during general public support) (step A104). ).

If it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is not short (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is short (step A104; Y), a right-handed command notification command is prepared (step A105), and the command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 An effect command setting process (step A106) is performed. That is, if it is a time saving state, regardless of the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game, a right-handed command notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. In the case of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the player does not win the prize unless the player strikes the left at the first starting opening (start winning opening 36), and does not win the prize unless the player normally strikes the normal fluctuation winning device 37. Therefore, in the time saving state, the game state in which the right hitting is more advantageous than the left hitting is advantageous, but there is a win in the first starting opening during the time saving state (that is, the left hitting in the time saving state) In addition, the presentation control device 300 is configured to send a right-handling instruction notification command to the effect control device 300 and perform notification (warning) instructing to perform a right-handling operation.
Next, after preparing a table for setting information on suspension by the first start port (start winning port 36) (step A107), the special view start port switch common process (step A108) is performed.

Next, prepare a second starting opening (normal fluctuation winning device 37) prize monitoring table (step A109), perform hard random number acquisition processing (step A110), and whether or not there is a winning to the second starting opening It determines (step A111).
If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning on the second starting opening (step A111; N), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning on the second starting opening (step A111; Y), the ordinary electric winning combination (normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37) is in operation, ie, normal fluctuation If it is determined whether or not the winning device 37 is activated and the gaming ball is in an open state in which winning of the gaming ball is possible (step A112), and it is determined that the ordinary electric role is in operation (step A112; Y), It transfers to the process of A114 and performs the process after it. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that the ordinary motor-operated combination is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether a common electric charge fraud is occurring (step A113).

  In the determination as to whether or not the general electric power fraud is occurring, it is determined that the fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent prizes to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is equal to or more than the fraud occurrence judgment number (for example 5). In the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the gaming ball can not be won in the closed state, and the gaming ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, when the gaming ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or injustice occurs, and when there is a gaming ball winning in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent winnings. Then, when the number of incorrect winnings thus counted is equal to or more than a predetermined number (upper limit value), it is determined that the fraud is in progress.

  If it is determined in step A113 that no ordinary power transmission is occurring (step A113; N), a table for setting information on suspension by the second starting port (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is prepared (step A114). The figure starting opening switch common processing (step A115) is done, it ends starting opening switch supervision processing. If it is determined in step A113 that a general power transmission fraud is occurring (step A113; Y), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated further.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps A102 and A110) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process will be described. As shown in FIG. 15, in the hard random number acquisition process, first, the winning absence information of the starting opening to be monitored among the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (normal variation winning device 37). The setting is made (step A121), and it is determined whether there is an input to the starting opening switch to be monitored among the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (step A122). Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process is ended. On the other hand, if there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether latch data is present in the target random number latch register (step A124). .

  If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number is extracted, the hard random number acquisition processing is ended. When latch data is present in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the extracted jackpot random number is loaded and prepared in the hard random number latch register to be monitored (step A125). Then, among the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (normal fluctuation winning device 37), the winning presence information of the starting opening to be monitored is set (step A126), hard random number acquisition processing finish.

[Special figure starting port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special view starting port switch common processing (steps A108 and A115) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring processing will be described. The special view starting opening switch common processing is processing that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the starting opening 1 switch 36a or the starting opening 2 switch 37a.

  As shown in FIG. 16, in the special view starting opening switch common processing, first, information on the number of winnings on the starting opening switch to be monitored among the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a is Load the starting opening signal output count which is the number of outputs to the external management device (step A131), update the loaded value by +1 (step A132), and determine whether the output count overflows (step A133) ). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the start aperture signal output number area of RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the number of times of output overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In the present embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start opening signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the value after updating becomes “0” by +1 updating, and it is determined that the number of times of output overflows.

  Next, it is determined whether the number of to-be-updated special figure reservations (starting storage) corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored among the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit (step A135). If the number of to-be-updated holdings to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A135; N), the special drawing starting opening switch common processing ends.

  In addition, when the number of to-be-updated special figure reservations is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), the number of to-be-updated special figures (number of specially-designated 1 reservations or specially-designated number 2) is updated +1 Step A136) Save the target starting opening winning flag (Step A137). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the number of start ports to be monitored and the number of special drawing reservations is calculated (step A138), and the big hit random number prepared in step A125 of hard random number acquisition processing is stored as the big hit random number of RWM. Save to the area (step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random numbers of the starting opening switch to be monitored are extracted and prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, it is determined whether or not it is a winning to the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) (step A142).
If it is determined in step A142 that it is not a winning on the first starting opening (step A142; N), the process proceeds to step A145.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A142 that the first starting opening has been won (step A142; Y), small hit symbol random numbers are extracted and prepared (step A143), RWM small hit symbols It saves in the random number storage area (step A144).

Next, the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step A145), and the special figure holding information determination process (step A146) is performed.
Then, prepare a decoration special view reservation number command corresponding to the start opening switch to be monitored and the special view reservation number (step A 147), perform the rendering command setting process (step A 148), and execute the special view start aperture switch common process. finish.

  Here, the game control apparatus 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the detection of the game ball in the start winning opening 36 and the starting area of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 and starts the right to execute the variable display game. A starting storage means is provided for storing a predetermined number as the upper limit as storage. Further, the start storage means (game control device 100) sets various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36) as the first start storage with the predetermined number as the upper limit. It stores and stores various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball on the second starting winning opening (normal variation winning device 37) as a second starting memory with a predetermined number as the upper limit.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
Next, the details of the special view hold information determination process (step A146) in the above-mentioned start port switch common process will be described. The special view reservation information determination process is a prefetch process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start storage prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game based on the corresponding start storage.

As shown in FIG. 17, first, the starting opening winning flag saved in step A137 of the special view starting opening switch common processing is checked to determine whether it is a winning to the first starting opening (starting opening 36). (Step A151).
If it is determined in step A151 that it is not a winning to the first starting opening (step A151; N), the process proceeds to step A154.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A151 that a winning on the first starting opening has been won (step A151; Y), it is determined whether the special drawing time is short (step A152).

When it is determined in step A152 that the special figure time is short (step A152; Y), the special figure hold information determination process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A152 that the special figure time is not short (step A152; N), it is determined whether the jackpot is medium or small hit (step A153).
If it is determined in step A153 that the jackpot is in the middle or the small hit (step A153; Y), the processing for determining the special map reservation information ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A153 that the big hit or small hit is not in progress (step A153; N), it is determined whether or not the big hit is based on whether the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value. A big hit determination process (step A154) is performed. Then, if the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), set a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch (step A156), and at step A140 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. The stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared big hit symbol random number is acquired (step A157), and the process proceeds to step A164.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step A155; N), it is determined whether it is a winning to the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) (step A158).
If it is determined in step A158 that it is not a winning on the first starting opening (step A158; N), stop symbol information of the release is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to step A164.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A158 that the first starting opening has been won (step A158; Y), the big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether it matches the small hit determination value or not A small hit determination process (step A159) to determine whether or not to perform. Then, if the determination result is not a small hit (step A160; N), the stop symbol information of the removal is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to step A164.
On the other hand, if the judgment result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A161), and the small hit symbol prepared in step A143 of the special view starting port switch common processing. The stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is acquired (step A162), and the process proceeds to step A164.

  Then, a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the target starting opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A164), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A165). Next, special figure information setting processing (step A166) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is performed, and variation pattern setting process for setting a variation aspect of the special figure variation display game is performed (step A 167).

  Thereafter, a look-ahead fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the first half fluctuation number indicating the first half fluctuation pattern and the second half fluctuation number indicating the second half fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation pattern of the special view fluctuation display game is prepared (step A168), and rendering command setting processing is performed. (Step A <b> 169) The special-image hold information determination process ends.

  The big hit determination process in step A 157 and the small hit determination process in step A 159 are the same as the processes shown in FIG. 20 and FIG. 21 executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure routine process. That is, the determination according to the set probability setting value is performed. In addition, the special figure information setting process in step A166 and the variation pattern setting process in step A167 are the same as the process executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure routine process.

  With the above processing, the prefetch pattern command including the result of the special pattern fluctuation display game based on the start memory of the prefetch target and the prefetch fluctuation pattern command including the information of the fluctuation pattern in the special pattern fluctuation display game based on the start memory are prepared And sent to the effect control device 300. Thereby, the effect control of the result related information (whether or not a big hit or the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is performed before the start timing of the special view fluctuation display game based on the corresponding start memory. The player can be notified of the result related information prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game by changing the decoration special view start memory display that can be notified to the device 300, in particular, displayed on the display device 41. It becomes possible to notify.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start winning memory storage means (game control device 100) before execution of the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether a special result is obtained (Determine whether or not etc.) Make pre-judging means. It should be noted that the time when the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the starting winning combination where the starting memory is generated but any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played Good.

[Special figure usual processing]
Next, details of the special view routine processing (step A8) in the special view game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 18, in the special view ordinary processing, first, it is determined whether the special view 2 reservation number (second start storage number) is “0” (step A301). If it is determined that the special figure 2 pending number is "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 pending number (first start storage number) is "0" (step A305). Then, if it is determined that the special drawing 1 reservation number is "0" (step A305; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started (step A309), and the customer waiting demo is not started (step A309) A309; N) sets the waiting for customer demonstration flag in the waiting for customer demonstration flag area (step A310).

Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A311), and an effect command setting process (step A312) is performed. Next, "0" relating to the special processing routine processing is set as the processing number (step A313), and the processing number is saved in the special processing game processing number area (step A314). Then, the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A315), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag region (step A316), and the special view ordinary processing is ended. That is, when it is possible to start the special view variation display game but the start condition is not satisfied, the customer waiting demo command forming the standby information is transmitted to the effect control device 300.
On the other hand, if the customer waiting demo has been started at step A309 (step A309; Y), the process proceeds to step A313 without performing the process of steps A310 to A312.

In addition, when the special figure 2 reservation number is not “0” at step A301 (step A301; N), a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number is prepared (step A302). Next, an effect command setting process (step A303) is performed, a special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A304) is performed, and the special figure normal process is ended.
If the special drawing 1 holding number is not "0" in step A305 (step A305; N), a decoration special drawing holding number command corresponding to the special drawing 1 holding number is prepared (step A306). Next, a rendering command setting process (step A307) is performed, a special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A308) is performed, and the special figure normal process is ended.

  As described above, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is performed when the special figure 2 pending number is not “0” by checking the special figure 2 pending number before the special figure 1 pending number check. Will be executed. That is, the second special view variation display game is executed with priority over the first special view variation display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start memory means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is the variable display based on the first start memory It is a priority control means that is executed prior to the game.

[Special figure 1 change start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A308) in the special figure normal process described above will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 19A, first, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, the special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A321). In order to determine whether the special figure variation display game is a big hit, shift information and big hit information is set in the big hit flag 1 to determine whether the first special figure variation display game is a small hit or not A big hit flag 1 setting process (step A322) is performed to set the shift information and the small hit information to the small hit flag of.

  Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A 323) according to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (pattern information), the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. An information setting process (step A324) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special drawing fluctuation display game is set. (Step A325). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern setting process (step A326) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation aspect in the first special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting process for setting information on fluctuation start of the first special figure fluctuation display game (Step A327) is performed.

Next, “1” according to the special figure variation process is set as the process number (step A328), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A329).
Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A330), and a signal relating to the start of fluctuation of the special view 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuating signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, save the in-fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), and select the initial value of the blinking control timer in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area Here, 100 ms is set (step A333). Next, an initial value (here, "0") is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (step A334), and the special figure 1 variation start process is ended.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A304) in the special figure normal process described above will be described. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the process similar to the process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. It is intended for memory.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (b), first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, the special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A341). A big hit flag 2 setting process (step A 342) is performed to set deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) according to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (pattern information), the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. An information setting process (step A344) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special drawing fluctuation display game is set. (Step A345). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation aspect in the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting process for setting information on fluctuation start of the second special figure fluctuation display game (Step A347) is performed.

Next, "1" associated with the special figure variation process is set as the process number (step A348), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A349).
Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A350), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 fluctuating signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, save the in-fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A 352), the initial value of the blinking control timer (special figure 2 indicator 52 blink timer) in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area Here, 100 ms is set (step A353). Then, an initial value (here, "0") is saved in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 variation start process is ended.

  When selecting a variation pattern of the special view variation display game in the special view 1 variation start process or the special view 2 variation start process described above, information of the set probability setting value may be referred to. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of suggesting or notifying a probability setting value, such as selecting a fluctuation pattern according to the probability setting value, or changing the selection probability of the fluctuation pattern according to the probability setting value.

[Big hit judgment processing]
Next, details of the jackpot determination process performed in the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 20, in the big hit determination process, first, an upper limit determination value table corresponding to the probability setting value is set (step A381). The upper limit determination value table is provided for each probability setting value, and the upper limit determination value in the high probability state and the upper limit determination value in the low probability state (normal probability state) are respectively defined. Here, the corresponding table is set in accordance with the currently set probability setting value. Note that being a big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit judgment value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is not less than the lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and not more than the upper judgment value which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit. By setting the upper limit determination value table corresponding to the probability setting value, the jackpot determination can be performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability setting value.

  Next, the lower limit judgment value of the jackpot judgment value is set (step A382), and it is judged whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower judgment value (step A383). Here, the value of the lower limit judgment value is the same value regardless of the probability setting value or the probability state (high probability state or normal probability state), but the lower limit judgment value is made different according to the probability setting value or probability state. Also good. In this case, similarly to the upper limit judgment value, the lower limit judgment value table in which the lower limit judgment value is specified for each probability setting value is selected according to the probability setting value, and the lower limit judgment value to be used is selected according to the probability state. To set it. Of course, the upper limit judgment value table and the lower limit judgment value table may be put together to form a judgment value table.

  If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A383; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A389), and the big hit judgment processing is ended. Note that the disconnection in step A 389 means that it is not a big hit, and there is a possibility that it will be determined as a small hit in the small hit determination processing later. If the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step A383; N), it is determined whether the state is a high probability state (step A384). Then, if it is in the high probability state (step A384; Y), the upper limit judgment value in the high probability is acquired (step A385), and it is judged whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper judgment value (step A387) ). If the state is not the high probability state (step A384; N), the upper limit judgment value in the low probability is set (step A386), and it is judged whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper judgment value (step A387) . The upper limit judgment value acquired here is acquired with reference to the upper limit judgment value table set in step A 381 described above.

  If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A387; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A358), and the big hit judgment processing is ended. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A387; N), that is, if it is a big hit, a big hit is set as the judgment result (step A389), and the big hit judgment processing is ended.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the small hit determination process performed in the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A 322) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above and the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A 342) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process .

  As shown in FIG. 21, in the small hitting determination process, first, a small hitting upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value is set (step A401). The small hitting upper limit judgment value is provided for each probability setting value. Also, the small hit probability is constant regardless of whether it is a high probability state. Further, the range of the big hit judgment value and the range of the small hit judgment value at the same probability setting value do not overlap. The range of the big hit determination value and the range of the small hit determination value of different probability setting values may overlap, but may not overlap.

  Note that being a small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit judgment value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the small hit lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is less than the determination value, it is determined that the small hit. By setting the small hit upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value, the small hit judgment can be performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability setting value.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the small hitting lower limit judgment value (step A402). Here, the value of the small hitting lower limit judgment value is the same even if the probability setting value is different. If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A402; Y), the judgment result is set as a deviation (step A404), and the big hit judgment processing is ended. If the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the small hitting lower limit judgment value (step A402; N), it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hitting upper limit judgment value (step A403).

  When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A403; Y), a gap is set as the judgment result (step A404), and the small hit judgment processing is ended. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A403; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the judgment result (step A405), and the small hit judgment processing is ended. Do.

  As in the case of the big hit determination, the small hit upper limit judgment value table corresponding to the probability setting value may be set first, and the small hit upper limit judgment value may be acquired from the set upper limit judgment value table. The upper limit determination value in the big hit determination and the small hit upper limit determination value in the small hit determination may be collectively defined in a determination value table provided for each probability setting value. Furthermore, although the value of the small hitting lower limit judgment value is the same even if the probability setting value is different, the small hitting lower limit judgment value may be made different depending on the probability setting value, and in this case, according to the probability setting value The small hit lower limit judgment value is selected.

  In addition, in the process of setting the upper limit setting table corresponding to the probability setting value (step A381) and the process of setting the small hitting upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value (step A401), the probability setting value referred to is indicated. If the value is an abnormal value such as not corresponding to any probability setting value, the setting may be performed as a predetermined probability setting value (for example, setting 1), or an abnormality occurs. The game may be stopped and an error may be notified. Also, although the probability setting value is referred to for each determination of the big hit and each determination of the small hit, when setting the probability setting value in the probability setting value change state, the upper limit setting table corresponding to the set probability setting value Alternatively, processing for setting the small hitting upper limit judgment value may be performed, and this may only be referred to when judging the big hit or judging the small hit.

[Process during special figure change]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 22, in the special figure variation processing, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag (special figure 1 variation flag or special figure 2 variation flag) is prepared (step A601), and rendering command setting A process is performed (step A602). That is, a symbol stop command forming stop information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game being executed ends and the result is derived and displayed. In response to the reception of the symbol stop command, the effect control device 300 stops the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game, and displays the result as a stop.

  Thereafter, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special-purpose game processing timer area (step A604). In the case of the present embodiment, the display time is set to 600 ms as the display time regardless of whether the stop design pattern is a removal design pattern, a big hit design pattern or a small hit design pattern, but the display time may be different depending on the stop design pattern. . That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes stop time setting means for setting the stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

  Subsequently, the processing number "2" according to the processing during the special figure display is set as the processing number (step A605), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A606).

  Next, save the signal related to the end of fluctuation of Special Figure 1 (for example, the signal during special symbol 1 fluctuation is OFF) in the test signal output data area (Step A 607), and the signal related to the end of fluctuation of Special Figure 2 (for example, special symbol 2) Save the fluctuation signal in the test signal output data area (Step A608) and set the number of times the symbol is determined to the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game for output to the external information terminal. A value (for example, 256 ms) is saved (step A 609). Thereafter, as information for controlling the special view 1 change display game in the special view 1 display 51, the stop flag relating to the change stop in the special view 1 display 51 is saved in the special view 1 change control flag area (step A610) Save the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 52 as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52 in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A611) The special figure changing process ends.

[Process while displaying special map]
Next, the details of the special view display process (step A10) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 23 and FIG. 24, in the special figure display process, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A 701). The small hit flag area is cleared (step A702).
Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process are loaded (Step A703) A process (Step A704) of clearing the big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM is performed. Then, it is judged whether the big hit flag 2 loaded is a big hit (step A 705) and when it is determined that it is a big hit (step A 705; Y), the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the second special view fluctuation display game Save the test signal for the test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the commodity continuous operation device operating signal is ON, the special symbol 2 signal is ON) in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A 708), A round number upper limit table is set (step A709).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A705 that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit as a result of checking the big hit flag 2 (step A 705; N), it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A706) and a big hit (step A706; Y), the test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal ON, the feature continuous operation device operating signal ON) regarding the start of the big hit (special feature 1 big hit) of the first special figure fluctuation display game, The special symbol 1 signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area of RWM (step A 707), and the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A 709) is performed.

  After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A 709), the round number upper limit ("16" or "4" in this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired, and the RWM is acquired. The number of rounds is saved in the upper limit value area of (step A710). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

  Next, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decoration special drawing command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and effect command setting processing (step A713) is performed. After that, a probability information command is prepared according to the information that makes the probability of becoming a hit result in the common drawing fluctuation display game and the special drawing fluctuation display game a normal probability state (low probability state) (step A714). (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special view 1 or special view 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A716), and the effect command setting process (step A716) Do A717). The fanfare command forms special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

  Next, the information corresponding to the special winning opening open information and the probability of being hit in the common view variation display game and the special view variation display game is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the present embodiment, in step A 718, two jackpots and three jacks are saved as signals corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is decided by the state of the special winning opening opening information and the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is ON if the big hit with popped out (big prize opening opening information is other than the big winning opening opened information 1), the big hit without popping out (so-called, 確 certain big hit etc. Large winning opening open If the information is a large winning opening opening information 1), it will be ON if it is a big hit in the time saving state, and it will be OFF otherwise. In addition, the jackpot 3 signal is ON when the jackpot is a jackpot with some balls, and is OFF when the jackpot is a jackpot without balls.

  After that, the big hit opening information and the big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 4700 ms, 7700 ms or 300 ms) corresponding to the probability of being hit in the common view change display game and the special view change display game The setting is made (step A719), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A720). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and time saving state of the special view when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

  Then, the large winning a prize opening fraud winning number area of the special winning a prize opening (the special fluctuation winning a prize device 38) which corresponds to the special winning a prize opening opening information is cleared (step A722), the special winning a prize winning opening which corresponds to the special winning opening information The fraud monitoring out-of-period flag is saved in the mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step A723). Thereafter, the fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing 1 (step A 724) is performed to shift to the fanfare / interval processing, and the special view display processing is terminated. That is, the special game in which the game control device 100 converts the special fluctuation winning device 38 into the open state based on the result being a special result in any of the first special view fluctuation display game and the second special view fluctuation display game. It is a special game state generating means that generates a state.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit in step A706 (step A706; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).
If it is determined in step A 725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A 725; Y), a high probability fluctuation number area for managing the number of special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in the high probability state The probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is high by performing high probability fluctuation number update processing (step A 726) for updating the value of (the high probability fluctuation number) and presentation mode information check processing (step A 727) related to setting of presentation mode It is determined whether it is a probability state (step A728).

  If it is determined in step A728 that the special drawing high probability is not found (step A728; N), the decoration special drawing command is loaded from the decoration special drawing command area and prepared (step A729), and the effect command setting The process (step A730) is performed. Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step A731), an effect command setting process (step A732) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A733. This small hit fanfare command also forms special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

If it is determined in step A728 that the high probability of the special view is being reached (step A728; Y), the process proceeds to step A733. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is the high probability state, the big winning opening is opened by the occurrence of the small hit, but the occurrence of the small hit is played In order not to make the person conscious, the screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A733). Next, “7” for the small hit fanfare medium processing is set as the processing number (step A734), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A735).

  Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A 736), and a signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, one signal for big hit is ON (big hit + small hit output) ) Is saved in the external information output data area (step A737), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit game (for example, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A738).

Next, the special winning opening illegal prize number area is cleared (step A739), and the fraud monitoring out-of-time flag is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A740).
Next, a signal relating to a right-handed command (fire position designation signal 1 is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A741), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first gaming state display unit 57) is lit. Therefore, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A742), and the special figure display process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A 725 that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A 725; N), the high probability fluctuation number for managing the number of special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in high probability state. High probability change count update processing (step A 743) for updating the value of the area (high probability change count), presentation mode information check processing regarding setting of presentation mode (step A 744), switching preparation remaining rotation corresponding to presentation mode number A number is set (step A745), and it is determined whether the effect remaining rotation number and the switching preparation remaining rotation number match (step A746). Note that the switching preparation remaining rotational speed may be a different value (rotational speed) in all the rendering modes of the plurality of rendering modes, or the same value in any of the rendering modes of the plurality of rendering modes (Number of rotations) may be used, or the same value (number of rotations) may be used in all of the effect modes among the plurality of effect modes.
If it is determined in step A746 that the effect remaining rotation speed does not match the switching preparation remaining rotation speed (step A746; N), "0" relating to the special processing routine processing is set as the processing number (step A749) The special figure game process number area saves the process number (step A750) and clears the variation symbol determination flag area (step A751). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A 752), and the special view display processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step A746 that the effect remaining rotation speed and the switch preparation remaining rotation speed match (step A746; Y), the effect mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A747), and the effect command setting is made. After performing the process (step A 748), the process proceeds to step A 749. The effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the pre-reading effect from being performed several revolutions before the effect mode is switched, and the effect mode switching preparation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 to cross the mode. So that there is no contradiction.

[Puppet game processing]
Next, details of the common-play game process (step S113) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the common drawing game processing, monitoring of the input of the gate switch 34a, control of the entire processing concerning the common drawing variation display game, setting of display of common drawing, and the like are performed.

  As shown in FIG. 25, in the common-play game processing, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and a general prize winning switch for monitoring an input from the starting opening 2 switch 37a. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the common-play game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). In addition, the minimum value of the common drawing game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the common drawing game processing timer has become "0" (step B4).

  If it is determined that the value of the common-play game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, it is determined that the time-up or time-up has already occurred, reference is made to branch to the processing corresponding to the common-play game processing number The routine drawing game sequence branch table is set in the register (step B5), and the table is used to obtain the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the regular drawing game process number (step B6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the common drawing game process number (step B7).

In step B7, when the popular drawing game processing number is "0", the start of fluctuation of the common drawing fluctuation display game is monitored, and the setting of fluctuation start of the common drawing fluctuation display game, the setting of the effect, the common drawing fluctuation The ordinary drawing process (step B8) is performed to set information necessary for performing the process.
If the drawing game processing number is “1” in step B7, a drawing change processing (step B9) is performed to set information necessary for performing the drawing display processing.

In addition, if the result of the common drawing variation display game is a hit when the common drawing game processing number is "2" in step B7, the setting of the common charge open time according to whether or not the time saving state is being performed. In addition, the general drawing display processing (step B10) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the common processing per processing.
In addition, if the regular drawing game processing number is "3" in step B7, the regular drawing is performed during the general drawing, or the setting of information necessary for performing the general charge residual ball processing is performed, etc. A process (step B11) is performed.

In step B7, if the common drawing game process number is "4", general electric remaining ball processing (step B12) is performed to set information required for performing the common drawing end processing.
If the drawing game processing number is "5" in step B7, the drawing drawing end processing (step B13) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the drawing common processing.

Then, after preparing the common drawing fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the ordinary design by the common drawing display (step B14), the symbol fluctuation control processing related to the control of the fluctuation of the ordinary design by the common drawing display 53 (step B15) is performed, and the common drawing game processing is finished.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step B4 that the value of the common-play game processing timer is not "0" (step B4; N), that is, it is determined that the time is not up, the process proceeds to step B14 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

[Normal figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the common drawing routine processing (step B8) in the common drawing game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 26, in the ordinary drawing routine, it is first determined whether the ordinary drawing reservation number is “0” (step B301), and the ordinary drawing reservation number is “0” (step B301; Y ) Sets "0" relating to the ordinary drawing routine processing as the processing number (step B322), and saves the processing number in the ordinary drawing game processing number area (step B323). Thereafter, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the routine power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B324), and the routine drawing routine processing is ended.

  In addition, when the common drawing reservation number is not "0" (step B301; N), the random number is loaded from the RWM hit random number storage area (for the hold number 1) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for the hold number 1) Clear the loaded area, that is, the per random number storage area (for holding number 1) and the per symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) to 0 (step B302), and there is a probability that it will be a hit result in the common drawing variation display game It is determined whether it is in the common map high probability raised higher than the normal probability (that is, the common map low probability), that is, in the short time state (step B303).

If the common drawing high probability is not (step B303; N), the lower limit judgment value (low probability lower limit judgment value) at the common drawing low probability is set (step B304), and the common drawing high probability is in progress (step B303) ; Y) sets the lower limit judgment value (high probability lower limit judgment value) at the time of the drawing high probability (step B305).
Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit determination value (step B306). If the value of the random number is not greater than or equal to the upper limit determination value (step B306; N), the value of the random number is greater than or equal to step B304 or B305. It is determined whether it is less than the lower limit judgment value set in (step B307).

If the value of the per-random number is greater than or equal to the upper determination value (step B306; Y) or if the value of the per-random number is less than the lower determination value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307; Y), the per-flag In the area, save the misplacement information (step B308), set the disappointing stop symbol number (step B309), save the disappointing symbol information in the common drawing stop symbol information area (step B310), stop the common symbol number stop Save to the symbol area (step B314).
On the other hand, if the value of the random number per hit is not smaller than the lower limit judgment value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B311), and the load loaded in step B302 The hit stop symbol number corresponding to the symbol random number is set (step B312), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the common drawing stop symbol information area (step B313), and the stop symbol number is common drawing stop symbol Save to the area (step B314).

In the case of the present embodiment, the probability of hitting at low probability is 0/251, the probability of hitting at high probability is 250/251, the upper judgment value is “251”, and the low probability judgment value is “251”, the high probability lower limit judgment value is “1”. Therefore, at the time of the general drawing low probability, the value of the hit random number deviates in all cases of "0" to "250". Further, at the time of the drawing normal probability, the case where the value of the hit random number is any of “1” to “250” is present, and the case where the value of the hit random number is “0” is not.
Moreover, in the case of this embodiment, there are two types of hit symbols.

After the stop symbol number is saved in the common figure stop symbol area (step B314), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B315).
Thereafter, the hit random number storage area is shifted (step B316), the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B317), and the common drawing reserve number is updated by -1 (step B318). That is, with the common drawing variation display game regarding the oldest common drawing reservation number 1 being executed, the processing of raising the positions of the common drawing reservation numbers 2 to 4 held by the common drawing reservation number 1 or later one by one I do. As a result of this processing, the values for the number of general drawing reservations 2 to from the number of general drawing reservations 4 for the random number storage area per common drawing move from the number 1 for general drawing reservations for the random number storage area to the number 3 for general drawing reservation It will be done. Then, the value for the common drawing reservation number 4 of the random number storage area per common drawing is cleared, and the common drawing reservation number is decremented by one.

Next, the variation pattern random number 3 is extracted (step B319), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3 is set, and the variation pattern random number 3 is saved in the popular game processing timer area (step B320). Then, the general drawing variation processing transition setting process (step B 321) is performed to shift to the common drawing variation processing, and the common drawing routine processing is ended. That is, the game execution means for the game control device 100 to execute the common view change display game as the variable display game (based on the common view start storage) based on the detection of the gaming ball in the common view start gate 34 (inflow area). I
In the case of this embodiment, in step B320, 500 ms is set with a probability of 200/256, 1500 ms is set with a probability of 40/256, and 3000 ms is set with a probability of 16/256. .

[During processing of common map fluctuation]
Next, the details of the general drawing fluctuation processing (step B9) in the above-described common drawing game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 27, in the general drawing variation processing, first, the processing number is set to "2" for the general drawing display processing (step B401), and the processing number is saved in the general drawing game processing number area. (Step B402). Thereafter, the common drawing display time (for example, 600 ms) which is the display time of the common drawing fluctuation display game result in the common drawing display 53 is saved in the common drawing game processing timer area (step B403). Save the signal (for example, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation in progress signal OFF) in the test signal output data area (step B404) and set the stop flag indicating that the common drawing fluctuation display game is stopped to the common drawing fluctuation control flag area After saving (step B405), the general drawing variation processing is ended.

[Process while displaying a common map]
Next, details of the common drawing display processing (step B10) in the common drawing game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 28, in the processing for displaying the generic drawing, first, the hit flag (hit information or out information) set in the normal processing is loaded (step B501), and the hit flag area of the RWM is cleared. Then (step B502), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B503).

  If the hit flag is not hit information (step B 503; N), “0” is set as the processing number for the ordinary processing of the drawing (step B 515), and the processing number is saved in the common drawing game processing number area (step B516). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the routine power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B517), and the processing during the routine drawing display is ended.

  On the other hand, if the hit flag is hit information (step B 503; Y), the hit processing setting table is set (step B 504), and the hit start pointer value (eg, “0 Or “5”) and save it in the control pointer area during the drawing (step B505). Next, the value of the hit end pointer (for example, "4" or "7") corresponding to the common drawing stop symbol information is obtained and saved in the common drawing hit end pointer area (step B506). Next, a general power release time (for example, 1700 ms or 2600 ms) corresponding to the common drawing stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the common drawing game processing timer area (step B507).

  Next, "3" is set as the processing number for shifting to the processing during the common drawing per process (step B508), and the processing number is saved in the common drawing game processing number area (step B509). After that, the test signal is a signal relating to the start of hitting the common drawing variation display game (for example, the signal during medium symbol 1 is normally ON) and a signal regarding the start of power operation (for example, the signal during normal motor vehicle 1 operation is ON) In order to save in the output data area (step B510) and output a signal for driving (turning on) the common power solenoid, the on data is saved in the general power solenoid output data area (step B511).

  Furthermore, the information of the common charge count number area which stores the winning number to the normal fluctuation winning a prize device 37 is cleared (step B 512), the common power which memorizes the winning number to the normal fluctuation winning a prize device 37 in the common electric power fraud monitoring period The information on the incorrect winning number area is cleared (step B513). Then, a flag for defining the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal change winning a prize apparatus 37 (flag outside the fraud monitoring period flag) is saved in the general electric power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B514), and the processing of the common map display is ended.

[Every time per popular map]
Next, the details of the common drawing in the common drawing game process (step B11) will be described. As shown in FIG. 29, in the middle processing per normal drawing, first, the middle control pointer is loaded and prepared (step B601), and the value of the control pointer per common drawing loaded is equal to or more than the upper limit It is determined (step B602).

If the value of the control pointer in the common drawing is not greater than or equal to the upper limit (step B602; N), the control pointer in the common drawing is updated by +1 (step B603), and the value of the control pointer in the common drawing (step B603) A branch process is performed according to the value before +1 updating in B603 (step B604).
If the value of the control pointer in the common drawing is greater than or equal to the upper limit (step B602; Y), the processing in the common drawing in the step B603 is not updated by +1, and the processing in the common drawing is not performed. Branch processing is performed according to the value of the control pointer (step B604).

  If the value of the control pointer is “0”, “2” or “5”, the process proceeds to step B 605 and the normal fluctuation winning apparatus corresponding to the control pointer is operated to control the closing of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 The wait time after blocking 37 is saved in the common drawing game processing timer area (step B605), and the off data is saved in the common electric solenoid output data area to turn off the common electric solenoid 37c (step B606). Ends processing during each drawing.

  When the value of the control pointer is “1” or “3”, the process proceeds to step B 607 to control the opening of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, so that the normal fluctuation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer In order to save the general power release time, which is the open time, in the general drawing game processing timer area (step B607), and to turn on the general power solenoid 37c, save ON data in the general power solenoid output data area (step B608) End the process during the popular map.

  If the value of the control pointer is "6", the process proceeds to step B609, where it is the opening time of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer in order to control the opening of the normal fluctuation winning device 37. The general power release time is saved in the general drawing game processing timer area (step B609), and the ON data is saved in the general power solenoid output data area to turn on the general power solenoid 37c (step B610). End the process.

  If the value of the control pointer is "4" or "7", the process proceeds to step B611 to end the release control of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 and perform generalization residual ball processing, so the processing number Is set as "4" (step B611). Then, the processing number is saved in the general drawing game processing number area (step B612), and the general electric power remaining ball processing time is saved in the general drawing game processing timer area (step B613). Thereafter, in order to turn off the common solenoid 37 c, the off data is saved in the common solenoid output data area (step B 614), and the processing of the common drawing ends.

Here, in the present embodiment, for example, in step B605, 300 ms is used as a wait time, in step B607, 1700 ms as a power open time, in step B609 as 2600 ms as power open time, in step B613. Save 600 ms as the normal charge residual ball processing time.
Furthermore, when the stop figure symbol is “per hit symbol 1”, “0” is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the processing during the stop symbol display shown in FIG. In step B506, "4" is acquired as the value of the hit end pointer, and in step B507 of the general drawing display processing, "1700 milliseconds" is acquired as the general power release time. Therefore, after the lapse of the display time of 600 ms, since the PV release time is "1700 ms", the PV is released for 1700 ms, and then the weight of 300 ms is waited because the control pointer is "0" per blow. Since the time is set and then the control pointer is updated to "1" during the normal drawing, the power is released for 1700 ms, and then 300 ms since the control pointer during the expansion is updated to "2". The wait time is set, and then the control pointer is updated to "3" during the general drawing, and the general power is released for 1700 ms, and then the control pointer is updated to "4" during the general drawing, 600 ms. The normal charge residual ball processing time is set.

  Further, if the stop figure symbol is “per hit symbol 2”, “5” is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the during stop processing shown in FIG. In step B506, "7" is acquired as the value of the hit end pointer, and in step B507 of the general drawing display processing, "2600 milliseconds" is acquired as the general power release time. Therefore, after the lapse of the display time of 600 ms, the normal charge release time is "2600 ms", and the normal charge is released for 2600 ms, and then the weight of 300 ms is waited because the control pointer is "5". Since the time is set and then the control pointer is updated to "6" during the normal drawing, the power is released for 2600msec, and then the control pointer is updated to "7" during the normal drawing, and then 600msec. The normal charge residual ball processing time is set. That is, when the game control means 100 executes the common-play game (common-play variation display game) based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the result of the common-play game becomes a specific result, the normal change winning device 37 is opened. It constitutes a normal fluctuation winning device control means capable of generating a hit state (normal state hit state) to be converted.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S117) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the external information editing process, the payout command transmission process (step S111), winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S107), magnet fraud monitoring process (step S115), and board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S116) Based on the information collecting terminal, external equipment such as the game arcade internal management device, and information to be output to the test shot testing device, processing is performed to set in the output buffer.

As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, in the external information editing process, first, no glass frame opening error occurs (step S801; N), and no main body frame opening error occurs (step S802; N) The off data of the door / frame open signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S803), the off data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S804), and the process proceeds to step S807. .
On the other hand, when the glass frame opening error is occurring (step S801; Y) or when the main body frame opening error is occurring (step S802; Y), the on data of the door / frame opening signal is externally output. The data is saved in the information output data area (step S805), the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S806), and the process proceeds to step S807.

Then, if the security signal control timer, which measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by the operation of the initialization switch or the like, is updated by -1 unless it is "0". Step S807). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set at the time of setting the initial value of the RAM when activated by clearing the RAM in the main processing, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S808).
If the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step S808; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S809). Transfer to processing of If the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (step S 808; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, the process of step S 810 is not performed and the process of step S 810 is performed. Transition.

  Then, if the magnet fraud is occurring (step S810; Y), if the board radio wave fraud is occurring (step S811; Y), if the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step S812; Y), If the fraud is occurring (step S813; Y), or if the big winning opening fraud is occurring (step S814; Y), the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area ( Step S817), save the on data of the gaming machine error state signal in the test signal output data area (step S818), and shift to the process of step S819. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information.

On the other hand, there is no magnet fraud (step S 810; N), no board radio fraud (step S 811; N), no frame radio fraud (step S 812; N), no common electricity fraud and no. (Step S813; N) If it is not even the occurrence of the special winning opening fraud (Step S814; N), it is determined whether the switch abnormality is occurring (Step S815).
If the switch abnormality is occurring (step S815; Y), the on data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S818), and the process proceeds to step S819. If the switch abnormality is not occurring (step S815; N), the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S816), and the process proceeds to step S819.

Then, main prize ball signal editing processing (step S 819) is performed to set information on the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out, and starting opening signal editing processing (step S 820) is performed to edit the winning opening signal of the starting opening.
Next, if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game is not "0", -1 is updated (step S821). The minimum value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is "0" (step S822).

If the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is "0" (step S822; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area Then, the external information editing process is ended (step S823).
Also, if the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is not "0" (step S822; N), that is, if the time is not up, save the on data of the symbol determination frequency signal in the external information output data area (step In step S824, the external information editing process ends.

  Next, control in the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs main processing shown in FIG. 32 and timer interrupt processing (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 32, in the main processing, processing at the start of the program is performed first. In the process at the start of the program, first, the interrupt is inhibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and the interrupt is permitted (step C4). Next, generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and an initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, a power failure occurrence detected flag or the like is cleared.

  After the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7 is performed, loop processing is performed as main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, effect button input processing (step C9) is performed to create input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29. Reading of the input from the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 is performed in the timer interrupt process, and in the effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29, a process of changing the contents of the effect is performed.

  Then, a hall / player setting mode process is performed to receive operations such as setting of changeable ranges such as brightness of LED and liquid crystal and volume, and change of brightness and volume of LED and liquid crystal by the player (step C10). Next, a random number updating process (step C11) is performed to update the random number for determining the details of the variation mode of the decorative special view variation display game.

  Then, the command from the game control apparatus 100 is analyzed and a reception command check process (step C12) for handling is performed, and effect display editing process (step C13) for editing the setting for controlling the progression of the effect and the drawing command ) To set the end of preparation of the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

  Then, it is determined whether it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (one frame 1/30 seconds), it is determined that it is the frame switching timing when the V blank interrupt (1/60 seconds) is entered twice. Note that the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated in a timing later than 1/60 seconds (frame Switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that the frame switching timing is not reached (step C15; N), the processing in step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

  Thereafter, sound control processing (step C17) for controlling the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b), and control of LEDs such as the panel decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, and the sub information display device 90 The decoration control process to be performed (step C18) and the movable body control process (step C19) for controlling the motor and the solenoid of the panel effect device 44 are performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing WDT (step C8).

[Receive command check process]
FIG. 33 shows the received command check process in the main process described above. In this reception command check process, first, the value of the command reception counter which counts how many commands are received during one frame (1/30 seconds) is loaded as the number of command reception (step C201), and the command reception is performed. It is determined whether the number is not 0 (step C202). When it is determined that the command reception number is 0 (step C202; N), the reception command check process is ended. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

  Next, the contents of the reception command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), and the command reading index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205). It is determined (step C206). As described above, in this embodiment, without analyzing the command directly in the reception command buffer, the content of the reception command buffer is copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command analysis work is performed in the command area. It is configured as follows. In this way, it is possible to move a command (data) to make a vacancy in preparation for a case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during analysis of the command. In addition, analysis of commands can be performed collectively in one round of main processing.

  If it is determined in step C206 that copying of the commands for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the processing returns to step C204. If it is determined that copying of the command for the number of received commands has been completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and a received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

  Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is completed (step C210). When it is determined that the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is not completed (step C210; N), the process returns to the process of step C207. If it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is ended. As described above, in the reception command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 seconds) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Receive command analysis process]
FIG. 34 shows reception command analysis processing in the above-mentioned reception command check processing. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte is separated as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). If it is determined that MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234).

  If it is determined in step C232 or C233 that MODE or ACT is not within the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or if it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step In C234; N), the reception command analysis process is ended.

  If ACT is determined to be the correct combination in step C234 in step C234 (step C234; Y), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the variation system command (step C235). The variation system command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of the special figure. Then, if it is determined that MODE is in the range of the variation system command (step C235; Y), variation system command processing (step C236) is performed, and the reception command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not within the range of the variation system command (step C235; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the big hit system command (step C237). The big hit system command is a command for instructing an operation (such as displaying a fanfare screen or a round screen) relating to a big hit medium effect, or a command instructing an operation (such as displaying a fanfare screen or an end screen) related to small hit medium effects. Then, if it is determined that MODE is in the range of the big hit system command (step C237; Y), the big hit system command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not within the range of the big hit system command (step C237; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the symbol system command (step C239). The symbol system command is a command for instructing information on the symbol of the special drawing (for example, what to make the stop symbol of the special drawing, etc.). When it is determined that MODE is in the range of the symbol system command (step C239; Y), symbol system command processing (step C240) is performed, and the reception command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not within the range of symbol system commands (step C239; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of one-shot commands such as pending number command or error command. (Step C241). A single-shot command is a command that is established independently, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. The one-shot commands include a wait for customer demonstration command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model specification command, and the like. Then, if it is determined that MODE is within the range of single-shot commands (step C241; Y), single-shot command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of single-shot commands (step C241; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of prefetch symbol system commands (step C243). Then, if it is determined that MODE is the range of the pre-reading symbol system command (step C243; Y), the pre-reading symbol system command process (step C244) is performed, and the reception command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the prefetch variation system command (step C245). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the prefetch change command (step C245; Y), the read change command process (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended. If it is determined in step C245 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch change command (step C245; N), the received command analysis process is ended.

  The preread variation system command and the preread symbol system command are commands including information necessary to execute the preread effect. The pre-reading effect (also referred to as pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect) is whether or not the special figure variation display game corresponding to the start memory (pending) that has not been executed becomes a big hit when it is subsequently executed In order to notify the player in advance (with what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) to a predetermined degree of reliability, to perform the decoration special view start memory display etc. displayed on the display device 41 in a mode different from normal Effects such as effect display. And the pre-reading system command (pre-reading fluctuation system command and pre-reading symbol system command) is the command which notifies beforehand the fluctuation pattern and the stop design which corresponds to the starting memory which becomes the object of pre-reading effect, from starting game winning a prize 100 It is transmitted to the effect control device 300. In addition, the normal variation system command and symbol system command which are not pre-read are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the time of the variation display start.

  Further, with regard to commands relating to power on and commands relating to probability setting values, corresponding processing is performed in single-shot system command processing. The commands related to power on include a command upon power failure recovery and a command upon RAM initialization. The commands relating to the probability setting value include the commands of probability setting change, probability setting change end, probability setting change end, probability setting value confirmation, and probability setting value confirmation end during the probability setting change.

  In the first embodiment described above, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on after the power is turned on, transition to the probability setting value confirmation mode is made, but the setting key switch 152 is turned on after the power is turned on. Even in the case of the above, the state may be shifted to the probability setting value change state. However, since the RAM is initialized along with the end of the probability setting value change state, any of the special figure variation display game is being executed, the special game variation display game is being executed, the special game condition is in progress, or the common figure is hit. It may be a condition that it does not fall under either. In addition, it may be a condition that it is in a customer waiting state. Further, when the operation handle 24 is operated and there is an input from the touch switch, the state may not be shifted to the probability setting value change state.

  Although the RAM 111C is initialized upon termination of the probability setting value change state, the RAM 111C may not be initialized except when it is determined that the data of the RAM 111C is abnormal.

  In addition, although probability values corresponding to the respective probability setting values are different from each other, the same probability value may be allocated to different probability setting values. FIG. 35 (a) shows the probability setting value in the present embodiment. The value of the probability setting value area of the RAM 111C is designed to take a value of 0-5. The same is true for the probability setting value area for work. Settings 1 to 6 are assigned as probability setting values corresponding to the values of the probability setting value area. In the display of the probability setting value display device 153, 1 to 6 are displayed corresponding to the value of the probability setting value. As the probability values, different probability values are assigned to settings 1 to 6, respectively.

  FIG. 35 (b) shows an example in which assignment of probability values is different. In this example, probability values of setting 1 to setting 3 are assigned as setting 4 to setting 6, respectively. Therefore, it is possible to switch the probability value of three levels substantially. Other than this is the same as FIG. In this way, when the six-step probability values are unnecessary, only the probability values may be made different, and design changes can be easily made.

  Note that which probability value is assigned to which probability setting value is free, and, for example, setting 1 and setting 6, setting 2 and setting 5, setting 3 and setting 4 may be the same probability value. Since the value of the probability setting value area (work probability setting value area) is updated by +1 by the operation of the setting value change button, the order of probability values changing when the setting value change button is operated is different by changing the assignment. It becomes order. Also, for example, if the same probability value as the other probability setting values is assigned to two probability setting values, the number of stages of change can be made into four stages, and it can be any stage of 1 to 6 stages.

  FIG. 35 (c) also shows an example in which the assignment of probability values is different. In this example, those which are setting 4 to setting 6 in FIG. 35B are setting 1 to setting 3, and the display on the probability setting value display device 153 is also setting 1 to 3 correspondingly. As a result, the display of the probability setting value display device 153 and the probability value correspond to each other, and it is possible to make it easy for the clerk performing the operation to grasp the probability value.

  FIG. 35 (d) also shows an example in which assignment of probability values is different. In this example, all the settings are 1, the display of the probability setting value display unit 153 is all 1, and the probability values are all the same. That is, only one probability value can be substantially set, and even when the function of changing the probability value is unnecessary, it is possible to cope with the setting of the value without changing the configuration of the game control apparatus 100. In this case, even if the set value change button is operated, the same display is made on the probability set value display device 153, but as described above, the specific display (for example, blank display) is performed, whereby the operation is performed. Workers can easily understand that they have been accepted.

  Although the number of values in the probability setting value area is six, the number may be other than this. For example, in the case of FIG. 35 (b) or (c), the number of values of the probability setting value area may be three. Further, in the case of FIG. 35D, the number of values in the probability setting value area may be one. Further, the number of values in the probability setting value area may be seven or more in order to enable setting of more stages. Although the probability setting value to which the probability value is assigned is selected, the probability value may be selected. In this case, the probability setting value display device 153 displays the selected probability value.

  Also, although the big hit probability value is assigned according to the probability setting value, the small hit probability value is also assigned, and the small hit probability value is also changed according to the change of the probability setting value. ing. The big hit probability value and the small hit probability value corresponding to each probability setting value can be determined independently. However, when only a big hit and a small hit are made as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game, it is necessary to set a small hit probability value according to the big hit probability value. Further, the probability setting value for setting the jackpot probability value and the probability setting value for setting the small hitting probability value may be set separately. Also, the probability value of the small hit may be a constant value regardless of the probability setting value. Furthermore, the probability of the hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game may also be set according to the probability setting value that defines the probability value of the big hit, or may be set independently.

  When the setting value change button, the setting key operation unit, the probability setting value display device 153, and the like are provided on the setting sub-board and connected to the game control device 100, the function of changing the probability value is unnecessary. Alternatively, the setting sub-substrate may be removed, and the sub-substrate subjected to termination processing such as GND connection may be connected to the connection portion of the game control apparatus 100 with the setting sub-substrate. By doing this, it is possible to eliminate only the function of changing the probability value without changing the configuration of the game control device 100, and to reduce the cost. Further, in the gaming machine having no probability fluctuation function, the operation probability M may be provided for each probability setting value.

First Modification
Next, a first modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly the different part. explain. In the gaming machine of the present modification, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 transmits a command instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out.

  The payout control device 200 in the present modification includes storage means capable of retaining stored contents even in the power-off state. The storage means is adapted to store information of the payout command received from the game control device 100, and payout is performed based on the information stored therein. As described above, since the storage means of the payout control device 200 can hold the stored contents in the power-off state, the game control device 100 sequentially transmits the payout command regardless of the status of the payout busy signal. . Therefore, the information on the unpaid payout command is stored in the storage unit of the payout control device 200.

[Main processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the main processing shown in FIG. 36 is performed instead of the main processing shown in FIG. In this process, when the command (specific information) of the setting change instruction is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S28), the command (specific information) of the payout instruction is transmitted to the payout control device 200. (Step S81). The payout control device 200 starts the payout based on the information backed up in its own storage means based on receiving the command of the payout instruction. By doing this, even when the backup data of the game control device 100 is damaged, the payout can be made based on the information stored in the payout control device 200, and it is possible to prevent the player's profit from being damaged. it can.

  In addition to the notification of prompting the change of the probability setting value, the effect control device 300 also notifies that there is a possibility that the payout will be performed based on the reception of the setting change instruction command. It is good. Moreover, transmitting the command (specific information) of the payout instruction to the payout control device 200 is not limited to the above case. For example, in the case of transmitting the command in the probability setting change in FIG. Even when a command at the time of S40) and RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (step S44), a command (specific information) of the payout instruction may be transmitted to the payout control device 200.

  From the above, it is possible to execute the game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, in the gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state for giving the player a gaming value Based on information from the game control means (game control device 100) for controlling and the game control means, effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effects of the game, and probability values used for lottery of the game are assigned Setting means (selectable probability setting value) can be selected from a plurality of probability setting values by operating the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) Game control means 100), and payout control means (payout control device 200) for controlling the payout of game media based on the payout information from the game control means; Memory means (RAM 111C) capable of holding stored contents even in the power-off state, and validity determination means (game control apparatus 100) for judging whether the information stored in the memory means at power-on is valid And initialization means (game control apparatus 100) capable of initializing the storage means based on the operation of the operation unit for selecting the probability setting value, and stored in the storage means by the validity determination means When it is determined that the information is not valid, the specific information is transmitted to the effect control means and the payout control means to stop the control of the game, and the effect control means sets the probability setting value based on the reception of the specific information. And the payout control means is provided with payout information storage means capable of storing the stored contents even in the power-off state, and capable of storing the payout information received from the game control means, and the specific information When signal, and it has to perform control to pay out game media based on the payout information stored in the payout information storage means. Therefore, it is possible to urge the return to the normal state, and to prevent the player from losing the profit obtained. In addition, by initializing the RAM 111C, the information on the probability setting value set in the game arcade is also lost and the initial value is set. However, the initialization prompting to select the probability setting value is performed. It is possible to prevent the probability setting value being unintended by the game arcade from being set.

Second Modified Example
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly the different part. explain. In the gaming machine of this modification, a plurality of determination conditions of the selected probability setting value are prepared.

Probability setting value change processing
In the gaming machine of this modification, probability setting value changing processing shown in FIG. 37 is performed instead of the probability setting value changing processing shown in FIG. In this probability setting value changing process, a definite condition monitoring process (step S450) is performed to monitor whether a condition for fixing the selected probability setting value is satisfied.

[Fixed condition monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 38, in the determination condition monitoring process, first, it is determined whether there is an input from the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 (step S411), and when there is an input from the touch switch (step S411; Y) ) Clears the termination waiting flag (step S457), performs the processing of steps S412 to S415, and terminates the definite condition monitoring processing.

  That is, by performing the first operation in which the operator touches the operation handle 24, a first determination condition which is a condition on the input from the touch switch is satisfied, and the selected probability setting value is set. The end standby flag is a flag used to monitor the establishment of the second determination condition as described later, and in this case, the second determination condition is satisfied because the first determination condition having the input from the touch switch as the condition is established. Since it is no longer necessary to monitor, the end waiting flag is cleared.

  On the other hand, if there is no input from the touch switch (step S411; N), that is, if the first determination condition is not satisfied, it is determined whether there is an end standby flag (step S451). If there is an end standby flag (step S451; Y), the process proceeds to step S455. In this case, monitoring of the second determined condition has already been started. If there is no end waiting flag (step S451; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the off state (step S452).

  If the setting key switch is not in the off state (step S452; N), the definite condition monitoring process is ended. In this case, the probability setting value change state continues. If the setting key switch is off (step S452; Y), an initial value (for example, 3 seconds) is saved in the change end timer area (step S453), and an end standby flag is set (step S454).

  Thereafter, if the change end timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S455), and it is determined whether the change end timer is 0 (step S456). If the change end timer is not 0 (step S456; N), the definite condition monitoring process is ended. If the change end timer is 0 (step S456; Y), the processing in step S457 and the subsequent steps is performed, and the fixed condition monitoring processing is ended. That is, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after an operation of turning off the setting key switch which makes the second operation is performed, the second determination condition is satisfied, and the selected probability setting value is set. It has become so.

  As described above, in the present modification, the probability setting value selected when either the first determination condition or the second determination condition is satisfied is set as the probability setting value to be used for the game. The selected probability setting value is stored in the working probability setting value area until these determination conditions are satisfied, and the information of the probability setting value area in which the probability setting value used in the game is stored is changed. Absent. Therefore, when the power is shut off before the determination condition is satisfied, the selected probability setting value is discarded, and the original probability setting value is set.

  In the probability setting value change state, it may be notified that the probability setting value selected by touching the operation handle 24 is set. This notification may be performed constantly in the probability setting value change state, or may be performed only in the state in which the end standby flag is set. Further, the first determination condition and the second determination condition are not limited to the above-described conditions and can be arbitrarily set. For example, the second determination condition may be only that the setting key switch is turned off. Further, three or more determination conditions may be prepared, and the probability setting value selected by any one of the determination conditions may be set.

  Also, although the original probability setting value is set when the power is shut off before the determination condition is satisfied, a predetermined probability setting value may be set. For example, the information in the probability setting value area is set to the initial value (for example, setting 1) based on the probability setting value change state being started, and the power is shut off before the determination condition is satisfied. May be set. The initial value in this case can be set to an arbitrary probability setting value in advance, for example, the same probability as the probability setting value set when the area for the probability setting value of the RAM 111C is initialized. It may be a set value.

  From the above, it is possible to execute the game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, in the gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state for giving the player a gaming value The control unit (game control apparatus 100) for performing control, the probability setting value to which the probability value used for drawing the game is assigned, the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value Setting means (the game control apparatus 100) capable of selecting from a plurality of probability setting values by operation of the change switch 151), and the setting means is that one of a plurality of determination conditions is satisfied The selected probability setting value is set based on this. Therefore, it is possible to reliably change the probability setting value. Further, by providing a plurality of finalization conditions, the degree of freedom of work is enhanced, and work efficiency in the game arcade can be enhanced.

  Further, the setting means is configured not to set the selected probability setting value when the power is shut off before any of the plurality of determination conditions are satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally changed.

  Further, the plurality of determination conditions include a first determination condition and a second determination condition, and the first determination condition is that a predetermined first operation is performed, and the second determination condition is the first operation and the second determination condition. Means that a predetermined time elapses after a different predetermined second operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to reliably change the probability setting value.

Third Modified Example
Next, a third modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly the different part. explain. In the gaming machine of this modification, the setting means does not include the setting key operation unit and the setting key switch 152 is not provided. Also, the transition conditions to the changeable state where the probability setting value can be changed are different.

[Main processing]
In the gaming machine of the present modification, the main processing shown in FIG. 39 is performed instead of the main processing shown in FIG. In this process, if the backed up information is normal and the probability setting value is not changed (step S21; N), whether the setting value change switch is turned on from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier Is determined (step S61).

  If the setting value change switch is not in the on state (step S61; N), the process proceeds to step S30 of FIG. When the setting value change switch is in the on state (step S61; Y), the shift determination process is performed (step S62). As described later, in the transition determination processing, it is determined whether the transition condition to the probability setting value change state is satisfied, and when the transition condition is satisfied, the probability setting value changing flag is set. .

  If the probability setting value changing in progress flag is set in the transition determination process (step S63; Y), the process of initializing the RAM and changing the set value to the probability setting value change state is shown in FIG. It transfers to step S35 of 6. In this modification, since the flag is set during the probability setting value change in the transition determination process, the process of step S37 may not be performed. If the probability setting value changing flag is not set in the transition determination process (step S63; N), the process proceeds to step S41 of FIG. 6 in order to perform the process of initializing the RAM area for game control.

  On the other hand, if the backed up information is not normal, after setting the RAM clear start address 1 (step S25), whether the setting value change switch is in the on state from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier Is determined (step S64). When the setting value change switch is not in the on state (step S64; N), the command (specific information) of the setting change instruction is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S28) to prohibit RAM access. (Step S29), stop the control and wait for the shutoff of the power supply of the gaming machine.

  When the setting value change switch is in the on state (step S64; Y), the shift determination process is performed (step S65). This transition determination process is the same process as step S62. When the probability setting value changing in progress flag is set in the transition determination process (step S66; Y), in order to perform a process of changing the probability setting value to a process of initializing the RAM and changing the probability setting value. It transfers to step S35 of FIG. If the probability setting value change in progress flag is not set in the transition determination process (step S66; N), the process proceeds to step S27.

[Migration determination processing]
FIG. 40 shows the transition determination process (steps S62 and S65) in the main process described above. In this transition determination processing, first, an initial value (for example, 30 seconds) is saved in the transition standby timer area (step S71), the state of the input port 1 is read (step S72), and it is determined whether transition conditions are satisfied Step S73).

  In the present modification, it is possible to shift to the probability setting value change state by having the attendant put the gaming balls in a predetermined order in a predetermined order within a predetermined time, and the winning area provided in the gaming area 32 From the state of the input port 1 to which the detection signal from is input, it is determined whether this transition condition is satisfied. When this transition condition is satisfied (step S73; Y), the probability setting value changing flag is set (step S76), and the transition determination processing is ended. This will shift to the probability setting value change state.

  When the transition condition is not satisfied (step S73; N), if the transition standby timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S74), and it is determined whether the transition standby timer is 0 (step S75) . Then, if the transition standby timer is not 0 (step S75; N), the process returns to step S72. That is, the detection signal from the winning area is monitored over a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds).

  When the transition standby timer is 0 (step S75; Y), the transition determination process is ended. That is, when the transition condition is not satisfied within the predetermined time, the transition determination process is ended without setting the probability setting value changing flag. As a result, when the backed up data is normal, the process proceeds to step S41 of FIG. 6 to perform initialization processing of the RAM area for game control, and the backed up data is abnormal. In this case, the processes of steps S28 and S29 are performed and the control is stopped.

  The transition condition may or may not be changeable at the game arcade. Also, although the game ball is put in the winning area in the predetermined order of the transition condition, the predetermined number of game balls may be put in the predetermined winning area regardless of the order. Further, predetermined detection by one detection means may be used as the transition condition. In this case, only the detection by the detection means may be set as the condition, or the predetermined condition (the number of times of detection, the detection interval, etc.) may be set as the predetermined condition. .

  Further, although the detection sensor of the pay area is used as the detection means used to establish the transition condition, other detection sensors may be used. For example, the touch sensor of the operation handle 24 or the setting value change switch 151 may be usable. However, it is preferable that the transition condition includes detection by detection means that the player can not freely operate during the game, such as a detection sensor of a winning area.

  Also, a plurality of dip switches are provided at positions that can be operated only when the front frame 12 is opened, and used as detection means used to satisfy transition conditions, and transition is made when the state of each dip switch is in a predetermined state A condition may be established. Alternatively, a keyboard may be provided at a position where it can be operated only when the front frame 12 is opened, and used as detection means used to satisfy the transition condition, and the transition condition may be satisfied by a password input from the keyboard. .

  Also, although the establishment of the transition condition is monitored to enable transition to the probability setting value change state only when the setting value change switch 151 is turned on when the game machine is turned on, the power supply of the game machine is turned on. Even when the setting value change switch 151 is not turned on at the same time, establishment of the transition condition may be monitored to enable transition to the probability setting value changing state. In this case, a period for constantly monitoring the establishment of the transition condition may be always set based on the power on of the gaming machine, or the transition condition if the set value change switch 151 is operated after the power on. A period may be started to monitor the formation of.

  From the above, in the gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state for giving the player a gaming value when the game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result. Detection setting means (gate switch 34a, winning opening switch 35a, starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a, special winning opening switch 38a) and probability setting values to which probability values used for lottery of the game are assigned Setting means (game control apparatus 100) which can be selected from a plurality of probability setting values based on the operation of the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) And the setting means enables selection of the probability setting value when the detection means detects a predetermined mode.Therefore, since the detection of the predetermined mode by the detection means has the same function as the setting key, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed illegally. In addition, the number of gaming machines capable of executing the task of changing the probability setting value at the same time is not limited to the number of setting keys, and the task of changing the probability setting value can be performed simultaneously with a plurality of gaming machines Improve.

  In addition, the game is executed based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, it is used in the game in a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state for giving a player a gaming value The probability setting values to which a plurality of detection means (the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the special winning opening switch 38a) and the probability value used for lottery of the game are assigned are A setting unit (game control apparatus 100) that can select from among a plurality of probability setting values based on the operation of the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) According to another aspect of the present invention, the setting means enables the selection of the probability setting value when the plurality of detection means detect the predetermined mode. . Therefore, since the detection of the predetermined mode by the detection means has the same function as the setting key, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed illegally. In addition, the number of gaming machines capable of executing the task of changing the probability setting value at the same time is not limited to the number of setting keys, and the task of changing the probability setting value can be performed simultaneously with a plurality of gaming machines Improve.

  The setting means enables the selection of the probability setting value when the detection means detects the predetermined mode in a fixed period after the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally changed.

  Also, the plurality of detection means can not be operated by the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally changed.

Fourth Modified Example
Next, a fourth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly the different part. explain. In the gaming machine of the present modification, the change of the probability setting value is performed by the setting value change operation unit configured by the dip switch.

  The dip switch forming the setting value change operation unit is provided at a position where it can be operated only when the front frame 12 is opened, and the input state is input to the CPU 111A. As shown in FIG. 41, three dip switches SW1 to SW3 are provided as setting value change operation units, and the state of the dip switches corresponding to each probability setting value is defined.

Probability setting value change processing
In the gaming machine of the present modification, probability setting value changing processing shown in FIG. 42 is performed instead of the probability setting value changing processing shown in FIG. In this probability setting value changing process, it is determined whether the state of the setting value changing operation unit has changed (step S461), and when it has changed (step S461), the value of the working probability setting value area is set to the corresponding value. (Step S462). Thus, the desired probability setting value is set by operating the setting value change operation unit during the probability setting value changing state and ending the probability setting value changing state as a state corresponding to the desired probability setting value. It becomes.

  By using the dip switch in this way, the task of setting a desired probability setting value becomes easy, and at the same time, the set probability setting value can be grasped at a glance. In addition, since the set probability setting value can be grasped at a glance, the probability setting value display device 153 may not be provided. Further, a cover covering the dip switch may be attachable so that the state of the dip switch is not immediately visible when the front frame 12 is opened.

  Further, in order to make it easy to grasp the state of each dip switch, a confirmation LED may be provided corresponding to each dip switch, and lighted when the corresponding dip switch is ON. In addition, the confirmation LED may be turned on at all times, or may be turned on only in the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode.

  Further, the setting value changing operation unit is not limited to the dip switch, and may be a toggle switch, a rotary switch, etc., as long as the probability setting value can be grasped by visually recognizing the state of each switch. It is good.

  Also, although the probability setting value change state is set according to the state of the setting key switch 152, transition to the probability setting value change state is enabled according to the state of the setting value change switch 151 as in the third modification described above. The probability setting value change state may be ended by the passage of. In this case, the probability setting value may be set based on the state of the setting value change operation unit when the predetermined time has elapsed, or based on the state of the setting value change operation unit at the time when the predetermined confirmation operation is performed. The probability setting value may be set.

  In addition, when not in the probability setting value changing state, the monitoring setting process is performed to monitor whether the currently set probability setting value and the state of the setting value changing operation unit match and whether the two states match. Also good. The monitoring process may be always performed when the probability setting value is not changed, or may be performed only at a predetermined time, such as when the power is turned on or when the special view fluctuation display game is started. Also, it may be performed periodically at regular intervals. If it is determined by the monitoring process that the two states do not match, notification that abnormality has occurred may be issued, or the game may be stopped.

Fifth Modification
Next, a fifth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly the different part. explain. The gaming machine of this modification is configured so that it is not possible to play a game when the wiring between the setting key switch 152 and the CPU 111A for making it possible to change the probability setting value is disconnected. .

  In this modification, a setting sub-board serving as setting means including a setting value change button, a setting key operation unit, and a probability setting value display device 153 is provided, and the setting sub-board is connected to the game control apparatus 100. It is supposed to be. For example, as shown in FIG. 43A, the wiring from the setting key switch 152 provided on the setting sub-board is connected to the game control apparatus 100 through the connector 154. In addition, illustration is abbreviate | omitted about the setting value change switch 151 here.

  FIG. 43 (a) shows the case where the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not at the second position. In this state, the setting key switch 152 is closed and the input to the CPU 111A is LOW, so that the input from the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the OFF state. Based on this, the probability setting value is not changed, and the game can be progressed. Further, in the gaming machine of the present modified example, an LED is provided which serves as a confirmation means that enables the state of the setting key switch 152 to be visually recognized. In the state of FIG. 14A, the confirmation means is turned off, and it can be confirmed that the setting key switch 152 is recognized to be in the off state.

  FIG. 43 (b) shows the case where the setting key of the setting key operation unit is in the second position. In this state, the setting key switch 152 is open and the input to the CPU 111A is HI, so that the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being on. Further, the confirmation means is turned on, and it can be confirmed that the setting key switch 152 is recognized to be in the on state.

  As described above, the probability setting value is changed as long as the setting key of the setting key operation unit is set to the second position and the input from the setting key switch 152 is turned on when the power is turned on. It is configured. That is, the input of the ON state from the setting key switch 152 is the specific operation information input based on the operation of the operation unit to be in the specific state, and the input of the specific operation information is performed. It becomes a probability setting value change state where selection of probability setting value is possible. In this probability setting value change state, the game can not be progressed, and by ending the probability setting value change state, the game can progress.

  FIG. 43 (c) shows the case where the wiring between the setting key switch 152 and the CPU 111A is broken, and FIG. 43 (d) shows the case where the connector 154 is detached. In either case, the input to the CPU 111A is HI, and it is recognized that the setting key switch 152 is on. Further, the confirmation means is turned on, and it can be confirmed that the setting key switch 152 is recognized to be in the on state.

  That is, since the same state as when the probability setting value is made changeable, the specific operation information is also input in this case. As a result, the probability setting value is changed and the game can not be progressed. As described above, since the specific operation information is input even when the disconnection or the connector is disconnected, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding when the abnormality is present. In addition, since the confirmation means is lit even though the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not at the second position, it is possible to visually confirm that an abnormality has occurred.

  Although the example in which the setting key switch 152 and the game control apparatus 100 are connected by the connector 154 is given here, the setting key switch 152 may be directly connected without the connector 154. In addition, although the setting sub-board which constitutes the setting means having the setting key switch 152 etc. is provided separately from the game control apparatus 100, the setting key switch 152 etc. is provided in the game control apparatus 100 and the setting means May be integrated with the game control apparatus 100. In this case as well, it is possible to detect a disconnection or a connector omission between the setting key switch 152 and the CPU 111A by the same configuration.

  Further, here, the specific operation information is input when the connection between the setting key switch 152 and the game control device 100 is interrupted, but the connection is interrupted when the setting sub-substrate and the game control device 100 are interrupted. Information may be input. Also, the setting sub-board may check the connection status of the setting key switch 152 etc. in the setting sub-board, and if there is an abnormality, the setting sub-board may output the specific operation information.

  From the above, it is possible to execute the game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, in the gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state for giving the player a gaming value Operation control unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting the probability setting value connected to the control unit (game control apparatus 100) for performing control and the control unit and assigned a probability value to be used for lottery of the game Setting means (game control apparatus 100) capable of selecting from a plurality of probability setting values by operation of the value change button (setting value change switch 151)), and the operation unit is operated to be in a specific state Based on the input, the specific operation information is input to the control means to enable selection of the probability setting value, and the control means proceeds with the game when the specific operation information is input. It is configured not performed, if the wiring between the setting means and the control means is broken, so that the specific operation information to the control means has to be entered. Therefore, an act of changing the probability setting value illegally can be prevented in advance.

  Further, when the power is turned on in a state in which the operation unit is operated to be in a specific state, it is possible to select the probability setting value. Therefore, an act of changing the probability setting value illegally can be prevented in advance.

Sixth Modification
Next, a sixth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly the different part. explain. In the gaming machine of this modification, the transition conditions to the probability setting value confirmation mode are different.

[Probability setting value confirmation processing]
In the present modification, probability setting value confirmation processing shown in FIG. 44 is performed instead of the probability setting value confirmation processing shown in FIG. In this probability setting value confirmation process, if the game is in progress (step S433; Y), the off state confirmation flag is cleared (step S474), and the probability setting value confirmation process is ended. If the game is not in progress (step S433; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is on (step S434). If not on (step S434; N), the off state confirmation flag is set. Then (step S473), the probability setting value confirmation process is ended. The off state confirmation flag is information indicating that the setting key switch has been turned off in the state where the game is not in progress.

  Then, if the setting key switch is in the on state (step S434; Y), it is determined whether the off state confirmation flag is present (step S471). If the off-state confirmation flag is present (step S471; Y), the off-state confirmation flag is cleared (step S472), and the processes after step S435 are performed to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode. On the other hand, when there is no off state confirmation flag (step S471; N), the probability setting value confirmation process is ended. That is, if the game is not in progress with the setting key switch in the on state during the game, the probability setting value confirmation mode is not entered and the setting key switch is turned off in the non-playing state. When it changes to the ON state, it shifts to probability setting value confirmation mode.

  In this way, by not transitioning to the probability setting value confirmation mode when the setting key switch is kept in the on state from during the game, it is intended during the game in the prohibition state in which the transition to the probability setting value confirmation mode can not be made. If the setting key switch is turned on without being switched on, then it will be in a non-playing state (non-prohibited state), and it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being displayed by shifting to the probability setting value confirmation mode . That is, it is possible to be in a state where the probability setting value can be confirmed only when operating with the intention to confirm the probability setting value.

  From the above, the setting unit (game control apparatus 100) operates the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)) in a state where the state of the game controlled by the control unit (game control apparatus 100) is not prohibited. The confirmation state is set only when the state of is changed to the predetermined state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being indicated unintentionally.

Seventh Modified Example
Next, a seventh modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly the different part. explain. The gaming machine of the present modification includes a RAM clear button as a third operation unit in addition to the setting key operation unit forming the first operation unit and the setting value change button forming the second operation unit. A signal from the RAM clear switch for detecting the operation of the RAM clear button is input to the game control apparatus 100. Further, as with the setting key operation unit and the setting value changing button, the RAM clear button can not be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened.

[Main processing]
In this modification, the main processing shown in FIG. 45 is performed instead of the main processing shown in FIG. In this main processing, when the RAM clear switch is in the on state (the state where the RAM clear button is pressed) (step S481; Y), the process proceeds to step S41. That is, the RAM clear switch serves as an operation unit for initializing the RAM 111C.

Probability setting value change processing
Also, in place of the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 11, the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 46 is performed. In this probability setting value changing process, when there is an input from the RAM clear switch (in the on state) (step S482; Y), the processing of step S412 and subsequent steps is performed to determine the selected probability setting value. Do.

  As described above, by turning on the power while the RAM clear button is pressed, the RAM 111C can be initialized, and the probability setting value can be determined by the RAM clear button. The work of determining the probability setting value can be selectively performed using the minimum operation unit, and the work efficiency in the game arcade can be enhanced. In addition, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, which can reduce the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced.

  When the setting key switch is operated when the power is turned on, transition to the probability setting value change state and initialization of the RAM is performed, whereas when the RAM clear button is operated when the power is turned on, the probability setting value is changed Since only the initialization of the RAM can be performed without transitioning to the state, when it is desired to perform only the initialization of the RAM, it is necessary to operate the setting key switch or transition to the probability setting value change state Instead, the work efficiency in the game arcade can be enhanced.

  From the above, the setting unit (game control apparatus 100) includes a plurality of operation units (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151), RAM clear button (RAM clear switch) Storage unit (RAM 111 C) when the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the predetermined operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), RAM clear button (RAM clear switch)) is operated. ) Can be initialized. In addition, it is possible to determine the selected probability setting value by operating a predetermined operation unit (RAM clear button (RAM clear switch)).

  In addition, the game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is controlled in the gaming machine capable of generating the special gaming state for giving the player the gaming value The first operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)), the second operation unit (setting value) control means (game control apparatus 100) and probability setting values to which probability values used for lottery of the game are assigned Setting means (game control device 100) which can be selected from a plurality of probability setting values by operation of the change button (set value change switch 151) and the third operation unit (RAM clear button (RAM clear switch)) Memory means (RAM 111C) capable of storing information necessary for control of the game by the control means including the information of the probability setting value selected by the means and the front face of the gaming machine 10 covered and closed It has a main frame (front frame 12) that can be converted into a state and an open state, and opening / closing detection means (game control device 100) that can detect the open / close state of the main frame. The open / close detection means detects the open state, and when the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the first operation unit is operated, the probability setting value can be changed and the storage means is made. Is initialized by the open / close detection means that the main body frame is in the open state, and when the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the third operation unit is operated, the probability setting value is set. This means that the storage means is initialized without making the change possible. Therefore, there is no need to change the probability setting value when only the initialization of the RAM is desired, and the work efficiency in the game arcade can be improved.

  Further, the control means is detected by the open / close detection means that the main body frame is in the open state, and when the power of the gaming machine is turned on in the state where the first operation unit and the third operation unit are operated, The probability setting value can be changed and the storage unit is initialized. If the body frame is closed, the open / close detection unit detects it and the first operation unit and the third operation unit are operated. When the power of the gaming machine is turned on in the off state, the storage means is initialized without changing the probability setting value. Therefore, even if the first operation unit and the third operation unit are operated at the same time, the state can be shifted to the probability setting value change state, and the work efficiency in the game arcade can be enhanced. Further, when the main body frame is in the closed state, since the state does not shift to the probability setting value changing state even if the first operation unit is operated, it is possible to prevent the wrongdoing.

  In FIG. 45, by performing the state of the setting key switch prior to the confirmation of the state of the RAM clear switch, even if the setting key operation unit and the RAM clear button are simultaneously operated, the state shifts to the probability setting value change state. However, the condition that the setting key switch is on and the RAM clear switch is on may be used as the transition condition to the probability setting value changing state. By operating the plurality of operation units as a condition, it is possible to clearly confirm the intention to shift to the probability setting value change state.

  In the case of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment which does not have the RAM clear button, the open / close detection means detects that the main frame is in the open state, and the setting key operation unit and the setting value change button are operated. When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the probability setting value can be changed and the storage means is initialized, and it is detected by the open / close detection means that the main frame is in the closed state, and When the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the setting key operation unit and the setting value change button are operated, the memory means is initialized without changing the probability setting value. It can be said that Also in this case, the condition that the setting key switch is on and the setting value change switch is on may be used as the transition condition to the probability setting value changing state.

  Further, the setting means can change the probability setting value by operating the second operation unit. Further, the setting means can determine the selected probability setting value by operating the third operation unit.

  In FIG. 46, the functions of the probability value change switch and the RAM clear switch may be interchanged. That is, when there is an input from the RAM clear switch, the processing from step S407 is performed to change the selected probability setting value, and when there is an input from the setting value change switch, the processing from step S412 is performed. A process of determining the selected probability setting value may be performed.

Eighth Modified Example
Next, an eighth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly the different part. explain. The gaming machine of this modification differs in the operation of determining the probability setting value.

Probability setting value change processing
In this modification, in place of the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 11, a probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 47 is performed. In this probability setting value changing process, when the setting value changing switch is operated in the first input mode (step S 491; Y), the processes after step S 407 are performed to change the probability setting value to be selected. When the setting value change switch is operated in the second input mode (step S492; Y), the processing of step S412 and subsequent steps is performed to determine the selected probability setting value.

  The first input mode in this case is an input mode in which the setting value change button is pressed and the pressing is ended in less than a predetermined prescribed time, and the first input mode is present when the pressing is finished. It is determined to be. That is, the probability setting value is changed when the pressing operation is performed for a short time and the hand is released from the setting value changing button (when the setting value changing switch 151 is changed to the off state). The reason for taking the hand off the setting value change button is to prevent the probability setting value from being updated when the second input mode described below is performed.

  The second input mode is an input mode in which the setting value change button is pressed and the pressing is ended in a predetermined time or more, and the second input mode is present when the predetermined time passes. It is determined to be. That is, when there is a long-time pressing operation exceeding the specified time (when the set value change switch 151 is turned on for the specified time or more), the probability setting value is decided.

  As described above, the probability setting value can be selected and determined by the setting value change button, and the RAM 111C can be initialized by turning on the power while pressing the setting value change button. The change of the set value, the confirmation and the clear of the RAM can be selectively performed by using the minimum operation unit, and the work efficiency in the game arcade can be enhanced. In addition, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, which can reduce the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced. The first input mode and the second input mode are not limited to the above-described operations, and may be any operation as long as they can be determined.

  From the above, in the setting means (the game control apparatus 100), a predetermined operation unit of the plurality of operation units (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) When the gaming machine is powered on in the operated state, the storage means (RAM 111C) can be initialized, and the selected probability setting value can be determined by operating a predetermined operation unit. It will be.

Ninth Modified Example
Next, a ninth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly the different part. explain. In the gaming machine of this modification, the transition conditions to the probability setting value confirmation mode are different.

[Probability setting value confirmation processing]
In the present modification, probability setting value confirmation processing shown in FIG. 48 is performed instead of the probability setting value confirmation processing shown in FIG. In this probability setting value confirmation process, when the game is not in progress (step S433; N), it is determined whether a predetermined abnormality has occurred (step S501). Then, when a predetermined abnormality has occurred (step S501; Y), the probability setting value confirmation process is ended and the mode is not shifted to the probability setting value confirmation mode.

  The predetermined abnormality can be set arbitrarily, but in this case, it is a magnet fraud, a board radio wave fraud, a frame radio wave fraud, a common electric power fraud, and a winning prize fraud. If any of these abnormalities is occurring, it is determined that a predetermined abnormality has occurred. These abnormalities are abnormalities caused by fraudulent activities, and it is known to the person performing fraudulentness that probability setting values are known by preventing transition to the probability setting value confirmation mode when such abnormalities occur. Can be prevented.

  In addition, although a switch abnormality due to the occurrence of a connector disconnection or the like, a chute ball out error, an overflow error, a dispensing abnormality error, and a glass frame opening error are not included in the predetermined abnormality, they may be included in the predetermined abnormality. Further, since the front frame 12 is opened and the setting key operation unit and the setting value change button are operated, the front frame opening error is not included in the predetermined abnormality.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 30, when any of these abnormalities has occurred, a security signal forming specific external information is output to the outside, so that the game store side is notified of the occurrence of the abnormality. Thus, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being known until the staff member confirms the notification of the occurrence of the abnormality.

  The security signal is output over a predetermined period also when initialization of the RAM 111C is performed or when the probability setting value confirmation mode is started, thereby prompting confirmation of the gaming machine. The external device of the gaming machine can grasp that the predetermined abnormality has occurred based on the fact that the security signal is output over the predetermined time.

  In addition, although the setting key switch is not switched to the probability setting value confirmation mode even if the setting key switch is turned on when a predetermined abnormality occurs, the setting key switch is turned on when a predetermined abnormality occurs. If all the predetermined abnormalities have been eliminated while the on state is maintained, the mode shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode from that time. By doing this, since it becomes possible to automatically check the probability setting value if all the predetermined abnormalities are eliminated, the efficiency of the confirmation operation can be improved.

  Also, by applying the configuration of the sixth modification described above, transition to the probability setting value confirmation mode is made only when the setting key switch is changed from the off state to the on state in a state where a predetermined abnormality has not occurred. You may In this case, if the game is being played (step S433; Y) and if a predetermined abnormality is occurring (step S501; Y), the off state confirmation flag is cleared.

  As described above, the transition to the probability setting value confirmation mode is prohibited by preventing the transition to the probability setting value confirmation mode when the setting key switch is kept in the on state from the state where the predetermined abnormality occurs. When the setting key switch is unintentionally turned on in a state where a predetermined abnormality that is a state occurs, thereafter, all the predetermined abnormalities are eliminated (a state that is not a prohibited state), and the probability setting value is set. It is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being displayed by shifting to the confirmation mode. That is, it is possible to be in a state where the probability setting value can be confirmed only when operating with the intention to confirm the probability setting value.

  From the above, it is possible to execute the game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, in the gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state for giving the player a gaming value The control unit (game control apparatus 100) for performing control, the probability setting value to which the probability value used for drawing the game is assigned, the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value Setting means (game control apparatus 100) capable of selecting from a plurality of probability setting values by the operation of the change switch 151), and the setting means is based on the operation unit being operated to be in a predetermined state If the state of the game controlled by the control means is in a state in which a predetermined abnormality has occurred, the operation unit is in a predetermined state where the probability setting value can be confirmed. Even in the state so that the was to avoid a confirmation state. Therefore, it becomes possible to select whether or not to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode according to the state of the game, and it is possible to prevent the inconvenience due to the indication of the probability setting value.

  Further, the predetermined abnormality includes a plurality of types of abnormalities, and the control means can output information to the outside of the gaming machine, and when any of the predetermined abnormalities occurs, the predetermined abnormality is This means that the specific external information (security signal) is output to the outside until all is resolved. Therefore, it is possible to notify the outside of the gaming machine that a predetermined abnormality has occurred, and to notify the outside that it is not possible to check the probability setting value, and the probability setting value is indicated. It is possible to prevent any inconvenience.

  In addition, storage means (RAM 111C) capable of storing information necessary for controlling the game is provided, and the control means performs the specified external information over a predetermined period when the storage means is initialized and when the confirmation state is started. It will be output. Therefore, it is possible to notify the outside of the gaming machine that a situation requiring confirmation of the gaming machine has occurred.

  Further, in the setting means, the operating unit is brought into the predetermined state in the state where the predetermined abnormality occurs, and when all of the predetermined abnormality is resolved while being in the predetermined state, all the predetermined abnormality is eliminated. It will be made to be in a confirmation state based on Therefore, since it becomes possible to automatically check the probability setting value when the predetermined abnormality does not occur, the efficiency of the confirmation operation can be improved.

  Further, the setting means is in the confirmation state only when the operation unit is changed to the predetermined state in the state where the predetermined abnormality has not occurred. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being indicated unintentionally.

Tenth Modification
Next, a tenth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly the different part. explain. The gaming machine of this modification can shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode even during a game.

[Probability setting value confirmation processing]
In this modification, in place of the probability setting value confirmation processing shown in FIG. 12, probability setting value confirmation processing shown in FIG. 49 is performed. In this probability setting value confirmation process, when the setting key switch is in the on state (step S434; Y), it is determined whether or not the game is in progress (step S511). If the game is not being played (step S511; N), the process proceeds to step S435.

  On the other hand, when the game is in progress (step S511; Y), the game interruption is set (step S512), the game interruption flag is set (step S513), and the process proceeds to step S435. Thereby, even in the game, it is possible to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode, and in the probability setting value confirmation mode, the game is interrupted.

  In addition, after performing the processing of step S442, it is determined whether there is a game interruption flag (step S514). If there is no game interruption flag (step S514; N), that is, if the game is not interrupted, the probability setting value confirmation process is ended. If there is a game interruption flag (step S514; Y), that is, if the game is interrupted, game resumption is set (step S515), the game interruption flag is cleared (step S516), and the probability setting value is set. End the confirmation process. As a result, the game that has been interrupted is resumed with the end of the probability setting value confirmation mode.

  In the state in which the game is suspended, the display of the collective display device 50 may be erased once, or the state immediately before the suspension may be continued. In addition, when the game is interrupted during the fluctuation display of the special figure fluctuation display game or the common drawing fluctuation display game, the fluctuation display on the collective display device 50 may be continued. In addition, a display indicating that the batch display device 50 is in the interruption state may be displayed.

  In addition, when the game is interrupted, an interruption command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and when the game is resumed, the restart command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the display device 41, voice, LED, etc. An effect corresponding to the interruption may be performed by the light emitting member or the movable role. Further, the display etc. on the display device 41 when restarting the game may be the same as the display etc. on the display device 41 at the time of the power failure recovery.

  Even when the game is being interrupted, winnings on the start winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the general winning opening 35 and the special fluctuation winning device 38 may be valid or invalid. Further, even during the interruption of the game, the payout of the game ball may be continued.

Eleventh Modification
Next, an eleventh modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly the different part. explain. The gaming machine of the present modification is configured to output a voice accompanying the change of the probability setting value.

  FIG. 50 (a) shows an example of changing the probability setting value. Set the setting key switch to the on position by turning the setting key on the setting key operation section to the second position while the power to the gaming machine is in the off state (t11). The value is changed (t12). The command under probability setting change is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 based on the setting value change state, and the effect control device 300 notifies that the probability setting value change state is based on the reception of this command. Output the notification voice during change. As the notification sound during change, any sound may be used. For example, a sound such as "the probability setting value is being changed", a specific music or an alarm sound may be mentioned. In addition, it is notified that the probability setting value change state is also caused by the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, and the operation of the panel effect device 44. Also good. For example, the display 41 may display "the probability setting value is being changed." That is, it is notified that it is a probability setting value change state using a rendering device used in the game. In this way, by notifying using the rendering device, it is possible to clearly notify that the probability setting value change state is being made, and even if the probability setting value change state is illegally made during business, the clerk or the periphery of the game store It is possible for the player to notice and prevent an unauthorized game from being played.

  Then, when the setting key switch of the setting key operation unit is turned to the first position and the setting key switch is turned off, the probability setting value change state ends (t13). Based on the end of the setting value change state, the game control device 100 transmits a command of termination of probability setting change to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 sets over a predetermined period (for example, 3 minutes) based on the reception of this command. The probability setting value notification voice for notifying information of the determined probability setting value is output (t13 to t14). Thereafter, a voice is output according to the state of the game (t14).

  Although any sound may be used as the probability setting value notification voice, for example, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), a sound corresponding to the set probability setting value is output. For example, when the probability setting value is 1, a voice "probability setting value 1 has been set" is output. Of course, other sounds or specific music or alarm sounds may be used. Further, also in the display device 41, display according to the probability setting value set in the same manner is performed. For example, when the probability setting value is 1, a message "probability setting value 1 has been set" is displayed. Of course, display other than this may be used.

  Besides, the probability setting value is notified as the display of the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, and the operation of the panel effect device 44 according to the set probability setting value. You may do so. That is, the probability setting value is notified using a rendering device used in the game. In this way, by notifying using the rendering device, it is possible to clearly notify that the probability setting value has been changed, and even if the probability setting value is illegally changed during business, the game clerk or the surrounding game It is possible for a person to notice and prevent unauthorized gaming from taking place.

  When the probability setting value change state is set, external information indicating that the probability setting value change state is set is output, and the external device (such as a hall computer) can recognize the probability setting value change state. Also good. Also in the probability setting value confirmation mode, similarly, external information indicating that the probability setting value confirmation mode is displayed is output, and the external apparatus (such as a hall computer) is in the probability setting value confirmation mode. It may be possible to grasp. By doing this, it is possible for the gaming shop side to immediately grasp that the probability setting value change state and the probability setting value confirmation mode are in effect, and to prevent fraudulent acts in advance.

  In addition, the game may not be progressed for a predetermined period after the end of the probability setting value change state. Further, the probability setting value notification sound may be output over a period in which the progress of the game can not be performed. By doing this, even if the probability setting value is illegally changed in business, it is not possible to play the game immediately, and it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding illegally. In the probability setting value confirmation mode, the speakers 19a and 19b, the display device 41, the sub information display device 90, the frame decoration device 18, the panel decoration device 46, and the panel effect device indicate that the probability setting value confirmation mode is in effect. The notification may be made by a rendering device such as 44.

  Further, in the probability setting value change state, voice may be output according to the probability setting value updated each time the probability setting value is updated by an operation. In addition, the probability setting value after updating may be notified in correspondence with the updating of the probability setting value in the same manner in other rendering devices. This makes it possible to easily confirm the selected probability setting value.

  From the above, it is possible to execute the game based on the establishment of the start condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, in the gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state for giving the player a gaming value A control unit (game control apparatus 100) for performing control, and a setting unit (game control capable of selecting a probability setting value to which a probability value used for drawing a game is assigned, from plural types of probability setting values by operating the operation unit The apparatus 100) and a rendering device (speakers 19a and 19b, display device 41, sub information display device 90, frame decoration device 18, panel decoration device 46, The probability setting value can be notified by the rendering device. Therefore, it is possible to prevent cheating in advance. In addition, the effect device can notify that the probability setting value can be changed. In addition, the effect device can notify that the probability setting value can be confirmed.

  In addition, after the probability setting value change state ends, the progress of the game is prohibited for a predetermined period. Therefore, even if the probability setting value is illegally changed in business, it is not possible to play the game immediately, and it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding illegally.

<Suggested production>
The gaming machine 10 can execute a pseudo-series effect of temporarily stopping and re-changing the decorative special symbol (identification information) and a suggested effect which suggests the execution of the pseudo-series effect. The suggested rendering is a rendering that suggests that the simulated rendering may be performed, and the suggested rendering may be performed even if the pseudo rendering is not performed. That is, after the suggestion effect is performed, the pseudo continuous effect may be performed, or the pseudo continuous effect may not be performed.

FIG. 51 shows an example of the suggestion effect of the present embodiment.
When the special figure variation display game starts, the effect control device 300 executes the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41.
During the execution of the decoration special figure variation display game, as shown in FIG. 51 (a), for example, the decoration special figure variation display game display section 41a for displaying the decoration special figure variation display game and the undigested A first waiting hold display 41b1 for displaying a decoration special view start memory display corresponding to the first start storage, and a second waiting hold for displaying a decoration special view start memory display corresponding to an undigested second start memory Display portion 41 b 2, a pending display portion 41 c for displaying information on starting storage during digestion (starting storage corresponding to the currently running special view variation display game), and a decorative special view variation display game display portion 41 a A small symbol variation display unit 41d that variably displays a small symbol relatively smaller than the decoration special symbol (identification information) that is variably displayed, and a number hold display unit 41e that displays the number of undigested starting memories in numbers. And are provided .

The effect control device 300 generates an effect control command signal (effect command) from the game control device 100, for example, at the start of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game, whether or not to execute the pseudo continuous effect in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. Pseudo-series effect lottery determined based on etc., and suggested effect lottery that determines whether or not to execute the suggested effect in the decoration special view variation display game based on the effect control command signal (effect command) from the game control device 100, etc. And do.
Then, when the suggestion effect lottery is won, the effect control device 300 performs the suggestion effect at a predetermined timing during the execution of the decoration special figure variation display game, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), for example, An execution suggestion image G1 which is an image indicating that there is a possibility that a pseudo continuous rendering is to be performed, and an expectation degree suggesting image G2 which is an image that suggests an expectation (execution expectation) at which the pseudo serial rendering is performed. Display
In addition, when it is elected the pseudo consecutive production lottery, as for example as shown in Figure 51 (c), production control control equipment 300 starts the pseudo consecutive production at the specified timing while the decoration special figure fluctuation indicatory game is under execution Then, the stop display of the pseudo-connected symbol G3 for notifying the start of re-variation.

Since the pseudo run symbol G3 is stopped and displayed at the start of the pseudo run effect, it can be said that the execution suggestion image G1 is an image that suggests that the pseudo run symbol G3 may be stopped and displayed. Similarly, it can be said that the expectation degree suggestion image G2 is an image that suggests an expectation degree at which the pseudo run symbol G3 is stopped and displayed.
In the decoration special view variation display game shown in FIG. 51 and FIG. 54 described later, after a plurality of decoration special symbols are variably displayed in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas in the display device 41, the left, middle, Although the variation display is stopped in the right order and the result mode is displayed, the stop display order of the decoration special symbol in the decoration special figure variation display game is not limited to the order of left, middle, right, and can be changed appropriately For example, the order may be left, right, or middle.

Here, in the present embodiment, the difference between the execution suggestion image G1 and the pseudo run symbol G3 is only the level of transparency. Specifically, the execution suggestion image G1 is an image obtained by semitransparentizing the opaque pseudo continuous symbol G3. That is, although the image displayed behind the execution suggestion image G1 is visible (or easily visible) through the execution suggestion image G1, it is displayed behind the pseudo continuous symbol G3. The existing image is not visible through the pseudo run symbol G3.
In addition, the difference between the execution suggestion image G1 and the pseudo run symbol G3 is not limited to only the high and low of the transparency, and can be appropriately changed. For example, a state in which a predetermined image is temporarily stopped may be referred to as an execution suggestion image G1, and a state in which the predetermined image is stopped may be referred to as a pseudo consecutive symbol G3.

For example, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), the expectation degree suggestion image G2 is displayed side by side with the execution suggestion image G1, and as shown in FIG. 51 (d), for example, the execution is performed in front of the execution suggestion image G1. It may be displayed superimposed on the suggestion image G1. That is, the display mode of the expectation degree suggestion image G2 includes a display mode displayed side by side in the execution suggestion image G1 and a display mode displayed superimposed on the execution suggestion image G1, and different execution expectations depending on the display mode It is possible to suggest the degree.
Of the display manners of the expectation degree suggestion image G2, the display manner displayed superimposed on the execution suggestion image G1 is, for example, a manner as shown in FIG. 51 (d) (that is, all of the expectation degree suggestion image G2 is an execution suggestion image It may be an aspect overlapping G1), or an aspect overlapping a portion of the expectation degree suggestion image G2 with the execution suggestion image G1.

  Further, the display mode displayed superimposed on the execution suggestion image G1 may be a mode in which the expectation degree suggestion image G2 is displayed superimposed on the execution suggestion image G1 behind the execution suggestion image G1. Since the execution suggestion image G1 is a translucent image, even when the expectation degree suggestion image G2 is disposed behind the execution suggestion image G1, both the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation degree suggestion image G2 are visible. Further, the expectation degree suggestion image G2 may be a translucent image. By making both of the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation degree suggestion image G2 into a semi-transparent image, it is possible to visually recognize the state (variation display mode) and the like of the decorative special symbol that is rapidly changing.

  The expected degree suggestion image G2 is configured by at least one of a first specific image (a character image of “?”) And a second specific image (a character image of “!”). That is, the display manner of the expectation degree suggestion image G2 includes a plurality of display manners in which the type, the number, and the arrangement order of the specific images constituting the expectation degree suggestion image G2 differ, and different execution expectation degrees are suggested according to the display manner. It can be done.

FIG. 52 (a) shows an example of the execution expectation degree suggested by the expectation degree suggestion image G2.
As the display mode of the expectation degree suggestion image G2, for example, as shown in FIG. 52A, a display mode ("?") Consisting of one first specific image and a display consisting of one second specific symbol Aspect ("!"), Display aspect ("??") consisting of two first specific images, display aspect ("!!") consisting of two second specific symbols, and first specific symbol Is the display mode in which the second specific symbol is disposed on the left side on the right ("!?"), And the display mode in which the second specific symbol is disposed on the right side is the first specific symbol on the left ("?!"). There is a difference in the suggested execution expectation depending on the type, the number, and the arrangement order of the specific images constituting the expectation degree suggestion image G2.

  Furthermore, in the display mode of the expectation degree suggestion image G2, for example, as shown in FIG. 52A, the display mode displayed side by side in the execution suggestion image G1 and the display mode displayed superimposed on the execution suggestion image G1 And the expectation degree suggestion image G2 is displayed side by side in the execution suggestion image G1 even if all of the types and the number and arrangement order of the specific images constituting the expectation degree suggestion image G2 are the same, and In the case of being superimposed on the suggestion image G1, the suggested execution expectation is different.

Specifically, for example, an expectation degree suggestion image G2 shown in FIG. 51 (b), that is, a display mode ("!?") In which the first particular symbol is disposed on the right side and the second particular symbol on the left side, and execution suggestion In the case of the expectation degree suggestion image G2 displayed in the display mode displayed side by side in the image G1, for example, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), the execution expectation degree (in the case of the expectation degree suggestion image G2 shown in FIG. It can be suggested that the expected degree at which the pseudo-sequence effect is executed is 40%.
Also, for example, in the display mode (“!?”) In which the first specific symbol is arranged on the right side and the second specific symbol is arranged on the left side (“!?”) As shown in FIG. In the case of the expectation degree suggestion image G2 displayed in the display mode displayed in a superimposed manner, for example, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), the execution expectation degree (in the case of the expectation degree suggestion image G2 shown in FIG. It can be suggested that the expected degree at which the rendition is performed is 50%.
The display mode of the expectation degree suggestion image G2 is determined, for example, in a suggestion effect lottery.

Here, the first specific image (character image “?”) And the second specific image (character image “!”) Are common to each of these two types of specific images as shown in FIG. 52 (b), for example. And a non-common part which is not common.
The type of the specific image is not limited to two, and may be three or more.
Further, the common part common to each of the plurality of types of specific images may be a part having a common color or shade, in addition to the part having a common shape.
In addition, the specific image may not be composed of a common part common to each of a plurality of types of specific images and a non common part that is not common. That is, the specific image does not have to have a common part common to each of a plurality of types of specific images, but can display the expected degree suggestion image G2 having a sense of unity regardless of the display mode of the expected degree suggestion image G2. It is preferable that a specific image has a common part common to each of a plurality of types of specific images from the viewpoint of the like.

Further, the expectation degree suggestion image G2 is not limited to one configured only by the specific image, and may include an image other than the specific image as long as it includes at least the specific image. Specifically, the expectation degree suggestion image G2 is, for example, “Is it a pseudo-link?” (Because? Is a specific image, it can be changed to! Or! Or?! Or? Or !!), etc. Also good.
Also, the specific image is not limited to the character image, and may be a character image as shown in FIG. 53 (a), for example. In the example shown in FIG. 53 (a), the non-common part of the left specific image (first specific image) is an image part imitating both eyes, and the non-common part of the right specific image (second specific image) is sunglasses The other part is a common part.
Also, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), for example, the result of the special figure fluctuation display game being executed is a big hit result, as shown in FIG. It is also possible to indicate the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) to be In that case, the suggestion effect can suggest that the pseudo-series effect may be executed by the execution suggestion image G1, and can also suggest the big hit expectation degree by the expectation degree suggestion image G2.

In addition, the suggested effect is not limited to the effect that suggests the execution of the pseudo connected effect, and can be changed as appropriate.
The suggested effect may be, for example, as shown in FIG. 54, an effect that suggests stop display of a predetermined general symbol. Here, the decorative special symbol includes a general symbol (symbol 1 to 9) and a special symbol (pseudo consecutive symbol G3 or the like).

  Specifically, first, the decoration special figure variation display game starts, and then, as shown in, for example, FIG. 54 (a), the variation display in the left variation display area stops, and then, for example, as shown in FIG. As shown, the suggestion effect is performed at a predetermined timing, and the execution suggestion image G1 suggests that the stop display of a predetermined general symbol ("5" in this case) may be executed in the middle variation display area. And an expectation degree suggestion image G2 suggesting an expectation degree (execution expectation degree) at which stop display of a predetermined general symbol is executed in the middle variation display area. Thereafter, the fluctuation display in the middle fluctuation display area is stopped, and for example, as shown in FIG. 54 (c), a predetermined general symbol is stopped and displayed, or other than the predetermined general symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Here, since the reach state occurs in FIG. 54 (c), it can be said that the suggested rendering shown in FIG. 54 (b) is the rendering that suggests the execution of the reach rendering. That is, the execution suggestion image G1 shown in FIG. 54 (b) is an image that suggests that the reach effect may be performed, that is, the same decoration special symbol as the decoration special symbol that has already been stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed. Image that suggests that there is a possibility of In addition, the expectation degree suggestion image G2 shown in FIG. 54 (b) is an image that suggests the degree of expectation (the execution expectation degree) at which the reach effect is performed, that is, the same decoration special symbol as the decoration special symbol that is already stopped. It can be said that it is an image that suggests the degree of expectation that is displayed stopped.

  In addition, in the suggestion effect which suggests the stop indication of a predetermined general symbol, the expectation degree suggestion image G2 does not imply the expectation degree (execution expectation degree) that the stop indication of the predetermined general symbol is executed, for example, The result of the special view variation display game being executed may indicate the degree of expectation (big hit expected degree) to be a big hit result.

  Further, the suggestion effect shown in FIG. 54 (b) targets the middle variation display region among the three left, middle and right variation display regions constituting the decoration special view variation display game display unit 41a, ie, middle The execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation degree suggestion image G2 corresponding to the variation display area are displayed, and it is suggested that a predetermined general symbol may be stopped and displayed in the middle variation display area by the execution suggestion image G1. Although the expected degree suggesting image G2 suggests the expected degree that the predetermined general symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle variation display area, it is not limited thereto. That is, the suggestion effect which suggests the stop display of a predetermined general symbol may be a target for the left fluctuation display area among the three fluctuation display areas on the left, middle and right, or the right fluctuation display area May be targeted.

Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 54 (d), suggestive effects suggesting stop display of a predetermined general symbol for each of two variable display areas in the left, middle and right three variable display areas. You may go. In addition, as shown in FIG. 54 (e), it is possible to perform suggestion effects suggesting stop display of a predetermined general symbol for each of the three variation display areas on the left, middle and right.
As shown in FIG. 54 (d) and FIG. 54 (e), a plurality of suggestion effects are performed simultaneously by performing suggestion effects suggesting stop display of a predetermined general symbol for each of a plurality of variable display areas Can. Furthermore, the player's sense of expectation is because the results of the plurality of suggestion effects (whether or not the information suggested by the suggestion effects was correct) are not known at one time but are sequentially understood for each of the left, middle and right fluctuation stops. While continuing for a long time, it is possible to gradually increase the player's expectation.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 55, for example, the suggestion effect is an execution of a pending change effect that changes the display mode of the decoration special view start memory display (hereinafter referred to as "pending display") from the first display mode to the second display mode. It may be an effect that suggests.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), the decorative feature variation display game starts, and then, as shown in FIG. 55 (b) or 55 (c), for example, the predetermined timing The suggestion effect is performed in the execution suggestion image G1 that suggests that the pending change presentation may be executed, and the degree of expectation suggesting image that indicates the degree of expectation (execution expectation) that the pending change presentation is performed G2 is displayed. After that, the pending change effect is not performed, and the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation degree suggesting image G2 are deleted at a predetermined timing, or, for example, the pending change effect is performed at a predetermined timing as shown in FIG. The hold display of the first display mode (here, circle) changes to the hold display of the second display mode (here, star). In this case, the execution suggestion image G1 is, for example, an image obtained by making the hold display of the second display mode translucent.

In addition, in FIG. 55 (c), although a part of the expectation degree suggestion image G2 overlaps the execution suggestion image G1, a display mode displayed by overlapping the execution suggestion image G1 among the display modes of the expectation degree suggestion image G2 In the aspect, all of the expectation degree suggestion image G2 may be overlapped with the execution suggestion image G1, or a part of the expectation degree suggestion image G2 may be overlapped with the execution suggestion image G1.
Further, in FIG. 55 (c), although the expectation degree suggestion image G2 is disposed on the front side of the execution suggestion image G1, a display manner in which the display manner is superimposed on the execution suggestion image G1 among the display manners of the expectation degree suggestion image G2. A mode may be such that the expectation degree suggestion image G2 is displayed on the front side of the execution suggestion image G1 superimposed on the execution suggestion image G1, or the expectation degree suggestion image G2 is shown behind the execution suggestion image G1 The image G1 may be superimposed on the image G1.
Further, in the suggestion effects shown in FIGS. 54 (b) and 54 (c), the execution suggestion image G1 and the degree of expectation corresponding to the hold display (hereinafter referred to as "on hold display") displayed in the hold display area 41c. The suggestion image G2 is displayed to suggest that the display mode of the pending display may be changed by the execution suggested image G1, and the display mode of the pending display is changed by the expected degree suggestion image G2 Suggest the degree of expectation, but it is not limited to this. That is, the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation degree suggestion image G2 corresponding to the hold display (hereinafter referred to as "standby hold display") displayed on the first standby hold display unit 41b and the second standby hold display unit 41b2 The display indicates that there is a possibility that the display mode of the on-hold display may change due to the execution suggestion image G1, and the expectation on the display mode of the on-hold display changes according to the expected degree suggestion image G2 It may be suggested.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game (special view variation display game) is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the special gaming state can be generated when the result of the game becomes a special result. The game machine, further comprising suggestion effect execution means (effect control device 300) for executing suggestion effect (see FIGS. 51 (b) and (d)) for suggesting execution of a predetermined advance notice effect (for example, pseudo sequential effect); In the suggested effect, it is possible to display a plurality of types of specific images (for example, a character image of “?” And a character image of “!”), And predetermined according to the arrangement order of the plurality of specific images displayed in the suggested effect. The degree of expectation (preceding degree of execution) for which the advance notice effect is executed or the degree of expectation (big hit expecting degree) for which the game result is a special result is different (see FIGS. 52A and 53B).

Therefore, according to the specific image displayed by the suggested effect which suggests the execution of the predetermined advance effect, the expected degree (execution expected degree) for which the predetermined advance effect is executed or the expected degree for which the game result is a special result (big hit Since the degree of expectation can be suggested, it is possible to enhance the interest of suggestive effects.
In addition, suggestion production is not limited to production which suggests execution of simulated continuation production as predetermined notice production, but can be changed suitably, for example, as shown in Drawing 54 (b), reach as predetermined notice production For example, as shown in FIGS. 55 (b) and 55 (c), it may be an effect that suggests execution of a pending change effect as a predetermined advance effect. In the case where the suggested rendering is a rendering that suggests the execution of the pseudo rendering, a pseudo rendering suggestion image that suggests the execution of the pseudo rendering is displayed in the fluctuation display area of the suggestion target as the execution suggesting image G1 (FIG. 51) (B) (see (d)), when the suggested effect is an effect that suggests the execution of the reach effect, a reach mode suggested image that indicates the execution of the reach effect and the type of the reach effect as the execution suggested image G1 May be displayed in the variable display area of the suggestion target, or when the suggestion effect is an effect suggesting the execution of the hold change effect, the hold change suggestion that indicates the execution of the hold change effect as the execution suggestion image G1 The image may be displayed in the variable display area to be suggested.

  Further, a plurality of execution suggestion images G1 may be displayed in one variation display area. In that case, for example, as shown in FIG. 56A (a), a plurality of execution suggestion images G1 (here, reach mode suggestion images) are arranged on one circumference, moved along the one circumference, The roulette effect may be performed such that the execution suggestion image G1 stopped at the position is a real execution suggestion image and the other is a dummy execution suggestion image. By performing such a roulette effect, it becomes easy to understand which execution suggestion image G1 is the real thing (here, what kind of reach effect may be achieved), so the interest of the game is improved.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 56A (b), the expectation degree suggestion image G2 may be configured to execute an effect of performing a predetermined operation. In that case, from the viewpoint of clarifying the correspondence between the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation degree suggestion image G2 etc., the expectation degree suggestion image G2 operates based on a part of the expectation degree suggestion image G2 (partly It is preferable to operate in a fixed state). In the example shown in FIG. 56A (b), the swinging operation is performed as the predetermined operation, but the predetermined operation is not limited to this and can be appropriately changed, and may be, for example, an expansion and contraction operation.
Further, from the viewpoint of clarifying that the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation degree suggestion image G2 are different images, for example, as shown in FIG. 56A (c), the expectation degree suggestion image G2 is a specific image. It may include an enclosed frame image (area block image, area section image, suggested symbol related emphasized image).

In addition, among the display modes of the expectation degree suggestion image G2, the display manner displayed superimposed on the execution suggestion image G1 is, for example, as shown in FIG. 56A (d), a fusion of the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation degree suggestion image G2 It may be a display mode that looks like it did.
Further, the expectation degree suggestion image G2 may be displayed not at the vicinity of the execution suggestion image G1 but at a position away from the execution suggestion image G1. In that case, for example, a relationship-weighted image (effect image) may be displayed across the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation degree suggestion image G2 so that the correspondence between the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation degree suggestion image G2 is clear. preferable.

  In addition, although the positional relationship between the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation degree suggestion image G2 can be selected as appropriate, from the viewpoint of preventing misidentification or making the correspondence between the execution suggestion picture G1 and the expectation degree suggestion image G2 clearer, etc. For example, as shown in FIG. 56A (e), the positional relationship such that the lower point portion of the expectation degree suggestion image G2 and the center line (horizontal center line of the execution suggestion image G1) become the same position; f) As shown in (g), the positional relationship such that the lower part of the expectation degree suggestion image G2 and the upper side or the lower side of the execution suggestion image G1 are at the same position, for example, as shown in FIG. 56A (h) A position where the center of the expectation degree suggestion image G2 is arranged on the center line (longitudinal center line) of the execution suggestion image G1 (or a position shifted to the left or right from the vertical center line) The positional relationship which becomes is preferable. In the example shown in FIGS. 56A (e) to (h), the display mode of the expectation degree suggestion image G2 is displayed side by side in the execution suggestion image G1, but the display manner of the expectation degree suggestion image G2 The same positional relationship is preferable also in the case where the display mode is displayed superimposed on the execution suggestion image G1.

  Furthermore, in the display mode displayed side by side in the execution suggestion image G1, it corresponds to the left fluctuation display area from the viewpoints of preventing misidentification and making the correspondence between the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation degree suggestion image G2 clearer. The expected degree suggestion image G2 is preferably displayed on the left of the execution suggested image G1 corresponding to the left fluctuation display area as shown in FIG. 56A (f), for example, and the expectation degree suggestion corresponding to the right fluctuation display area The image G2 is preferably displayed on the right of the execution suggestion image G1 corresponding to the right fluctuation display area as shown in FIG. 56A (e), for example, and the expectation degree suggestion image G2 corresponding to the middle fluctuation display area For example, as shown in FIGS. 56A (g) and (h), the upper right of the execution suggestion image G1 corresponding to the middle variation display area (the Because the degree of expectation suggestion image G2 overlap could be misinterpreted as corresponding to hold display, it is preferable to display on next preferred).

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the suggested effect, there are cases where plural types of specific images are displayed and cases where any one type of specific image is displayed among plural types of specific images. When one type of specific image is displayed (for example, in the case of “?”, In the case of “!”, In the case of “?” In the case of “!!” in the case of “!!”) When the images are displayed in the first arrangement order (for example, in the case of “!?”) And in the case where plural types of specific images are displayed in the second arrangement order (for example, in the case of “?!”) 52 (a), 53 (b), and may be configured to differ in the degree of expectation (predicted degree of execution) in which a predetermined advance presentation effect is executed or the degree of expectation (big hit expected degree) in which the game result is a special result b) see).
By configuring in this way, it is possible to suggest a more detailed degree of expectation, and thus it is possible to further enhance the interest of suggestion effects.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the predetermined advance notice effect is at least a part of identification after variably displaying a plurality of identification information (decorative special symbol) for a predetermined period in one game (special figure variation display game) It is a pseudo-rectification effect that can execute unit fluctuation display for temporarily stopping information multiple times, and the suggestion effect is pseudo-display by displaying a pseudo-recommendation suggestion image (execution suggestion image G1 shown in FIGS. 51 (b) and (d)) It is an effect that suggests execution of a series effect, and a predetermined advance presentation effect is executed when the specific image is displayed side by side in the pseudo series suggestion image and when the specific image is displayed superimposed on the pseudo series suggestion image. Can be configured so that the expectation (execution expectation) or the expectation with which the game result is a special result (big hit expectation) differs (see FIGS. 52 (a) and 53 (b)).
By configuring in this way, the correspondence between the pseudo connected suggestion image and the specific image can be clarified, and more detailed expectations can be suggested, so the interest of the suggestion effect can be further enhanced.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the specific image can be configured to include a common part common to each of the plurality of types of specific images and a non-common part not common to each (see FIG. 52 (b )reference).
By configuring in this way, it is possible to display a specific image with a sense of unity, so it is possible to further enhance the interest of suggestion effects.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game (special figure variation display game) is performed to variably display identification information (decorative special symbol) in a plurality of variation display areas based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. In the gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state when the result of the special result is obtained, the degree of expectation that the predetermined identification information is stopped and displayed in the variation display area (the degree of expectation that the stop display of the predetermined identification information is executed It is possible to execute an expectation degree indication effect (indication effect (see FIG. 51 (b), FIG. 54 (b), FIG. 54 (b), (d), (e)) that suggests (execution expectation degree)). , A specific image (for example, a character image “?” Or a character image “!”) Is displayed, and the degree of expectation (the degree of expectation for execution) differs according to at least one of the type, the number, and the arrangement order of the specific images (see FIG. 52 (a)).

Therefore, since it is possible to execute an expectation degree suggestion effect that suggests an expectation degree (execution expectation degree) in which predetermined identification information (decorative special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the variable display area as the suggestion effect, the interest effect of the suggestion effect Can be enhanced.
In this embodiment, the execution expectation degree and the big hit expectation degree are made different according to the type, the number and the arrangement order of the specific images, but the execution expectation degree according to at least one of the type, the number and the arrangement order of the specific images And if the big hit expectation degree is different it is good. For example, there is only one type of specific image, and the degree of expectation is different according to the number of specific images (for example, in the case of "?" And in the case of "??" and "???"). It is also possible.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the expectation degree indication effect (indication effect), a specific image (for example, a character image of “?” Or “! Character images can be displayed or arranged in a variable display area to be suggested so that a specific image can be displayed (see FIGS. 51 (b) and (d)).
By configuring in this manner, since the variable display area of the suggestion target becomes clear, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the suggestion effect.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game (special figure variation display game) is performed to variably display identification information (decorative special symbol) in a plurality of variation display areas based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. In the gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state when the result of is a special result, each of the plurality of variable display areas is suggestive effect which suggests that predetermined identification information may be stopped and displayed. It is possible to execute as a target (refer to (b) and (e) in FIG. 54), and in the suggested effect, plural types of specific images (for example, a character image of “?” And a character image of “!”) Are displayed. The degree of expectation that the predetermined identification information is stopped and displayed in the variable display area according to the arrangement order of the plurality of types of specific images displayed in (the degree of expectation that the stop display of the predetermined identification information is executed (expected degree of execution) (See Fig. 52). ) Reference).

Therefore, it is possible to execute, for each of a plurality of variable display areas, a suggestion effect that suggests that predetermined identification information (decorative special symbol) may be stopped and displayed in the variable display area, and Since the degree of expectation (execution expectation) at which the stop display is executed can be suggested by the specific image displayed in the suggestion effect, it is possible to enhance the interest of the suggestion effect.
In addition, by performing suggestion effects for each of the plurality of variable display areas, it is possible to perform a plurality of suggestion effects simultaneously. Furthermore, the player's sense of expectation continues over a long period of time, and the player's sense of expectation is gradually increased, as the result of the plurality of suggestion effects (whether or not the information suggested in the suggestion effect is correct) is known sequentially Can.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the specific image displayed by the suggestion effect is displayed superimposed on the variation display area targeted by the suggestion effect among the plurality of variation display areas, or the indication effect is Can be displayed side by side in the target variable display area (see FIG. 54 (e)).
By configuring in this manner, it becomes clear which of the plurality of variable display areas is the target of the suggested effect, so it is possible to further enhance the interest of the suggested effect.

<Modification of suggestion effect>
Here, FIG. 56B shows a modification of the suggestion effect which suggests the execution of the on-hold change effect of changing the display mode of the on-hold display (particularly, on-hold on-hold display) from the first display mode to the second display mode.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 56B (a), the decorative feature variation display game starts, and as shown in FIG. 56B (b), for example, suggestion effects are performed at a predetermined timing, The display mode of the predetermined on-hold display (on-hold display other than on-hold display for change) changes from the first display mode (here, circle) to the intermediate display mode (here, double circle). It is suggested that the pending change presentation may be performed. Note that an expectation degree suggestion image G2 may be displayed, which indicates the degree of expectation (execution expectation degree) for which the hold change effect is to be performed, by arranging or overlapping the hold display during the intermediate display mode.

Next, for example, as shown in FIGS. 56B (d) and (e), the periphery of the first character image G41 and the standby display unit (the first standby display unit 41b1, the second standby display unit 41b2) And a second character image G42 for performing a predetermined operation is displayed. In the example shown in (d) and (e) of FIG. 56, the second character image G42 performs an operation of rotating in the counterclockwise direction around the hold display unit during standby as the predetermined operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 56B (f), for example, the second character image G42 performs a specific operation of specifying a pending display which is a change target. In the example shown in FIG. 56B (f), the second character image G42 performs an operation of pointing the pending display of the change target with the notification image G43 for reporting the pending display of the change target as the specific operation. ing.
Next, as shown in, for example, FIG. 56B (g), the first character image G41 performs an operation of acting on the pending display of the change target. In the example shown in FIG. 56B (g), the first character image G41 performs an action of throwing an action image G44 imitating the hold display of the second display mode toward the hold display during waiting for change. ing.
Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 56B (h), the display mode of the pending display of the change target changes from the first display mode (here, circle) to the second display mode (here, star).

In the example shown in FIG. 56B, the action image G44 thrown by the first character image G41 is on hold display during waiting as it is after changing, but it is not limited to this. After the first character image G41 changes, The standby display may be displayed while the standby image after the change of the operation image G44 or the first character image G41 may be displayed.
In addition, when there are a plurality of pending display pending during the change target, the second character image G42 of one may perform a specific operation for each pending display pending for the change, or each of the plurality of second character images G42 A specific operation may be performed on the pending display of the change target corresponding to.

In addition, it is possible to extend the operation range of the predetermined operation of the second character image G42 to not only the on-hold display unit but also the on-execution display unit 41c. That is, for example, the second character image G42 is turned around the standby display area (the first standby display area 41b1, the second standby display area 41b2) and the active display area 41c. It is also possible to cause an operation to turn clockwise. This makes it possible to show that the display mode of the pending display may change.
Moreover, when performing an operation to turn counterclockwise as a predetermined operation of the second character image G42, the suspension display of the first display mode is, for example, an image that rotates clockwise as shown in FIG. 56B (i). It may be an image including (an image imitating a clock hand here). As a result, it is possible to make the predetermined motion (the motion in the counterclockwise direction) of the second character image G42 noticeable.

<Modification A of the game board>
At least a part of the game board 30 (including the center case 40 in this variation) may be made of a transparent material.
One example of the game board 30 of the modified example A will be described with reference to FIG. 57 and FIG. 58 (a). FIG. 57 is a front view schematically showing the game board 30 of the modification A. FIG. 58 (a) is a left overlapping area in the display portion of the display device 41 attached to the game board 30 of the modification A It is a figure for demonstrating 41L and the right side duplication area | region 41R.

For example, as shown in FIG. 57, an opening 30b is provided substantially at the center of the game board 30, and the display (display area) of the display device 41 is viewed from the front of the gaming machine 10 through the opening 30b. It is possible. The length (width) of the opening 30b in the left-right direction is shorter than the length of the display of the display device 41 in the left-right direction. Therefore, the left end area (the area on the left side surrounded by an alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 58A) of the display unit of the display device 41 is a left overlapping area 41L overlapping the game board 30 in the front and rear direction. The right end area of the part (the area on the right side surrounded by an alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 58A) is a right overlapping area 41R that overlaps the game board 30 in the front-rear direction.
The game board 30 covers the left overlapping area 41L of the display unit (overlaps with the left overlapping area 41L) and covers the right overlapping area 41R of the display unit (overlaps with the right overlapping area 41R) right covering The part is made of a transparent material. Thus, the left overlapping area 41L of the display unit can be viewed through the left covered portion of the game board 30, and the right overlapping area 41R of the display unit can be viewed through the right coated area of the game board 30. . In the game board 30, at least the left side covering portion and the right side covering portion may be made of transparent materials.

The front surface of the left side covering portion of the game board 30 (hereinafter referred to as "left side falling area 32L") is a part of the left side game area of the game area 32, and the game balls can flow down. Further, the front surface of the right side covered portion of the game board 30 (hereinafter referred to as "right side flow down area 32R") is a part of the right side game area of the game area 32, and the game balls can flow down.
Therefore, it can be said that the left overlapping area 41L of the display unit is visible through the left flowing area 32L of the gaming area 32. In addition, it can be said that the right overlapping area 41R of the display unit can be visually recognized through the right flowing area 32R of the gaming area 32.

In the display device 41, as the lightness of the display color of the display unit decreases, the amount of light illuminating the gaming balls flowing down in front of the display unit (the gaming balls flowing down the left flow area 32L and the right flow area 32R) decreases. Therefore, the game ball flowing down in front of the display unit looks dark. Therefore, when the display color of the display unit is too dark (the lightness of the display color falls below the lower threshold), the gaming ball flowing down the front of the display unit assimilates with the display (dark display) of the display unit and is difficult to view become.
On the other hand, as the lightness of the display color of the display unit increases, the amount of light illuminating the gaming balls flowing down the front of the display unit (the gaming balls flowing down the left flow area 32L and the right flow area 32R) increases. The game ball flowing down the front of the club looks bright. Therefore, when the display color of the display unit is too bright (the lightness of the display color exceeds the upper threshold), the gaming ball flowing down the front of the display unit assimilates with the display (bright display) of the display unit and is difficult to view Become.
Therefore, even when the lightness of the display color of the display unit falls below the lower threshold or when the lightness of the display color of the display unit exceeds the upper threshold, it becomes difficult to check the gaming ball flowing forward of the display unit. Will decrease.

  Therefore, in the case of this modification, that is, when using the game board 30 (for example, the game board 30 as shown in FIG. 57) configured to allow the game ball to flow down the front of the display unit of the display device 41 as a game board, A color whose lightness falls within the allowable range (hereinafter referred to as “sphere visibility securing color”) is displayed on at least a part of each of the left overlapping area 41L and the right overlapping area 41R. Specifically, when using the game board 30 having a configuration in which game balls can flow down in front of the display unit of the display device 41 as a game board, the image data for the display device 41 stored in the image ROM 325 is created. At this time, consideration is given to creating so that the sphere visibility securing color is displayed in at least a part of each of the left side overlapping area 41L and the right side overlapping area 41R.

Here, the allowable range of lightness will be described.
For example, as shown in FIG. 58B, the lightness of the color of the lowest lightness image (blackout image) among the images that can be displayed on the display unit of the display device 41 is set to “0”. When the lightness of the color of the highest lightness image (whiteout image) among the displayable images is “100”, the lightness of the color of the image displayed on the display unit of the display device 41 takes a value of 0 to 100. . In this modification, for example, as shown in FIG. 58B, the lightness lower threshold is set to "20" and the upper threshold is set to "80", and the allowable range of lightness is set to a range of 20 or more and 80 or less. That is, the lightness of the sphere visibility securing color falls within the range of 20 or more and 80 or less. Of course, the allowable range of the lightness is not limited to the range of 20 to 80 and can be appropriately changed.

FIG. 59 shows an example of a display effect to be performed when using the game board 30 having a configuration in which game balls can flow down in front of the display unit of the display device 41 as the game board. FIG. 59 (a) is an example of a blackout effect, and FIG. 59 (b) is an example of a whiteout effect.
In the case of a blackout effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 59 (a), the middle lightness image Q in which the lightness of the display color falls within the allowable range is displayed in each of the left overlap area 41L and the right overlap area 41R. By doing this, it is possible to display the sphere visibility securing color in at least a part of each of the left side overlapping area 41L and the right side overlapping area 41R.
Further, even in the case of whiteout effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), the middle lightness image Q in which the lightness of the display color falls within the allowable range, the left overlap area 41L and the right overlap area 41R, respectively. By displaying on the screen, the sphere visibility securing color can be displayed on at least a part of each of the left side overlapping area 41L and the right side overlapping area 41R.

  As a result, the game balls flowing down the left flowable area 32L of the game area 32 have the middle brightness image Q displayed in the left overlap area 41L of the display unit (that is, the brightness of the display color in the left overlap area 41L is within the allowable range The game ball passing through the front of the area falling within the right side of the game area 32 and flowing down the right side flow area 32R of the game area 32 is the middle brightness image Q displayed in the right side overlap area 41R of the display unit Among them, it passes through the front of the region where the brightness of the display color falls within the allowable range. And, since the game ball is easily visible when passing in front of at least the medium brightness image Q (that is, the area in which the ball visibility securing color is displayed), the player can see the front of the display unit of the display device 41 The game balls flowing down (that is, the left flow area 32L and the right flow area 32R) can be easily confirmed, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 59A and 59B, only the background image is shown among the images displayed on the display unit of the display device 41. That is, for example, as shown in FIGS. 58 (a) and 58 (b), by displaying the background image including the medium brightness image Q, the sphere visibility is displayed in at least a part of each of the left overlap area 41L and the right overlap area 41R. Secured color can be displayed.

Here, in the present invention, in the drawing control of the display screen displayed on the display unit of the display device 41, the concept of scenario data (scenario layer) is used. The scenario is, for example, a background scenario, a scenario for the left symbol, a scenario for the right symbol, ..., etc., and the display effects such as the variation effect of the symbol are divided into a plurality of display layers (scenario layers) to make a table in advance. It is a method of generating a picture of one screen by setting and controlling them individually as a scenario and combining all the scenarios.
A plurality of display layers (scenario layers) are separately categorized for each display element, for example, background, left pattern, right pattern,. It is set as a table of operation scenarios for switching and displaying effects.

In the present invention, the display elements (display components) used in the effects of the display device 41 are "background", "left symbol", "right symbol", "middle symbol", "notice 1 character", "notice 2" It is divided into eight elements of "character", "hold display (decorative display start memory display)" and "small design".
Then, a scenario table in display effects such as variation effects is created by being divided into each of a plurality of display elements. In the present invention, the scenario table includes "background control scenario table", "left symbol control scenario table", "right symbol control scenario table", "middle symbol control scenario table" and "notice 1 character control scenario" The table is divided into eight elements, that is, a scenario table for notice 2 character control, a scenario table for pending display control, and a scenario table for small symbol control.
Further, each display element is constituted by a display layer, and a plurality of display layers are sequentially superimposed from the back side of the screen toward the front side of the screen to create one display screen. In the case of the present invention, the display layer includes "background layer", "left symbol layer", "right symbol layer", "middle symbol layer", "notice A layer" to "notice F layer", "pending layer" There are 12 types of "Small Symbol Layer".

In the effect display editing process (step C13) of the main process (FIG. 32), the effect control apparatus 300 draws a predetermined image in the virtual drawing space of the VRAM 326 in the order of the number of motion management areas by the number of motion management areas That is, processing of pasting a sprite of a predetermined image to the virtual drawing space is performed.
The virtual drawing space is divided into 12 drawing areas of a drawing area for motion management area 0 to a drawing area for motion management area 11 as shown in FIG. Each drawing area is arranged in order of the number of the corresponding motion management area, and a display layer in which a predetermined image is drawn is stored in each drawing area.

Specifically, in the effect display editing process, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 0 is not NULL, the effect control apparatus 300 sets the “background layer” in which the predetermined image is drawn to the virtual drawing space. It is stored in the drawing area for motion management area 0.
Next, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 1 is not NULL, the “notice A layer” in which the predetermined image is drawn is stored in the drawing area for motion management area 1 in the virtual drawing space.
Next, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 2 is not NULL, the “notice B layer” in which the predetermined image is drawn is stored in the drawing area for motion management area 2 in the virtual drawing space.

  Similarly, if the data in the address area of the motion management area 3 is not NULL, the “left symbol layer” is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 3 of the virtual drawing space, and then If the data is not NULL, "right symbol layer" is stored in the drawing area for motion management area 4 of virtual drawing space, and then if the data in the address area of motion management area 5 is not NULL, "middle figure layer" is virtualized Store in the drawing area for motion management area 5 in the drawing space, and then store the "notice C layer" in the drawing area for motion management area 6 in the virtual drawing space if the data in the address area of motion management area 6 is not NULL. Then, if the data in the address area of the motion management area 7 is not NULL, Is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 7 in the virtual drawing space, and then, if the data in the address area of the motion management area 8 is not NULL, the “pending layer” is placed in the drawing area for the motion management area 8 in the virtual drawing space. Store and then store the “notice E layer” in the drawing area for motion management area 9 of virtual drawing space when the data in the address area of motion management area 9 is not NULL, and then If the data is not NULL, the "notice F layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 10 of the virtual drawing space, and then, if the data in the address area of the motion management area 11 is not NULL Store in the drawing area for motion management area 11 in drawing space, and finish the effect display editing process That.

  Here, when the data in the address area of the motion management area X is NULL, the display layer is not stored in the corresponding drawing area, so the drawing area remains blank. Specifically, for example, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 10 is NULL, a display layer is displayed in the drawing area for the motion management area 10 of the virtual drawing space of the VRAM 326 (in the case of the present invention, “) Is not stored, the drawing area for the motion management area 10 is left blank. In addition, it is possible to sequentially store the display layer so that non-blank drawing areas continue (that is, store the display layer while filling it in front), but in that case, one display screen is configured Since the drawing area for storing display layers other than the background layer changes according to the number of display layers to be displayed, the drawing area for storing the display layers is stored each time these display layers are stored in the virtual drawing space (ie, blank It is necessary to search the drawing area on the front (head) side in the drawing area, and the processing becomes complicated. On the other hand, display is configured by storing each display layer in a predetermined drawing area regardless of the effect content (that is, the number of display layers constituting one display screen) as in the present invention. The processing load can be reduced because it is not necessary to search the drawing area for storing the display layer one by one each time the layer is stored in the virtual drawing space.

  The display layers stored in the respective drawing areas are sequentially superimposed from the back side (lower layer side) to the front side (upper layer side) of the screen in the order of arrangement of the drawing areas to create one display screen. More specifically, in the present invention, for example, as shown in FIG. 60, the “background layer” stored in the drawing area for motion management area 1 located at the beginning of the 12 drawing areas is the deepest part of the screen. The “small symbol layer”, which is placed on the side (bottom layer) and stored in the drawing area for motion management area 11 located at the end of the 12 drawing areas, is placed closest to the screen front side (top layer) Be done.

In such effect control, when generating the effect screen (display screen), it is divided into a plurality of display layers (scenario layers) corresponding to the display elements of the effect screen and set in advance as a table, and then each of them is individually By controlling all the scenarios in the form of a display layer, a picture of one screen is generated and displayed on the display device 41.
In the effect display editing process, for example, the effect control device 300 displays the on-hold display (decorative special view start storage display displayed on the on-hold display unit 41b) and the on-hold display (executed) in the "hold layer". The decoration special drawing start storage display displayed on the middle hold display unit 41c is drawn. In addition, on the "small symbol layer", small symbols (identification symbols displayed on the small symbol variation display section 41d) and numbers indicating the number of undigested starting memories (numbers displayed on the number hold display section 41e) And draw.

The background image is an image drawn on the “background layer”. That is, in the example shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), the illustration of the image drawn in each layer other than the "background layer" is omitted.
The middle lightness image Q is not limited to one included in the background image. Specifically, the middle brightness image Q may be, for example, an image (notice image) drawn on any of the “notice A layer” to the “notice F layer”.

The game board 30 having a configuration in which the game ball can flow forward of the display unit of the display device 41 is the game board 30 as shown in FIG. 57, that is, the left overlap area 41L of the display section is the left flow area of the game area 32 The gaming board 30 is not limited to the gaming board 30 which is visible through 32L and is visible through the right falling area 32R of the gaming area 32.
For example, as shown in FIG. 61 (a), the game board 30 having a configuration in which gaming balls can flow down the front of the display unit of the display device 41 is only one of the left end region and the right end region of the display portion of the display device 41. (In this case, only the right end region) may be covered. The said game board 30 should just consist of a transparent material for the part (here right side cover part) which covers the display part of the display apparatus 41 at least. In the case of the game board 30, only one of the left end area and the right end area of the display unit of the display device 41 is an overlapping area overlapping with the game board 30, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), for example The sphere visibility securing color is displayed on at least a part of the overlapping area (here, the right side overlapping area 41R).

In addition, the game board 30 having a configuration in which the game ball can flow forward of the display unit of the display device 41 receives the game ball flowing down the game area 32, for example, to the stage unit 32S as shown in FIG. The gaming board 30 may be provided with a warp flow path forming member for forming a warp flow path 32W for guiding. At least the warp passage forming member of the game board 30 may be made of a transparent material.
The warp flow passage 32W is a cylindrical flow passage having an inside diameter in which the game balls can flow down in a row, is a part of the game area 32, and opens toward the left side game area of the game area 32 It is possible to receive game balls flowing down the game area. The upstream end forms an inlet of the warp flow channel 32W, the downstream end forms an outlet of the warp flow channel 32W, and the warp flow channel 32W displays the gaming balls having flowed in from the upstream end. After being guided forward of the display unit, it is guided to the left end of the stage 32S. In the case of the game board 30, for example, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), a warp overlapping area 41W overlapping the warp channel 32W of the display unit 41 (an area surrounded by a dashed line in FIG. 62 (b)) Is displayed on the screen.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 59 (a), (b), FIG. 61 (b) and FIG. 62 (b), an image imitating lightning is displayed as the middle brightness image Q. The image Q is not limited to the image imitating lightning and can be changed as appropriate.
Further, the lightness of the display color of the middle lightness image Q may not be uniform. Specifically, the middle lightness image Q may be, for example, a gradation image in which the lightness changes stepwise within the allowable range.
Further, the display color (that is, the sphere visibility securing color) of the middle lightness image Q is arbitrary in hue and saturation as long as the lightness falls within the allowable range.
In addition, the display position, size, shape, etc. of the middle brightness image Q may or may not be fixed, but a display device 41 that displays a natural image on the display unit of the display device 41. It is preferable not to be fixed from the viewpoint of increasing the degree of freedom of the image configuration displayed on the display unit.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), separate middle lightness images Q are displayed in the left overlapping area 41L and the right overlapping area 41R, but the present invention is not limited to this. Specifically, for example, in the case where the display unit of the display device 41 has a plurality of overlapping areas overlapping with the game board 30, a plurality of one middle brightness image Q across the plurality of overlapping areas is displayed. The sphere visibility securing color may be displayed on at least a part of each of the overlapping regions.
Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), although two middle brightness images Q are displayed in the left overlap area 41L, when displaying a plurality of middle brightness images Q in one overlap area, It is preferable that the interval between adjacent middle lightness images Q be equal to or less than one game ball. By making the interval between adjacent middle brightness images Q equal to or less than one game ball, the game balls moving (rolling or flowing) from one middle brightness image Q to the other middle brightness image Q are not interrupted It will be possible to continue checking.

In addition, although the sphere visibility securing color is displayed in at least a part of the overlapping area, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, only the image (display screen) displayed on the display device 41 in a predetermined period It may be an image (display screen) in which the ball visibility securing color is displayed at least in part.
Specifically, for example, as in the example shown in FIG. 61, when only a part of the right-side game area (right-side down area 32R) of the game area 32 overlaps with the display unit of the display device 41 at least right An image (display screen) displayed on the display device 41 in the hit game state (a game state in which the right hit is more advantageous than the left hit) is an image in which the ball visibility securing color is displayed in at least a part of the overlapping area. (Display screen) may be used.
Further, for example, as in the example shown in FIG. 62, when only a part (warp channel 32W) of the left gaming area of the gaming area 32 overlaps with the display portion of the display device 41 at least the left strike gaming state An image (display screen) displayed on the display device 41 in a game state in which the left hit is more advantageous than the right hit (display screen), and the ball visibility secured color is displayed in at least a part of the overlapping area It is good if it is).

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present modified example, in the gaming machine provided with the gaming board 30 in which the gaming area 32 where the gaming balls flow down is formed, and the display means (display device 41) having the display unit, A predetermined gaming ball flow-down area (left flow-down area 32L, right flow-down area 32R, warp channel 32W) in the game area 32 is located in front of the display unit, and before and behind the predetermined game flow-down area in the display unit Overlapping overlapping areas (left overlapping area 41L, right overlapping area 41R, warp overlapping area 41W) are visible through the predetermined game ball flow-down area, and at least a part of the overlapping area has a predetermined lightness threshold It was made to display the color (ball visibility securing color) more than (lower threshold).
Therefore, even if a blackout effect (i.e., an effect of displaying an overall dark image on the display device 41) is performed, the gaming ball flowing down the front of the display unit has a predetermined threshold (lower threshold) for lightness. When passing in front of the area where the above color (ball visibility securing color) is displayed, visibility of the display unit does not become the same as it becomes visual recognition, so visibility of the game ball flowing down the front of the display unit Can be secured. Furthermore, by ensuring the visibility of the gaming ball, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being hit (for example, preventing the game ball from being hit or the like because it is hard to see).
The lightness of the sphere visibility securing color may exceed the upper threshold as long as it is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold (lower threshold).

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present modification, in the gaming machine provided with the gaming board 30 in which the gaming area 32 where the gaming balls flow down is formed, and the display means (display device 41) having the display unit, A predetermined gaming ball flow-down area (left flow-down area 32L, right flow-down area 32R, warp channel 32W) in area 32 is located in front of the display unit and overlaps with the predetermined game flow-down area in the display unit The overlapping area (left overlapping area 41L, right overlapping area 41R, warp overlapping area 41W) is visible through the predetermined game ball flow-down area, and at least a part of the overlapping area has a predetermined lightness threshold ( The color (ball visibility securing color) below the upper threshold was displayed.
Therefore, even when white-out effects (i.e., effects for displaying an overall bright image on the display device 41) are performed, the game balls flowing down the front of the display unit have lightness equal to or less than the predetermined threshold (upper threshold). When passing through the front of the area where the color (ball visibility securing color) is displayed, it is not merged with the display on the display unit and becomes visible easily, so the visibility of the game ball flowing down the front of the display unit It can be secured. Furthermore, by ensuring the visibility of the gaming ball, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being hit (for example, preventing the game ball from being hit or the like because it is hard to see).
The lightness of the sphere visibility securing color may be lower than the lower threshold as long as it is equal to or lower than a predetermined threshold (upper threshold).

In addition, a display means is not limited to the display apparatus 41, It can change suitably. Specifically, the display means may be, for example, a display device (such as a sub display device) provided separately from the display device 41, or when light is incident from the end face, predetermined information (such as characters and images) The light guide plate may be a light guide plate on which a light emission pattern composed of fine asperities is formed by laser processing or the like so as to come out.
Also, the middle brightness image Q is, for example, an expectation degree suggestion image G2 shown in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (d), that is, a specific image (for example, a character image "?" Or a character image "!"). good.

<Modification B of the game board>
The modification B of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIGS.
FIG. 63 is a front view schematically showing the game board 30 of the modified example B. As shown in FIG.
In the gaming board 30 of this modification, the above-described embodiment and the point that the out zone unit 800 having the start winning opening 36 (the first starting winning opening, the start winning area) is disposed above the out port 30a. It differs from the game board 30 of the above-mentioned modification.
Further, in the gaming board 30 of the present modification, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is disposed between the normal symbol starting gate 34 and the special fluctuation winning device 38 in the right play area of the play area 32, It differs from the gaming board 30 of the above embodiment and the above modification.

Moreover, in the game board 30 of this modification, the point provided with the main display apparatus 41a and the sub display apparatus 41b as the display apparatus 41 differs from the game board 30 of the said embodiment or the said modification.
The main display device 41a (variable display device) has a configuration in which three seven-segment displays (variable display areas) in which seven light emitters (segments) are arranged in a figure of eight are arranged. Each light emitter can independently change the light emission mode (lighting, extinguishing, blinking, light emission color, etc.), and by controlling the light emission mode, identification information (special symbol) can be displayed for each 7-segment display is there. In addition, it is also possible to display information by combining a plurality of 7-segment displays. In the main display device 41a, a decorative special view fluctuation display game is executed in which a plurality of identification information (special symbols) are variably displayed corresponding to the special view fluctuation display game and then stopped. In addition, it is possible to execute the effect concerning the special figure fluctuation indicatory game due to the change of luminous feature.

The sub display device 41 b is configured of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or a CRT (Brown Tube).
On the display screen of the sub display device 41b, information relating to the game such as a character producing a special view variation display game and a background image for enhancing a rendering effect is displayed. In addition, on the display screen of the sub display device 41b, decoration special view start memory display corresponding to undivided start memory, and images for effects based on the progress of the game (for example, a big hit display image, fanfare display image, ending A display image etc. are displayed.

FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the out-zone unit 800, as viewed from the front side (front view). FIG. 65 is a view for explaining the out-zone unit 800, and is a perspective view seen from the front side.
As shown in FIG. 64 and FIG. 65, the out zone unit 800 is disposed in the middle of the out zone unit 800 and the inflow port 810 and the left and right upper effect flow paths 820 disposed in the upper part of the out zone unit 800. The middle effect passage 830 and the left and right honey 840 members provided, the lower effect passage 850 and the outlet (outlet) 860 disposed at the lower part of the out zone unit 800, and the middle effect passage 830 and the lower. A simulated winning opening 870 and left and right rotary bodies 880 disposed between the effect flow path 850 and the effect flow path 850 are provided.

In the inflow port 810, gaming balls that have not won a prize can flow into any of the plurality of winning areas provided in the gaming area 32. Therefore, in the present variation, gaming balls that do not win a prize area provided in the gaming area 32 flow into the inflow port 810 of the out port 30 a or the out zone unit 800. The position of the out port 30a can be changed as appropriate. For example, the out port 30a may be disposed in the upper part of the right play area, or the general winning opening 35 (for example, like the general winning opening 35 on the right). Alternatively, the out port 30a may be disposed in the vicinity of the general winning port 35) integrated with the special winning port. That is, even when the player does not win a prize area, the gaming ball may flow into the ball discharging unit.
The gaming balls having flowed into the inflow port 810 flow out to the upper effect channel 820 on the left side or the upper effect channel 820 on the right side. Specifically, for example, the gaming ball having flowed into the inflow port 810 passes through a back surface flow passage portion (not shown) disposed on the rear surface side of the out zone unit 800 and is used as a base member of the out zone unit 800. From the provided outlet (not shown), it flows out to the upper effect channel 820 provided on the front side of the out zone unit 800.

The honey member 840 rotates at a constant speed, and guides the gaming ball flowing down the upper effect flow channel 820 to the middle effect flow channel 830 in the first induction state (indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 64 and FIG. It can be converted into the state shown) and the second induction state (state shown by the solid line in FIG. 64 and FIG. 65) guiding to the lower effect channel 850.
The gaming balls guided to the middle effect channel 830 by the honey members 840 flow into the pseudo winning hole 870 or fall into the lower effect channel 850 before flowing into the pseudo winning port 870. The gaming balls dropped from the middle effect channel 830 to the lower effect channel 850 flow into the outlet 860.
The gaming ball guided to the lower effect flow path 850 by the honey member 840 flows into the outlet 860 or is guided to the middle effect flow path 830 by the rotating body 880 rotating before flowing into the outlet 860 Be done.

The gaming balls having flowed into the outlet 860 and the simulated winning opening 870 are discharged to the discharge unit.
The gaming balls having flowed into the inflow port 810 are configured to flow into and out of the outflow port 860 or the simulated winning opening 870. That is, the gaming balls having flowed into the inflow port 810 can not return to the outside (the gaming area 32) of the out zone unit 800.

The rotating body 880 is a disk-shaped member, and is disposed in a state in which the thickness direction substantially matches the left-right direction. The rotating body 880 rotates in a constant direction (clockwise direction as viewed from the right side in the case of this modification) at a constant speed around a rotation axis (not shown) penetrating the center of the rotating body 880.
The rotating body 880 incorporates a plurality of magnets. The magnet is for attracting (holding in contact with) the game ball in contact with the magnet arrangement place (the place where the magnet is arranged) on the outer peripheral surface of the rotary body 880. When the gaming ball comes in contact with the magnet arrangement point of the rotary body 880, the gaming ball is attracted to the magnet arrangement point and is lifted from the lower side by the rotary body 880 rotating upward from the lower side. The lower effect channel 850 located in the middle stage is guided to the middle effect channel 830 located above the rotating body 880.

Of the outer peripheral surfaces of the rotating body 880, from the viewpoint of making it easy to adsorb the game ball to the magnet arranging portion of the rotating body 880 and suppressing the wobble of the gaming ball adsorbed to the magnet arranging portion of the rotating body 880 A concave portion recessed inward may be formed at a position corresponding to the magnet arrangement position of. Also, a ball receiving member such as a dish for lifting the gaming ball may be provided on the rotating body 880 instead of the magnet. Also, instead of the rotating body 880, a lifting member operating like an elevator may be provided. That is, the out zone unit 800 may be provided with a member for displacing the gaming ball.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 66, an entry preventing wall 890 (or a plurality of nails) that prevents the game ball from entering the out zone unit 800 from the side of the splash member 840 at a position outside the splash member 840. Or a protruding obstacle member or the like formed of resin may be disposed.

The game ball having flowed into the simulated winning opening 870 is detected by a simulated winning opening switch (not shown). A detection signal of the simulated winning opening switch is output to the effect control device 300, and when the simulated winning opening switch detects a game ball, the effect control device 300 is configured to execute a predetermined effect.
In this modification, the simulated winning opening 870 is an assist starting opening, and when the gaming ball flows into the simulated winning opening 870, the assist symbol effect is executed. Here, the "assist symbol design effect" refers to a plurality of assist symbols (identification information) variably displayed on the sub display device 41b and then stopped to display the assist symbols (hereinafter referred to as "assist stopped symbol") that are displayed stopped, It is an effect to be involved in the decoration special figure variation display game on the main display device 41a.

67-73 is a figure explaining the assist symbol presentation of this modification. The assist symbol effect of the present modification includes the assist symbol variation effect and the assist symbol replacement effect, and is executed by the display device 41 (the main display device 41a and the sub display device 41b).
First, when the special figure variation display game (hereinafter referred to as the “pseudo prize special figure game”) being executed when the gaming ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870 is a special figure variation display game with reach effect. The assist symbol effect to be executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68.
When the simulated winning special figure game involves the reach effect, the assist symbol fluctuation effect and the assist symbol replacement effect are executed during the simulated winning special figure game.

  Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 67 (a), in the main display 41a, the first symbol (first special symbol), the second symbol (second special symbol), and the third symbol (third special symbol) When the game ball wins the simulated winning opening 870 while the variable display of) is being executed, the assist symbol fluctuation effect among the assist symbol effects is executed. In the assist symbol change effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), in each of the two assist symbol change display areas on the left and right of the sub display device 41b, the variable display of assist symbols composed of numbers etc. is started Later, for example, as shown in FIG. 67 (c), the variable display of the assist symbol is stopped, and the assist stop symbol is displayed. In FIG. 67 to FIG. 73, the circle displayed at the upper right of the sub display device 41b is a decorative special view start storage display (waiting display during standby) corresponding to undivided start storage.

  In this case, the same reach symbol as the reach symbol derived in the simulated special winning game is displayed as the assist stop symbol. The reach symbol derived in the pseudo winning special figure game is, for example, the stop symbol of the pseudo winning special figure game determined at the start of the pseudo winning special figure game (step of the variation effect setting process (FIG. 77) (See C522). Specifically, for example, when the stop symbol of the special figure game at the time of pseudo winning is determined to be "757", for example, as shown in FIG. 67 (c), "77" is displayed as the assist stop symbol. Ru.

After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), the variable display of two of the first to third symbols (the first symbol and the second symbol in this example) stops, and the remaining one (this example) Then, when only the third symbol is in a state of fluctuating display, the assist symbol substitution effect among the assist symbol effects is executed. In the assist symbol substitution effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), the assist stop symbol is displayed enlarged, and then, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (c), the stop displayed among the first to third symbols is displayed. Two (in this example, the first symbol and the second symbol) are replaced with the assist stop symbol. In the example shown in FIG. 68, "76" is replaced with "77". Then, when the assist stop symbol shifts from the sub display device 41b to the main display device 41a, the assist symbol effect is finished, and the reach effect is started.
Thus, in the assist symbol production of this modification, when the assist stop symbol is aligned in the assist symbol variation production, as if the assist stop symbol assists in the reach generation in the subsequent assist symbol substitution production I can show it.

Next, in the case where the simulated winning special figure game is not a special figure variation display game with reach effect, the special figure variation corresponding to the undigested special figure starting memory when the gaming ball flows into the simulated winning opening 870 The assist symbol effect executed when the special game variation display game with reach effect is included in the display game will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71.
In the case where the simulated prize special figure game does not involve reach effect, and the unaccomplished special figure variation display game includes a game with reach effect, the assist symbol during the simulated prize special game game The fluctuation effect is executed, and the assist symbol substitution effect is executed during the special figure fluctuation display game (the special figure fluctuation display game with reach effect) which is performed after the pseudo winning special figure game. That is, one assist symbol effect is executed over a plurality of special figure fluctuation display games.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a), when the game ball wins the simulated winning opening 870 while the first to third symbols are being displayed on the main display device 41a, Of the assist symbol effects, assist symbol variation effects are executed. In the assist symbol variation effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), the variable symbol display of the assist symbol is started, and after a predetermined time, for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (c), the assist stop symbol is displayed.
In this case, a non-probable reach symbol among the reach symbols in which two symbols are aligned is displayed as the assist stop symbol. Specifically, for example, odd symbols (“1”, “3”, “5”, “7”) of the identification symbols are probable symbols, and even symbols (“2”, “7”) of the identification symbols When 4 ′ ′, “6”, “8”) are non-probable variation symbols, “22”, “44”, “66” or “88” are set as the assist stop symbols.

  The reach symbol derived in the special figure variation display game (special figure variation display game with reach effect) to be played after the special prize game at the time of pseudo winning is, for example, determined at the start of the special figure variation display game It can be specified based on the stop symbol (see step C522 of the variation effect setting process (FIG. 77)) of the special view variation display game. Since the stop symbol of the special figure variation display game to be played later than the artificial figure special figure game is not determined during the artificial figure special figure game, the artificial figure during the artificial figure special figure game is In the special figure variation display game (special figure variation display game with reach effect) to be performed later than the time special figure game, whether reach symbol of definite variation is derived (become reach with definite variation symbol) or non-constant variation reach symbol It is unknown whether is derived (it becomes reach by non-probability change pattern). So, in this modification, in order not to reduce the interest of the game, in this case, the non-probable reach symbol is displayed as the assist stop symbol.

  After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 70 (a), the simulated special winning game special game ends, and for example, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), the special view variation display game with reach effect starts. As shown in (c), the variable display of two of the first to third symbols (the first symbol and the second symbol in this example) is stopped, and the remaining one (the third symbol in this example) In the state where only the variable display is displayed, the assist symbol replacement effect among the assist symbol effects is executed. In the assist symbol substitution effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), the assist stop symbol is displayed enlarged, and then, for example, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), the stop displayed among the first to third symbols is displayed. Two are replaced with the assist stop symbol. In the example shown in FIG. 71, "76" is replaced with "44". Then, when the assist stop symbol shifts from the sub display device 41b to the main display device 41a, the assist symbol effect is finished, and the reach effect is started.

Therefore, for example, when the assist stop symbol and the reach symbol derived in the special view change display game (special view change display game with reach effect) performed later than the pseudo winning special view game are different, for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in 71 (c), the assist stop symbol displayed on the main display device 41a is replaced with the reach symbol derived in the special view variation display game. In the example shown in FIG. 71, “44” is replaced with “77”.
Thus, in the assist symbol effect of this modification, the simulated special winning game special figure game does not involve reach effect, and a game with reach effect is included in the undivided special figure fluctuation display game. In this case, it is possible to make the assist stop symbol, even in the same state, remain until the special figure variation display game which is performed after the pseudo winning special figure game. As a result, since a sense of expectation for reach generation can be continued over a plurality of special view variable display games, it is possible to improve the operation rate of the gaming machine.

Next, in the case where the simulated winning special figure game is not a special figure variation display game with reach effect, the special figure variation corresponding to the undigested special figure starting memory when the gaming ball flows into the simulated winning opening 870 The assist symbol effect executed when the special game with a reach effect is not included in the display game will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73.
In the case where the simulated winning special figure game does not involve reach effect, and the unaccomplished special view variation display game does not include the game with reach effect, the assist during the simulated winning special figure game is performed. Only the symbol variation effect is executed, and the assist symbol effect ends as it is. That is, in this case, the assist symbol replacement effect is not performed.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 72 (a), when the game ball wins the simulated winning opening 870 while the variable display of the first to third symbols is being executed on the main display device 41a, Of the assist symbol effects, assist symbol variation effects are executed. In the assist symbol fluctuation effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), variable display of the assist symbol is started, and after a predetermined time, for example, as shown in FIG. 72 (c), the assist stop symbol is displayed. In this case, a non-reach symbol in which two symbols are not aligned is displayed as the assist stop symbol.
After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 73 (a), when the simulated special prize game is over, the assist symbol effect is ended, and the assist stop symbol disappears as shown in FIG. 73 (b), for example. Therefore, if the game ball is again awarded to the simulated winning opening 870 during the special figure variation display game performed later than the simulated winning special figure game, as shown in FIG. 73C, for example, a new assist is performed. The symbol effect is started.

  Thus, in the assist symbol variation production of this modification, a "reach with aspect" in which a reach symbol in which two symbols are aligned is displayed as an assist stop symbol and a non-reach symbol in which two symbols are not aligned as an assist stop symbol There are two presentation modes of "the no reach mode" in which is displayed. Then, the presence or absence of the reach effect can be notified (suggested) by the effect mode of the assist symbol variation effect.

[Main processing]
In order to execute the assist symbol effect, the effect control device 300 of this modification executes the main processing shown in FIG. 74 instead of the main processing shown in FIG.
In the main processing of the present modification, assist symbol control processing (step C31) is executed between the hall / player setting mode processing (step C10) and the random number update processing (step C11).

[Assist symbol control processing]
FIG. 75 shows assist symbol control processing (step C31) in the main processing described above. In this assist symbol control process, first, it is determined whether or not the simulated winning opening switch has detected a game ball (step C401).
If it is determined in step C401 that the simulated winning opening switch has not detected the gaming ball (step C401; N), that is, if the gaming ball has not flowed into the simulated winning opening 870, the assist symbol control processing is ended. Do.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C401 that the simulated winning opening switch has detected the gaming ball (step C401; Y), that is, if the gaming ball flows into the simulated winning opening 870, the replacement effect standby flag is set. It is determined whether there is any (step C402).

If it is determined in step C402 that the substitution effect standby flag is set (step C402; Y), that is, in the state where the assist stop symbols are aligned, the special figure variation display game to be performed after the simulated special figure game If it remains, the assist symbol control process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step C402 that the replacement effect standby flag is not set (step C402; N), it is determined whether the P machine state is in the special figure fluctuation (step C403).
If it is determined in step C403 that the special figure is not changing (step C403; N), the assist symbol control process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step C403 that the special figure is changing (step C403; Y), it is determined whether the assist symbol variation effect of the assist symbol effects can be executed (step C404). Specifically, for example, when it is in the midst of the first half fluctuation in the pseudo winning special figure game and the remaining time of the first half fluctuation is equal to or more than the predetermined first threshold, the assist symbol fluctuation effect can be performed Determine that there is. Here, the predetermined first threshold value can be set as appropriate, but in this modification, the execution time of the assist symbol variation effect can be secured (in the present variation, the assist symbol variation effect is at the time of pseudo winning) Start in the middle of the first half fluctuation in the special figure game and end in the middle of the said first half fluctuation), [2] secure processing time for replacing part of the effect of the special figure game at the time of pseudo winning with assist symbol effect A value that satisfies both of the two conditions of being able to be set is set.
The information of the first half fluctuation is included in the MODE, and the effect control device 300 can set the content of the first half fluctuation, the time of the first half fluctuation, and the like based on this MODE.
Further, information on the latter half fluctuation such as the presence or absence of the reach and the type of reach is included in the ACT, and the effect control device 300 can set the content and the like of the latter half fluctuation based on the ACT.

If it is determined in step C404 that the assist symbol variation effect can not be executed (step C404; N), the assist symbol control process is ended.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C404 that the assist symbol variation effect can be executed (step C404; Y), the in-digestion variation (special figure variation display game under execution, here a simulated special prize game) It is determined whether or not the game is a special view variable display game with reach effect (step C405).

If it is determined in step C405 that the in-digestion fluctuation is a special-figure fluctuation display game with reach effect (step C405; Y), the content of the assist symbol fluctuation effect (reach mode) is determined (step C406) . As a result, the execution time of the assist symbol variation effect, the assist stop symbol, etc. are determined.
Next, based on the contents determined in step C406, display setting of the assist symbol variation effect is performed (step C407). Thereby, the variable display of the assist symbol is started, and the assist symbol change effect (see FIGS. 67 (b) and (c)) in which the assist stop symbol is displayed after a predetermined time can be executed.

  Next, the content of the assist symbol substitution effect is determined with reference to the content of the assist symbol variation effect determined in step C406, the content of the effect in the digestive variation currently displayed and set, and the like (step C408). From this, the execution time of the assist symbol substitution effect, the replacement timing of the assist stop symbol, and the like are determined. Here, the contents of the effect in the digestive variation currently displayed and set are, for example, the contents of the fluctuation effect displayed and set in step C523 of the fluctuation effect setting process (see FIG. 77) related to the digestive variation, and step C524. The contents of the notice effect set to be displayed on the screen, the contents of the decoration special figure fluctuation effect (decoration pattern changing display game) displayed on the step S 527, and the like.

  Next, based on the contents determined in step C408, display setting of assist symbol replacement effect is performed (step C409). Thereby, at least a part of the effects of the in-digestion fluctuation (special figure game at the time of pseudo winning) is replaced with the assist symbol substitution effect, and the non-reach symbols are stopped and displayed on the main display device 41a during the in-digestion fluctuation, The assist stop symbol is enlarged and displayed, and the assist symbol replacement effect (see FIGS. 68A to 68C) in which the non-reach symbol of the main display device 41a is replaced with the assist stop symbol can be executed.

  If it is determined in step C405 that the in-digestion variation is not a special-figure variation display game with reach effect (step C405; N), the undigested variation (special figure variation corresponding to undigested special-figure start memory) It is determined whether the display game, which is a special view change display game performed here after the pseudo winning special view game, includes a special view change display game with reach effect (step C410). Whether or not the special figure variation display game with the reach effect is included in the undigested variation can be determined, for example, based on the pre-read result from the game control device 100. Here, the pre-reading result is the judgment result of the result related information (whether or not the big hit or the kind of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the starting memory, and it precedes the start timing of the special view fluctuation display game based on the corresponding starting memory. Is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300.

  If it is determined in step C410 that the special figure variation display game with reach effect is not included in the undigested variation (step C410; N), the content of the assist symbol variation presentation (reach no mode) is determined. Then, based on the determined content, display setting of the assist symbol variation effect is performed (step C412). Thereby, the variable symbol display of the assist symbol is started, and the assist symbol fluctuation effect (see FIGS. 72 (b) and (c)) in which the assist stop symbol is displayed after a predetermined time can be executed, and the assist symbol substitution effect is executed. Without doing so, the assist symbol effect ends (see FIGS. 73 (a) and (b)).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step C410 that the special figure variation display game with reach effect is included in the undigested variation (step C410; Y), the presentation mode of the assist symbol variation presentation is a reach mode In order to determine whether or not to be selected, a reachable form lottery process (step C413) is performed to determine whether or not the lottery has been won (step C414).
If it is determined in step C414 that a win has not been made (step C414; N), that is, if it is determined to set the stage of the assist symbol variation effect to the no reach mode, the process proceeds to step C411. As described above, in the present modification, even when the special figure variation display game with the reach effect is included in the undigested variation, the simulated prize is not won if the reach with aspect lottery is not won. Only the assist symbol variation effect is executed during the time special view game, and the assist symbol effect ends as it is. That is, when the assist symbol change effect in the reach mode is executed, the assist symbol replacement effect is executed thereafter, whereas when the assist symbol change effect in the no reach mode is executed, the assist symbol change effect is executed thereafter. Assist symbol substitution effect is not executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step C414 that the player has won (step C414; Y), that is, if it is determined that the production mode of the assist symbol fluctuation effect is the reach mode, the assist symbol fluctuation production (reach mode) The content is determined (step C415), and based on the determined content, display setting of the assist symbol variation effect is performed (step C416). Thereby, the variable display of the assist symbol is started, and the assist symbol change effect (see FIGS. 69 (b) and (c)) in which the assist stop symbol is displayed after a predetermined time can be executed.
Next, a substitution effect waiting flag is set (step C417), and the assist symbol control process is ended. As a result, in the special view variation display game (special view variation display game with reach effect) which is played later than the pseudo prize special view game, the non-reach symbol is stopped and displayed on the main display device 41a, and the assist stop symbol is displayed. The display is enlarged and the non-reach symbol of the main display device 41a is replaced by the assist stop symbol, and the assist stop symbol displayed on the main display device 41a is replaced if necessary (replaced by the actual reach symbol) The symbol substitution effect (see FIG. 70 (c) and FIGS. 71 (a) to (c)) can be executed.

[Variable system command processing]
The reception command check process in the main process (see FIG. 74) of this modification is the same as the reception command check process (see FIG. 33) of the above embodiment. Further, the received command analysis process in the received command check process of this modification is the same as the received command analysis process (see FIG. 34) of the above embodiment.

FIG. 76 shows variable system command processing (step C236) in the received command analysis processing. In this variable system command processing, first, it is determined whether the special drawing type is undetermined (step C501). The special drawing type is information indicating whether the special drawing type is special drawing 1 or special drawing 2, and is information set in the above-described symbol system command processing.
If the special drawing type is undetermined (step C501; Y), the variable system command processing is ended. If the special figure type is not yet determined (step C501; N), that is, if the special figure type is set, the combination of the variation command and the symbol command is checked (step C502), and the variation command and the symbol type It is determined whether there is an inconsistency (step C503).

  If the variation command and the symbol type do not match (step C503; Y), the variation system command processing ends. If the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C503; N), the variation pattern type is determined from the variation command (step C504). A symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol types include, for example, off symbol, 16R positive variation A big hit symbol, 16R positive variation B big hit symbol, 16R normal A big hit symbol, 16R normal B big hit symbol, 8R positive variation big hit symbol etc. is there. If the variation command and the symbol type do not match, perform the rendering as if you received the symbol command of the 16R definite variation A big hit symbol even though the variation command (variation pattern command) of loss was received It means that it is the combination (combination of the change command and the symbol type) which contradicts above.

  In the process of determining the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C504), the variation pattern type which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special view is determined according to the received command. And the fluctuation production setting processing which sets the information in order to produce the production which responds to the fluctuation command is done (step C505).

  Next, the special figure fluctuation is set as the P machine state (the state of the pachinko machine) (step C506). Here, “during special figure fluctuation” indicates that the special figure is fluctuating (during a customer demonstration or during a big hit, or not being a fanfare medium grade). Further, if the pre-reading effect frequency (pre-reading execution frequency) is not zero, the pre-reading effect frequency is updated by 1 (processing to reduce the pre-reading effect frequency by 1) (step C507), and the variation system command processing is ended.

[Change production setting process]
FIG. 77 shows the fluctuation effect setting process (step C505) in the above-mentioned fluctuation system command process. In this variation production setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern type is a no-reach variation (step C511). If the change pattern type is no reach change (step C511; Y), the model code, the special view type, and the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the effect mode are set (step C512). In addition, since it is a reach no change, symbol classification is always a lost pattern, and it is not necessary to refer to symbol classification here especially.
Here, the effect mode corresponds to a game mode managed by the effect control device 300, and naturally varies depending on the model, but in this modification, there are a normal mode, a probability change mode, a time saving mode, and the like. Furthermore, in each mode, a plurality of modes are provided in which the distribution rate of the notice effect and the effect mode of the decoration special view variable display game in the display device 41 (main display device 41a) are made different.

  Next, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the number of holdings of MODE, special view type is acquired with reference to the first half notice distribution group address table (step C513). Thereby, in the case of no reach fluctuation, it becomes possible to change the lottery contents (specifically, the appearance rate of each notice effect mode) of the notice effect appearing during each change according to the number of reservations. After that, the first half of the previous day sorting group table is used to draw a lottery for the first half appearing in the first half (step C516).

On the other hand, if the change pattern type is not reach-less change (step C511; N), the model code, the special view type, the effect mode, and the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type are set (step C514).
Then, referring to the first half advance distribution group address table, the address of the first half advance distribution group table corresponding to MODE, fluctuation pattern type is acquired (step C515), and the first half change is in progress using the first half advance distribution group table The lottery for the advance notice to appear is made (step C516).

  Next, a lottery is made for the second half of the change. In addition, with the second half fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game, it fluctuates in the special result aspect (combination of special design) where the display area excluding the specified area becomes big hit among the so-called reach action (for example The display is stopped, and it is a fluctuation display of the state which is fluctuating display only in a specific field. On the other hand, the first half fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is the fluctuation display before the start of the reach action.

First, the second half of the previous day distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special view type, the effect mode, and the symbol type is set (step C517). The second half prior distribution group address table is a table for selecting the address of the second half previous distribution group table.
Then, the address of the second half of the previous day sorting group table corresponding to the ACT is acquired with reference to the second half of day prior sorting distribution group address table (step C518), and the second half is fluctuating (reaching) using the second half day of sorting distribution group table A lottery for appearing notices is made (step C519).

Next, the contents of the effect corresponding to the result of the notice lottery performed in step C516 and step C519 are determined (step C520), and the contents of the fluctuation effect corresponding to MODE and ACT are determined (step C521). As a result, the presentation and notice such as the fluctuation time and main reach contents of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game are determined.
Next, the stop symbol setting process is performed to determine the stop symbol that constitutes the result aspect of the decorative special view variable display game with reference to the determined change pattern (such as reach effect) of the special view variable display game and the advance notice content ( Step C522).

Next, based on the contents of the change effect determined in step C521, display setting of the change effect is performed (step C523), and based on the contents of the effect determined in step C520, display setting of the notice effect is performed (step C524) . By these processes, it is possible to execute an effect or a notice in the decoration special figure variation display game set as described above.
Next, display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special drawing type is performed (step C525). In this process, a setting is made to decrease the decorative special drawing start memory display in response to the reduction of the starting memory accompanying the start of the special drawing variation display game.

Next, a voice number indicating the type of BGM output from the speakers 19a and 19b, and a decoration number indicating the type of effect by a decoration lamp or the like are set (step C526). Display setting is performed (step C527).
Subsequently, the variation displayed by the fourth symbol in the information display device 48 separately from the decoration special figure variation display game (the variation display game displayed by the first to third symbols in the display device 41 (main display device 41a)) In order to execute the display game, display setting of the fourth symbol variation corresponding to the special drawing type is performed (step C528).
Next, the effect replacement process (step C529) is performed, and the variation effect setting process is ended.

[Replacement processing]
FIG. 78 shows the effect replacement process (step C529) in the above-mentioned change effect setting process. In this effect replacement process, first, it is determined whether a replacement effect standby flag is set (step C531).
If it is determined in step C531 that the replacement effect standby flag is not set (step C531; N), the effect replacement process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step C531 that the substitution effect standby flag is set (step C531; Y), that is, with the assist stop symbol aligned, the special figure fluctuation to be performed later than the pseudo winning special figure game. If the game remains until the display game, it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern type is a fluctuation with reach (step C532).
If it is determined in step C532 that the change is not a reachable change (step C532; N), the effect replacement process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step C532 that the change is with reach (step C532; Y), the assist stop symbol currently displayed on the sub display device 41b or the latest step C523 or C524 or C527 is displayed. The content of the assist symbol replacement effect is determined with reference to the content of the set effect and the like (step C533), and the display setting of the assist symbol replacement effect is performed based on the determined content (step C534). As a result, at least a part of the effects set to be displayed and set in the most recent steps C523, C524, C527, etc. are replaced with the assist symbol substitution effect, so the special view variation display game (following the special prize game at the time of pseudo winning) In the special view variation display game with reach effect), the non-reach symbol is stopped and displayed on the main display device 41a, the assist stop symbol is enlarged and displayed, and the non-reach symbol of the main display device 41a is replaced with the assist stop symbol. If necessary, the assist stop symbol displayed on the main display device 41a is replaced (replaced with the actual reach symbol). Assist symbol replacement effect (see FIGS. 70 (c) and 71 (a) to 71 (c)) ) Becomes feasible.
Next, the substitution effect waiting flag is cleared (step C535), and the effect substitution process is ended.

In this modification, when it is a special figure change display game with a pseudo effect at the time of a simulated winning special figure game, although it was constituted to perform the assist symbol change effect of a reach with aspect, it is limited to this is not. For example, even in the case of a special prize game at the time of pseudo winning a special figure variation display game with reach effect, performing reach presence mode lottery processing, when winning in reach presence mode lottery, assist symbol variation of reach presence aspect It is also possible to configure to perform the assist symbol variation presentation of the no reach aspect when the effect is executed and the reach with aspect lottery is not won.
Further, the special prize game at the time of pseudo winning is a special figure variation display game with reach effect, and the special figure variation display game corresponding to the unfinished special figure start memory when the gaming ball flows into the pseudo prize hole 870 If a special figure variation display game with reach effect is included in the game, the assist symbol substitution effect may be executed during the pseudo figure special game during the special prize game, or after the special figure game during the dummy prize game. The assist symbol substitution effect may be executed during the special figure change display game (special view change display game with reach effect) to be performed.

  Further, in the present modification, even when the game ball flows into the simulated winning opening 870, the predetermined condition is satisfied (in the case of the present modification [1] replacement effect standby flag is not set, [2] The assist symbol effect corresponding to the inflow is executed only when all three conditions are satisfied: [P] machine state is special figure fluctuation, [3] assist symbol fluctuation effect can be executed. Although it comprised, it is not limited to this. For example, when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning hole 870 in a state in which the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the execution of the assist symbol effect corresponding to the inflow is suspended, and the predetermined condition is satisfied. After that, it is also possible to configure to execute the assist symbol effect corresponding to the inflow. Further, when the execution of the assist symbol effect is suspended, the number of suspension (the number of assist suspension) may be displayed on the sub display device 41b so as to be distinguishable from the decoration special view start storage display.

In addition, the assist symbol effect is not limited to the effect of notifying (suggesting) the presence / absence of reach effect by the assist stop symbol, and effects other than the reach effect (SP reach development effect, round promotion effect, simulated continuum fluctuation It may be an effect of informing (suggesting) the presence or absence of the occurrence of the effect or the like by the assist stop symbol.
In addition, the assist symbol effect is not limited to the effect of notifying the presence or absence of occurrence of a predetermined effect by the assist stop symbol, and can be appropriately changed. The assist symbol effect may be, for example, an effect of causing the assist stop symbol to be reflected in a predetermined advance effect performed outside the assist symbol variation display area of the sub display device 41b.

Further, in this modification, the assist symbol effect is executed when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning hole 870, but the effect executed when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning hole 870 is limited to the assist symbol effect Can be changed as appropriate. For example, when game balls flow into the simulated winning opening 870, it is also possible to execute an effect of operating a predetermined movable body (for example, the honey member 840 and / or the rotating body 880).
In addition, a predetermined condition is satisfied (in the case of this modification [1] replacement effect waiting flag is not set, [2] P machine state is in special figure fluctuation, [3] assist symbol fluctuation effect When the game ball flows into the simulated winning opening 870 under the condition that all three conditions are satisfied, the assist symbol effect corresponding to the flow is executed, and the predetermined condition is not satisfied. When a game ball flows into the simulated winning opening 870 in a state, instead of the assist symbol effect corresponding to the inflow, an effect other than the assist symbol effect (for example, an effect of operating a predetermined movable body) is performed It is also possible to configure.

  It is also possible to configure the gaming ball to flow into the simulated winning opening 870 only when the predetermined condition is established. Specifically, for example, a ball storage device that can be converted to a first state for storing game balls and a second state for not storing game balls is disposed at an appropriate location in out zone unit 800. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the ball storage device is converted from the first state to the second state, and the game balls stored in the ball storage device are made to flow into the simulated winning opening 870. It is possible.

  Further, in this modification, after the assist stop symbol is transferred from the sub display device 41b to the main display device 41a (see FIG. 68 (c) and FIGS. 71 (b) and (c)) or before the start of assist symbol effect Although the assist symbol variation display area of the sub display device 41b is blank (blank) after completion (see FIG. 67 (a) and FIG. 73 (b)), it is not limited thereto. For example, in the assist symbol fluctuation display area after the assist stop symbol shifts to the main display device 41a or when the assist symbol effect is not executed, a display mode (for example, the latest assist stop symbol differs from the normal display mode (for example, , Or may be displayed in a lighter color than normal, or a default assist symbol (for example, "00" or "--" or an assist symbol at power on) may be displayed, or A character image such as "pig" or "cow" may be displayed.

Further, when a model designation command is received, display (a symbol, an image, etc.) corresponding to the model designation command may be performed on the assist symbol variation display area of the sub display device 41b. Although the display corresponding to the model specification command may be displayed on the main display device 41a, the display corresponding to the model specification command is displayed on the sub display device 41b since the decoration special view variation display game is displayed on the main display device 41a. It is preferable to display.
In addition, when the assist stop design becomes a predetermined combination (for example, "Tiger and Tiger", "Pig cattle", "Seven Tiger", "11", "Red", "Reserved", etc.), notification of the degree of expectation Or, execution / indication of the pending change advance notice, execution / indication of the pseudo continuous variation presentation, a mini game (informing the reach occurrence / the pending change / the pseudo continuous occurrence depending on the result of the mini game) may be executed. That is, the assist stop symbol may not be operated directly on the decoration special view fluctuation display game of the main display device 41a, but may be operated indirectly via an effect associated with the special view fluctuation display game. In addition, the variable display of the assist symbol may be related to a common game or may be a common game itself.

Further, in this modification, the variable display of the assist symbol is stopped (the assist stop symbol is displayed) during the variable display of the first to third symbols, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, as shown in FIG. As such, after the non-reach symbol is stopped and displayed on the main display device 41a (when the two variable displays of the first to third symbols are stopped and only the remaining one is in the state of variable display) It is also possible to constitute so as to stop the variable display of the assist symbol (display the assist stop symbol).
Moreover, in this modification, although it was acting with respect to the decoration special figure change display game by an assist stop symbol becoming a predetermined | prescribed combination, the opposite may be sufficient. Specifically, for example, reach is generated in the decoration special figure variation display game in the main display device 41a, and the reach symbol is transferred to the sub display device 41b and is rendered within the assist symbol variation display area of the sub display device 41b. May be In this case, an effect using all three 7-segment displays of the main display device 41a can be performed. That is, the assist symbol of the sub display device 41b and the decorative symbol of the main display device 41a interact with each other, and a part of the result of the decorative special view variation display game (for example, reach symbol) is the main display device 41a (first display area) ) And the sub display device 41b (second display area).
In addition, the assist symbol effect may be executed not by the sub display device 41b but by, for example, a light emitting device (LED or the like) or by both the sub display device 41b and the light emitting device (dot LED) .

  As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present modification, the winning region (general winning opening 35, starting winning opening 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37, first special fluctuation winning device 38, second special fluctuation winning device 39) In the gaming machine provided with an out area (out zone unit 800) to which a game ball not winning in the winning area can flow, a specific game (this game is executed using the game ball flowing into the out area in the out area. In the case of the modified example, the specific game mechanism which plays the game whether or not the game ball flows into the pseudo winning hole 870, and the predetermined effect (the present modified example) when it is determined that the result of the specific game is a predetermined result. In the case, an assist control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing assist symbol effect) is provided.

Therefore, the interest of the game can be enhanced while maintaining the fairness and the fairness of the game.
Specifically, since the specific game (game ball effect) can be performed in the out area (out zone unit 800), the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, the specific game (game ball effect) is an effect using the game ball that has flowed into the out area (out zone unit 800), and is not an effect using a game ball that may be won in the winning area, The fairness and fairness of the game can be maintained.
The specific game is not a game performed in the out area, that is, a game using game balls flowing into the out area, but a winning area (general winning opening 35, starting winning opening 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37, first special) It may be a game performed in the fluctuation winning device 38, the second special fluctuation winning device 39, etc.), that is, a game using a game ball flowing into the winning area. An example in the case where the specific game is a game played in the pay area, that is, a game using a game ball flowing into the pay area, will be described in Modification C described later.

Further, in this modification, the entrance (inflow port 810) to the out area (out zone unit 800) is the winning area (the case of the present modification, the start winning opening 36) which is the most downstream among the plurality of winning areas. It is possible to arrange the game ball so that the reception width of the gaming ball is larger than that of the corresponding winning area.
By configuring in this manner, it is possible to play a specific game using a game ball for which the chance of winning has disappeared. A game ball that does not win in the winning area has no chance of winning and gives a player a useless image or a losing image to the player, but by playing a specific game using the game ball where the chance of winning is lost, It is possible to make it difficult to give such a bad image to the player.

  Further, in this modification, the specific game mechanism includes a pseudo winning hole 870, and movable members (in the case of this modification, the honey member 840 and the rotating body 880) for guiding the gaming ball to the pseudo winning hole 870. , The movable member (in the case of this modification, the rotating body 880) is provided with a magnet for game ball adsorption, can be lifted by rotating the game ball adsorbed to the magnet, effect control means (effect control The device 300) can be configured to be able to determine that the result of the specific game is a predetermined result when the game ball flows into the simulated winning opening 870.

By configuring in this manner, the gaming ball can be kept in the out area (out zone unit 800) for a long time, so that the interest of the specific game (playing ball effect) can be enhanced.
Also, the specific game is an effect using a game ball that has flowed into the out area (out zone unit 800), and is not an effect using a game ball that has a possibility of winning in the winning area. An effect which can not be performed using a game ball which may be won in the area, for example, an effect of lifting the game ball against gravity by a movable member (rotary body 880) as in this modification Is possible.
The movable member is not limited to the splash member 840 or the rotating body 880, and can be changed as appropriate. The movable member may be, for example, a ball storage device that can be converted to a first state for storing game balls and a second state for not storing game balls, and in addition, a V movable member (two types of pachinko machines) A movable member capable of guiding the gaming ball to a specific area may be diverted.

  Further, in this modification, the effect control means (effect control device 300) fluctuates and displays a plurality of identification information in the first display area (in the case of this modification, the main display device 41a) based on the satisfaction of the start condition. Variable display game (decorative special view variable display game) can be executed, and as a predetermined effect, a plurality of second display areas (in the case of this modification, the sub display devices 41b) are different from the first display area. It is possible to configure so as to be able to execute an effect (assist symbol effect) in which the identification information is variably displayed.

By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make it appear as if the variable display game has been executed by the gaming balls having flowed into the out area (out zone unit 800). You can give the image you are doing, and the playability is improved.
In the case of this modification, the first display area is provided in the main display device 41a, and the second display area is provided in the sub display device 41b, that is, the first display area and the second display area are separate display devices. Although provided, without being limited to this, the first display area and the second display area may be provided in the same display device.

Further, in this modification, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is stopped and displayed in a state in which a part of the identification information is aligned in the first display area (in the case of this modification, the main display device 41a). In the case of a reach state in which the remaining identification information is variably displayed, a predetermined effect (in the case of this modification) is generated in the second display area (in the case of this modification, the sub display device 41b) before the reach state occurs. , As a result of the assist symbol effect) stop display in the state where the identification information is aligned (see FIG. 68 (a etc.)), and some identification information in the first display area The reach state can be generated by replacing the information) with the identification information (assist stop pattern) stopped and displayed in a state of being aligned with the second display area (FIG. 68 (c), etc. reference).
By configuring in this manner, the identification information (assist stop pattern) stop displayed in the second display area (in the case of the present modification, the sub display device 41b) may appear as if the reach occurrence was assisted. Yes, the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in this variation, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is a second display area in the variable display game executed before the variable display game (the decoration special view variable display game) in which the reach state occurs. (In the case of this modification, when the stop display is performed in a state where the identification information is aligned on the sub display device 41b), the identification information is aligned in the second display area until the variable display game in which the reach state occurs. It is possible to configure to continue the stop display (see FIGS. 69 to 71).
By configuring in this manner, since it is possible to continue the expectation of reaching the reach over the plurality of variable display games, it is possible to improve the operation rate of the gaming machine.

Further, in this modification, the effect control means (effect control apparatus 300) enlarges and displays the identification information stop-displayed in the state aligned with the second display area (the sub display device 41b in the case of this modification). Later, by replacing the identification information stopped and displayed in the state not aligned with the first display area (in the case of this modification, the main display device 41a) with the identification information enlarged and displayed in the second display area, It can be configured to generate a reach state (see FIGS. 68 (b), (c), etc.).
By configuring in this manner, the identification information (assist stop symbol) stop displayed in the second display area is enlarged, and some identification information (non-reach symbol stop displayed in the first display area) ) Can be played (pushed out) to make it appear as if the reach state is generated, and the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the present modification, after the effect control means (effect control apparatus 300) displays the first display area (in the case of the present modification, the main display device 41a) in a state in which some identification information is not aligned, The second display area (in the case of this modification, the sub display device 41b) can be configured to be stopped and displayed in a state in which identification information is aligned (see FIG. 79).
By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform a revival-like presentation, and the interest of the game is improved.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present modification is advantageous for the player when the game (special view variation display game) is executed based on the establishment of the start condition and the result of the game becomes a special result. A gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state, comprising: a display device (sub display device 41b) capable of displaying a predetermined moving image; and an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of controlling an effect relating to a game The effect control means executes the first effect (for example, assist symbol effect) on the display device based on that the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, that the game ball has flowed into the pseudo winning hole 870 of the out zone unit 800). The second effect is executed in response to the result of the first effect being a specific result (for example, that the assist stop symbol is in a predetermined combination), and the result of the first effect is a specific result. Number of times the third effect if it becomes more than a predetermined number of times (e.g., SP reach demonstration) may be configured so that it can perform the.
By configuring in this way, effective rendering can be performed.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 80, when the game ball flows into the simulated winning opening 870 in the out area (out zone unit 800), assist symbol effect is executed, and the assist stop symbol becomes a predetermined combination. The cumulative image corresponding to the number of times (number of specified results) is displayed on the sub display device 41b, and the number of times the assist stop symbol is in the predetermined combination (number of specified results) is equal to or more than a predetermined number (for example, n5 or more) When the SP reach effect or the like is performed, and when the SP reach effect or the like is performed, the accumulated image may be deleted.
In the example shown in FIG. 80, a point image indicating a value based on the number of times the assist stop symbol is in a predetermined combination (number of specified results) is displayed as a cumulative image, and the effect mode of the second effect (the cumulative image "Display mode" is "1st mode (mode that displays point image of" 100 pt ". Refer to FIG. 80 (b))" → "mode that displays point image of" second mode (200 pt ". Fig. 80 (c See the))->"third aspect (an aspect displaying a point image of" 300 pt ". Refer to Fig. 80 (d)") "→" an aspect allowing the fourth aspect (a point image of "400 pt" to be displayed. ))) In order. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 80, the cumulative value switching display effect is executed as the second effect.

Thus, the effect control means (effect control device 300) causes the display device (sub display device 41b) to appear a predetermined image (cumulative image) as a second effect, and the result of the first effect is a specific result. It is possible to execute the effect of switching the display mode of the predetermined image according to the fact that (the assist stop symbol has become the predetermined combination), and that the third effect (SP reach effect etc.) has been executed. As a condition, the display mode of the predetermined image may be returned to the normal display mode (for example, a mode in which the point image is not displayed or a mode in which the point image "0 pt" is displayed).
Of course, the predetermined image is not limited to the point image, and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the effect of switching the display mode of the predetermined image is not limited to the effect shown in FIG. 80 (effect of increasing the point value), and can be appropriately changed. For example, the predetermined image may be a meter image, and an effect of increasing the meter value may be performed as an effect of switching the display mode of the predetermined image.

  When the assist stop pattern is made to act directly on the decorative special pattern variation display game (decorative pattern), the player may misunderstand or misunderstand, but as shown in FIG. 80, the first effect, the second effect, And by making the assist stop design act indirectly on the decoration special figure variation display game (via the medium such as an image or a character) by executing the third effect, misunderstanding and misunderstanding are less likely to occur and the interest is improved Do.

The third effect is not limited to one to be executed when the number of times the result of the first effect is a specific result is equal to or more than a predetermined number, and can be appropriately changed, and the third effect can be For example, the effect corresponding to the effect mode of the second effect may be used.
Specifically, for example, the third effect is taken as the reach effect. And, when the effect mode (the display mode of the cumulative image) of the second effect at the start of the special figure variation display game with reach effect is the first mode, it is set as the third effect in the special figure variation display game Out of reach reach effect or normal reach effect is executed, and in the case of the second mode, reach effect of normal reach or more is executed as the third effect in the special view variable display game, and in the case of the third mode Reach effect of SP reach or more is executed as the third effect in the figure fluctuation display game, and in the case of the fourth mode, the reach effect having a particularly high expectation among the SP reach as the third effect in the special figure fluctuation display game May be performed.

  Further, for example, the third effect is a hold change effect (effect to change the display mode of the decoration special view start memory display), and the display mode (color) of the decoration special view start memory display is white <blue <yellow <green <purple It is assumed that the degree of expectation is high in the order of <red <rainbow, and the normal display mode (normal color) of the decorative special view start memory display is not a single color but a mixed color or two or more colors. Then, when the effect mode (the display mode of the cumulative image) of the second effect at the hold change timing is the first mode, an effect of changing the color of the decoration special view start storage display to white as the third effect is executed If it is the second mode, an effect to change the color of the decoration special view start memory display to a color higher than blue is executed as the third effect, and if it is the third mode, the decoration as the third effect is performed An effect of changing the color of the special view start memory display to a color higher than green is executed, and in the case of the fourth mode, an effect of changing the color of the special view start memory display to a red color or more as a third effect May be performed.

  Also, for example, the third effect is assumed to be a pseudo continuous change effect. Then, when the effect mode (the display mode of the cumulative image) of the second effect at the start of the special view change display game with the pseudo continuous change effect is the first mode, the number of times of pseudo run is 1 as the third effect. The effect which is the time is executed, if it is the second mode, the effect that the number of pseudo-sequences is 2 is performed as the third effect, and if it is the third mode, the number of pseudo-sequences as the third effect In the case of the fourth mode, the effect of which the number of times of pseudo-sequence is four may be performed as the third effect.

In addition, even when the number of lit character emitting parts is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, or when the point value (or meter value) is greater than or equal to a predetermined value, the alternative rendering may be performed. Good.
In addition, during execution of the special figure fluctuation display game where the result becomes the big hit, when the number of the character luminous sections which are lit (lighted) becomes more than predetermined number, or the point value (or meter value) is more than fixed value If it becomes, an effect of notifying the number of rounds of the big hit (for example, an effect of displaying the number of rounds of the big hit in the sub display area 41b) may be performed.

<Modification C of the game board>
A modification C of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82.
FIG. 81 (a) is a view for explaining the main part of the game board 30 of the modification C, and is a view (front view) seen from the front side. FIG. 82 (a) is a view for explaining the main part of the game board 30 of this modification, and is a perspective view seen from the front side.
The game board 30 of the present modification basically has the same configuration as the game board 30 of the modification B, and hereinafter, mainly different parts will be described. While the out zone unit 800 of the modified example B allows the game balls which did not win in any of the plurality of winning areas provided in the game area 32 to flow, the out zone unit 900 of the present modified example A game ball that has won a prize can flow into the prize area (in the case of this variation, the start winning opening 36).

As shown in FIGS. 81 (a) and 82 (a), the out zone unit 900 forms the start winning opening 36 on the front side of the gaming board 30 and forms the pseudo winning opening 900a on the rear side of the gaming board 30. The game ball that has won in the start winning opening 36 (ie, it flows into the starting winning opening 36 and is detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a) First winning channel member 930 forming a first guiding channel 930a for guiding the game ball to the rotating body 920, and the game ball lifted up from the bottom by the rotating body 920 is simulated winning And a second induction flow channel member 940 forming a second induction flow channel 940a for guiding to the mouth 900a.
In addition, in order to illustrate the 1st induction channel member 930, the rotary body 920, and the 2nd induction channel member 940 intelligibly, illustration of a one part member is abbreviate | omitted in FIG. 81 (a) and FIG. 82 (a). doing. For example, in FIG. 81 (a) and FIG. 82 (a), illustration of the game board 30 is omitted. Further, in FIG. 81 (a), a portion of the stage portion 32S that overlaps with the rotating body 920 is indicated by an imaginary line (two-dot chain line) in order to make the rotating body 920 intelligible and illustrated.

  A portion of the game board 30 that overlaps with the rotating body 920 as viewed from the front, and a portion of the stage portion 32S that rotates as viewed from the front so that the rotating body 920 disposed behind the game board 30 can be viewed from the front The portion overlapping with the body 920 is light transmissive. That is, at least a portion of the game board 30 and the stage portion 32S (specifically, a portion overlapping the rotating body 920 when viewed from the front) is transparent or translucent.

  In this modification, the stage portion 32S is a game ball on the stage portion 32S, that is, a game ball guided to the stage portion 32S from the game area 32 outside the center case 40 by the warp passage portion 43 It is configured to drop only from the front end side of the stage portion 32S. Specifically, the stage portion 32S is, for example, inclined downward and forward. Therefore, the game ball can flow directly into the start winning opening 36 provided on the front side of the game board 30 from above the stage portion 32S, but the pseudo winning hole 900a provided on the rear side of the game board 30 can be staged It can not flow directly from 32S. That is, the gaming ball on the stage portion 32S can not flow into the simulated winning opening 900a without passing through the start winning hole 36, the first induction channel 930a, the rotating body 920, and the second induction channel 940a.

FIG. 82 (b) is a perspective view of the winning opening formation member 910 as viewed from the front side.
As shown in FIGS. 82 (a) and 82 (b), the winning opening formation member 910 is formed long in the front-rear direction, and the front end portion forms the start winning opening 36 and the rear end portion forms the pseudo winning opening 900a. ing. As shown in FIG. 82 (a), in the winning opening formation member 910, the front end portion (i.e., the start winning opening 36) protrudes forward relative to the front surface of the gaming board 30, and the rear end portion (i.e., the pseudo winning opening 900a) is a game. The game board 30 is pierced back and forth so as to protrude rearward than the rear face of the board 30.

That is, in the present modification, the start winning opening 36 and the pseudo winning opening 900 a are arranged in front and back. Therefore, the gaming ball guided by the second induction flow path 940a actually flows into the simulated winning opening 900a, but by arranging the starting winning opening 36 and the simulated winning opening 900a back and forth, for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in the drawing, the game ball guided by the second induction flow passage 940a can be made to appear as if it is winning in the start winning opening 36. In addition, since the game ball guided by the second induction flow path 940a is a game ball winning in the start winning hole 36, the start winning hole 36 and the pseudo winning hole 900a are arranged in the front and back direction. It can be seen as if the winning game ball is again winning in the starting winning opening 36.
The member forming the start winning hole 36 and the member forming the pseudo winning hole 900 a may not be the same member (winning hole forming member 910). That is, the member forming the start winning hole 36 and the member forming the pseudo winning hole 900a may be separate members.

As shown in FIGS. 82 (a) and 82 (b), an opening 911 through which game balls can pass is provided on the side or bottom (the right side in the case of this modification) of the front end portion of the winning opening forming member 910. It is done. The gaming ball having won the start winning opening 36 advances from the inside of the starting winning opening 36 to the outside by passing through the opening 911 and flows into the first guiding channel 930 a.
In the present modification, only the gaming balls that have won the start winning hole 36 flow into the first guiding channel 930a, and are guided to the rotating body 920 by the first guiding channel 930a. Specifically, in order to prevent the game ball flowing down around the out zone unit 900 from entering the first induction channel 930a, the illustration is omitted around the first induction channel member 930, etc. For example, a plurality of obstacle members (for example, projecting or wall-like members made of resin), nails, and the like are provided.

As shown in FIG. 82 (a), the width of the first guiding channel 930a is set such that the gaming balls flow down from the upstream side (start winning hole 36 side) to the downstream side (rotary body 920 side) in a row It is done.
The first induction flow channel 930 a is inclined so as to go down from the upstream side to the downstream side. That is, on the upper surface of the first induction flow channel member 930, a height difference (in the case of this modification, inclination) is provided such that the upstream side of the first induction flow channel 930a is disposed at a higher position than the downstream side. There is. As a result, the gaming ball can smoothly flow down the first induction flow channel 930a (ie, the upper surface of the first induction flow channel member 930). Can be prevented.
The height difference provided on the upper surface of the first induction flow channel member 930 may not be a slope but may be a step or the like.
In addition, the first guiding channel member 930 may be disposed behind the gaming board 30. Also, on the upper surface of the first induction flow channel member 930 (that is, the first induction flow channel 930a), the ball control portion (concave or convex or the like) for suppressing the ball of the gaming ball, the hole of the rotary body 920 A ball guiding part (concave or convex or the like) may be provided for guiding to the part.

As shown in FIG. 82 (a), the first induction channel 930a is a substantially L-shaped channel, and the bent portion is curved so that the gaming ball can smoothly flow down. The downstream portion (that is, the portion extending in the longitudinal direction) of the first guiding channel 930a is disposed in the through hole 30b penetrating in the longitudinal direction provided in the game board 30, and the first guiding channel 930a is The downstream end reaches the rear side of the game board 30. The through holes 30 b provided in the game board 30 are formed in a size that allows the game balls flowing down the first induction flow path 930 a to pass. The game ball guided by the first guiding channel 930a advances from the front side to the rear side of the game board 30 by passing through the through holes 30b, and the rotating body 920 disposed behind the game board 30. Flow into the hole of
Although only the inlet (front end) of the through hole 30b is illustrated in FIG. 82 (a), the outlet (rear end) of the through hole 30b is, for example, substantially the same as the downstream end of the first guiding channel 930a. It is located on a plane (the plane is a plane perpendicular to the front-rear direction).

FIG. 81 (b) is a view from the front side of the rotating body 920, and FIG. 81 (c) is a view from the front side of the rotating body cover 950 attached to the rotating body 920.
As shown in FIGS. 81 (a) and 81 (b), the rotating body 920 is a disk-shaped member, and is disposed in a state in which the thickness direction is substantially coincident with the front-rear direction. The rotary body 920 is attached to the rear surface side of the game board 30 by a rotary shaft 921 penetrating the center of the rotary body 920, and in a fixed direction at a constant speed about the rotary shaft 921 (in the case of this modification, the front side) It is configured to rotate in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the side.

  The rotary body 920 is provided with a game ball housing portion 920a capable of housing a game ball, and a game ball discharge portion 920b capable of guiding the game ball to the ball discharge unit. Specifically, the rotating body 920 is provided with a plurality of (eight in this modification) holes penetrating in the front-rear direction so as to line up in the circumferential direction of the rotating body 920. The holes are formed in a size through which the game balls can pass, and among these holes, the game balls are discharged (specifically, the game balls pass from the front to the back of the holes) The hole having the discharge restriction wall 922 for restricting the rear end side constitutes the game ball accommodating portion 920a, and the hole not having the discharge restriction wall 922 forms the game ball discharge portion 920b.

In the present modification, the number of game ball discharge parts 920b of the rotary body 920 is one, but the number of game ball discharge parts 920b is not limited to one, and may be plural.
Further, in the present modification, a part of the plurality of holes of the rotary body 920 is the game ball housing portion 920a, but even if all of the plurality of holes of the rotary body 920 are the game ball housing portion 920a. good. That is, the rotary body 920 may not have the game ball discharge unit 920 b.

  A transparent rotator cover 950 covering the front surface of the rotator 920 is attached to the rotator 920. As shown in FIG. 81 (c), the rotating body cover 950 is at a predetermined first position (in the case of this modification, the lowermost position (that is, the position at 6 o'clock)) of the holes of the rotating body 920. The game ball is provided in the part facing the hole that has reached and in the part facing the hole that has reached the predetermined second position (in the case of this modification, the uppermost position (that is, the 12 o'clock position)) It has an opening 951 through which it can pass.

The rotating body cover 950 is non-rotatably fixed. That is, even if the rotating body 920 rotates, the rotating body cover 950 does not rotate, and one of the two openings 951 provided in the rotating body cover 950 is maintained at the first position. The other of the two openings 951 provided in the rotating body cover 950 is maintained in the second position.
If the rotary cover 950 is transparent or translucent, a pattern or the like for identifying the game ball discharge portion 920b and the game ball storage portion 920a may be provided on the front surface of the rotary body 920 or the like. Specifically, for example, a triangular pattern on the front surface of the rotating body 1930 shown in FIG. 92 is provided in the vicinity of one of the game ball discharge portion 920 b and the game ball storage portion 920 a. Also good. In this case, it is easy to see if the game ball has flowed into the game ball discharge portion 920b or into the game ball storage portion 920a, so that when the game ball has flowed into the hole of the rotary body 92, It becomes possible to determine whether the game ball will win the simulated winning opening 900a.

The gaming ball having flowed down the first induction channel 930 a passes through one of the two openings 951 (in the case of this modification, the lower opening 951) provided in the rotary body cover 950, and the rotary body 920. It flows into the hole which has reached the 1st position (in the case of this modification, the lowest position) among the holes which A has.
And, when the hole is the game ball discharge part 920b, the game ball which has flowed into the hole of the rotary body 920 passes through the hole and is discharged to the ball discharge unit.
In addition, when the hole is the game ball housing portion 920a, the game ball that has flowed into the hole included in the rotation body 920 rotates the rotation body 920 so that the hole is in the second position (this embodiment In this case, when the uppermost position is reached, the other of the two openings 951 provided in the rotator cover 950 (the upper opening 951 in this modification) is passed to the second induction flow channel 940a. To flow. In this modification, only the gaming balls lifted by the rotating body 920 (that is, the gaming balls flowing into the gaming ball housing portion 920a) are configured to flow into the second guiding flow passage 940a.

  The rotary body 920 is not limited to the one holding the gaming ball by the hole (the gaming ball housing portion 920a and the gaming ball ejection portion 920b), and may hold the gaming ball by a magnet, for example. Specifically, for example, a magnet is incorporated in the rotary body 920, and the game ball in contact with the magnet arrangement place (place where the magnet is arranged) in front of the rotary body 920 is attracted to the magnet arrangement place by this magnet (contact) It may be configured to be held in the closed state and to lift the gaming ball adsorbed to the magnet arrangement location from the bottom to the top by the rotating rotator 920 (that is, to guide it to the second induction flow path 940a).

FIG. 82C is a perspective view of the second induction flow channel member 940 as viewed from the front side.
As shown in FIG. 82 (c), the second guiding flow passage member 940 is a rectangular plate-like member, and an upstream side projecting portion 941 that protrudes rearward to the upstream end (the right end in this modification). Is provided, and a downstream side projection 942 that protrudes rearward is provided at the downstream end (the left end in the case of this modification). The upstream side protrusion 941 of the second induction flow channel member 940 is inserted from the front into the hole 952 (see FIG. 81C) provided in the rotary body cover 950, and The downstream side protrusion 942 is inserted from the front into a hole (not shown) provided in a predetermined member disposed to the rear of the second guide channel member 940. As described above, the second guiding flow channel member 940 inserts the upstream side protrusion 941 and the downstream side protruding portion 942 into the predetermined holes, thereby achieving a predetermined state (that is, the upstream of the second guiding flow path 940a). In a state where the side is disposed higher than the downstream side), it is possible to fix at a predetermined position (that is, a position where the gaming ball lifted by the rotating body 920 can be guided to the simulated winning opening 900a) .
In addition, to the upper surface of the second induction flow channel member 940 (that is, the second induction flow channel 940a), the ball control portion (concave and convex portions, etc.) for suppressing the pitch of the game ball and the game ball to the simulated winning opening 900a. You may provide the ball | bowl guide part (an unevenness | corrugation, protrusion, etc.) for guiding.

The gaming ball having won the start winning hole 36 first passes through the opening 911 provided at the front end portion of the winning hole formation member 910 and flows into the first guiding channel 930 a.
The gaming ball having flowed into the first induction flow channel 930 a flows down the first induction flow channel 930 a, and the through hole 30 b provided in the game board 30 and the two openings 951 provided in the rotary body cover 950 Through one of the holes (in the case of this modification, the lower opening 951) to reach the first position (the lowermost position in the case of this modification) of the plurality of holes possessed by the rotating body 920. Flows into the hole.

When the hole reaching the first position is the game ball discharge unit 920b, the game balls flowing into the hole are discharged to the ball discharge unit. That is, the game balls having flowed into the game ball discharge unit 920 b from the front of the game ball discharge unit 920 b pass through the game ball discharge unit 920 b and are discharged to the ball discharge unit.
On the other hand, when the hole reaching the first position is the gaming ball accommodating portion 920a, the gaming ball having flowed into the hole is lifted by the rotating body 920 from the bottom to the top. Then, when the hole reaches the second position (the uppermost position in the case of the present modification), the gaming ball housed in the hole is one of the two openings 951 provided in the rotary body cover 950. Through the other (in the case of this modification, the upper opening 951) to flow into the second induction channel 940a.

The gaming balls having flowed into the second induction flow channel 940a flow down the second induction flow channel 940a and flow into the simulated winning opening 900a.
As shown in FIGS. 82 (a) and 82 (b), an opening 912 through which game balls can pass is formed on the side or bottom of the rear end portion of the winning opening formation member 910 (the rear side in the case of this modification). It is provided. The game ball having flowed into the pseudo winning hole 900a advances from the inside of the pseudo winning hole 900a to the outside by passing through the opening 912, and is discharged to the ball discharging unit. In this modification, only the gaming balls having flowed into the second induction flow path 940a are configured to flow into the simulated winning opening 900a. That is, only the game balls that have won the start winning opening 36 can flow into the simulated winning opening 900 a.

  As described above, in the present modification, the gaming ball that has won the start winning hole 36 flows into the gaming ball discharge unit 920 b of the rotating body 920 and is discharged to the ball discharging unit, or the game of the rotating body 920 When it flows into the ball accommodating portion 920a, it flows into the pseudo winning hole 900a and is discharged to the ball discharging unit. That is, the gaming ball having won the start winning hole 36 can not return to the outside (the gaming area 32) of the out zone unit 900.

The game ball having flowed into the simulated winning opening 900a is detected by a simulated winning opening switch (not shown). A detection signal of the simulated winning opening switch is output to the effect control device 300, and when the simulated winning opening switch detects a game ball, the effect control device 300 is configured to execute a predetermined effect.
The simulated winning opening 900a of this modification is an assist starting opening as with the simulated winning opening 870 of modified B, and when the game ball flows into the simulated winning opening 900a, the assist symbol effect (see FIGS. 67 to 73) is executed. Be done. In addition, it is also possible to perform the effect shown in FIG. 80 in response to the game ball having flowed into the simulated winning opening 900a.

In addition, the game ball which flows into out zone unit 900 is not limited to the game ball which won the start winning a prize mouth 36, other prize territory (general prize mouth 35, normal fluctuation winning a prize device 37, the 1st special fluctuation) It may be a game ball winning a winning device 38, a second special variation winning device 39).
Also, the gaming balls flowing into the out zone unit 900 are not limited to the gaming balls that have won a prize in one winning area, but may be gaming balls that have won in a plurality of winning areas. Specifically, for example, a channel may be provided for guiding the gaming ball that has won the normal fluctuation winning device 37 to the first induction channel 930a. In this case, in the out zone unit 900, the specific game (in the case of this modification, the game ball is the simulated winning opening 900a) using the gaming ball that has won the start winning opening 36 and the gaming ball that has won the normal variation winning device 37. You can play the game whether or not to flow into.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present modification, a winning area (in the case of the present modification, the start winning opening 36) and an inflow area (out zone unit 900) in which gaming balls winning in the winning area can flow. And a specific game (in the case of this modification, a game whether or not the game ball flows into the simulated winning opening 900a) using the game ball that has won the prize area in the inflow area. When it is determined that the specific game mechanism (in the case of this modification, the first induction flow channel 930a, the rotating body 920, the second induction flow channel 940a, and the simulated winning opening 900a) and the specific game result is a predetermined result. And effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing a predetermined effect (in the case of this variation, an assist symbol effect).

Therefore, the interest of the game can be enhanced while maintaining the fairness and the fairness of the game.
Specifically, since the specific game (game ball effect) can be performed in the inflow area (out zone unit 900) such as the out area, the interest of the game can be enhanced. Also, the specific game (game ball effect) is an effect using the game ball that has flowed into the inflow area (out zone unit 900), and is not an effect that uses a game ball that may be won in the winning area, The fairness and fairness of the game can be maintained.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present modification, a winning area (in the case of the present modification, the start winning opening 36), and an inflow area (out zone unit 900) in which gaming balls winning in the winning area flow. A ball effect mechanism for producing effects using a game ball that has won a prize area in the inflow area (in the case of this modification, the first induction flow path 930a, the rotating body 920, and the second induction current). The ball effect mechanism guides the game ball winning in the winning area to the specific area (the pseudo winning hole 900a) to which the game ball winning in the winning area can flow and the ball effect mechanism includes the path 940a and the pseudo winning opening 900a). And a movable member (in the case of this modification, a rotating body 920).

Therefore, the interest of the game can be enhanced while maintaining the fairness and the fairness of the game.
Specifically, in the inflow area (out zone unit 900) such as the out area, it is possible to perform an effect (game ball effect) using a game ball that has won a winning area. In the case of this modification, a specific area (the pseudo winning opening 900a) to which the game ball can flow is provided at the rear of the winning area, and the gaming ball winning in the winning area can be guided to the specific area. As an effect (game ball effect) using a game ball that has won a winning area, an effect can be performed that makes it appear as if a game ball that has already won a prize in the winning area will win again in the winning area. It can be enhanced.

In addition, the effect (game ball effect) performed in the inflow area (out zone unit 900) is an effect using the game ball that has won in the winning area, and is not an effect that uses the game ball before winning in the winning area. , Can maintain the fairness and fairness of the game.
That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present modification, only gaming balls that have won in the winning area (in the case of the present modification, the start winning opening 36) are configured to be able to enter the inside of the inflow area (out zone unit 900). . Specifically, for example, in order to prevent entry into the gaming ball flowing down around the out zone unit 900 around the first induction channel member 930 or the like, an obstacle member (formed of resin is used. Protrusive, wall-like members, etc.) and nails are provided.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present modified example, the movable member (rotating body 920) can be configured to lift the gaming ball by rotating.
By configuring in this way, the game ball can be kept in the inflow area (out zone unit 900) for a long time, so the effect of the effect (game ball effect) using the game ball winning in the winning area is enhanced. be able to.

In addition, the effect (game ball effect) using the game ball that has won in the winning area is an effect using the game ball that has flowed into the inflow area (out zone unit 900), and a game that has the possibility of winning in the winning area Since it is not a production using balls, it can not be performed using a gaming ball that may be won in a winning area as an effect (game ball rendering) using a gaming ball that has won a winning area, for example As in the present modification, it is possible to perform an effect such as lifting the gaming ball against gravity by the movable member (rotary body 920).
In addition, a movable member is not limited to the rotary body 920, It can change suitably. The movable member may be, for example, a ball storage device that can be converted to a first state for storing game balls and a second state for not storing game balls, and in addition, a V movable member (two types of pachinko machines) A movable member capable of guiding the gaming ball to a specific area may be diverted.

"Replay effect"
The predetermined effect that can be executed when the result of the specific game is a predetermined result (that is, when the game ball flows into the simulated winning opening 900a) is not limited to the assist symbol effect but can be appropriately changed. . The predetermined effect may be, for example, a replay effect (specifically, a revariation effect in the replay effect).
Replay effect is a temporary stop effect of temporarily stopping the decoration special view fluctuation display game in a predetermined result mode (for example, an outcome result of a disconnection) in the middle of the special view fluctuation display game, and thereafter, a predetermined condition is established ( In the case of this modification, it is an effect consisting of a re-variation effect of resuming the decorative special-image variation display game being temporarily stopped with the game ball having flowed into the simulated winning opening 900a). If the replay effect can be executed, the effect control device 300 executes the replay control process shown in FIG. 83, for example, in the main process (see FIG. 74 etc.).

For example, at the start of the special view variation display game, a replay effect determination lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform the replay effect during the special view variation display game, and the special view variation display is performed when the replay effect availability lottery is won. Replay during the game.
Specifically, for example, when the content of the change effect determined in step C 521 in the change effect setting process (see FIG. 77 and the like) is the content including the replay effect, it is determined that the replay effect availability lottery has been won. Then, in the case where the content of the change effect determined in step C521 is the content including the replay effect, the display setting of the temporary stop effect in the replay effect is performed in step C523. Thereby, the decoration special figure variation display game is started, and the decoration special figure variation display game is temporarily stopped in a predetermined result mode after a predetermined time.

[Replay control processing]
FIG. 83 shows the replay control process in the main process. In this replay control process, first, it is determined whether the temporary stop effect in the replay effect is being executed (the decorative feature variation display game is temporarily stopped) (step C421).
If it is determined that the temporary stop effect is not being executed (step C421; N), the replay control process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the temporary stop effect is being executed (step C421; Y), it is determined whether the simulated winning opening switch has detected the game ball (step C422).

If it is determined that the simulated winning opening switch has detected the gaming ball (step C422; Y), that is, if the gaming ball has flowed into the simulated winning opening 900a, display setting of re-variation effect in the replay effect is performed (step C423), the replay control process ends. Thereby, the decoration special figure change display game in temporary stop is resumed.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the simulated winning opening switch does not detect the game ball (step C422; N), that is, when the gaming ball is not flowing into the simulated winning opening 900a, the decorative special figure changes during temporary stop It is determined whether the remaining time value of the display game is less than a predetermined threshold (step C424). Here, the remaining time value of the decoration special figure variation display game is the time value from the start of the decoration special figure variation display game to the current time from the value of the fluctuation time of the decoration special figure variation display game which is predetermined. Is the time value of the difference minus.

If it is determined that the remaining time value of the decorative feature variation display game being temporarily stopped is not less than the predetermined threshold (step C424; N), the replay control process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining time value of the decoration special figure variation display game during temporary stop is less than the predetermined threshold (step C424; Y), display setting of the revariation effect in the replay effect is performed (step C423), the replay control process ends. Thereby, the decoration special figure change display game in temporary stop is resumed.

  The value of the fluctuation time of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is determined in advance, and the temporary stop time is also counted as the fluctuation time. Therefore, for example, immediately before the fluctuation time of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game during temporary stop is over If the game ball does not flow into the simulated winning opening 900a or if the game ball does not flow into the simulated winning opening 900a before the fluctuation time of the decorative special view variation display game during temporary stop It is not possible to restart the decorative special figure variation display game during the temporary stop, triggered by having flowed into the simulated winning opening 900a. Therefore, when the remaining time value of the decoration special figure variation display game under temporary stop is lower than the predetermined threshold (step C425; Y), even if the game ball does not flow into the simulated winning opening 900a, the temporary stop The decoration special feature variation display game inside will be resumed.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present modified example changes from the first mode (for example, the mode for temporarily stopping the decoration special figure change display game) to the second mode (for example, the mode for changing the decoration special figure change display game) The effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing a switchable predetermined effect (for example, replay effect) is provided, and the effect control means performs the predetermined effect when the game ball flows into the specific area (the pseudo winning opening 900a). Can be configured to switch from the first aspect to the second aspect.
Specifically, an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing an interruptible predetermined effect (for example, replay effect) is provided, and the effect control means is in a state in which the predetermined effect is interrupted (for example When the game ball flows into the specific area (the simulated winning opening 900a) in a state where the display game is temporarily stopped, the predetermined effect can be resumed.
By configuring in this manner, it is possible to provide a replay function by the game ball, and to enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, when it is possible to execute a predetermined effect (for example, replay effect) that can be interrupted, the game ball flows into the simulated winning opening 900a only when the decorative special view variation display game is temporarily stopped, and the decorative special view variation When the display game is not temporarily stopped, the gaming ball may not flow into the simulated winning opening 900a.
The configuration can be realized, for example, by rotating the rotating body 920 when in temporary stop, and waiting without rotating the rotating body 920 when not in temporary stop. In this case, while the rotation of the rotating body 920 is stopped, there is a possibility that the first induction flow path 930a overflows with the gaming ball, so the rotating body 920 can be used. In the case of this modification, it is preferable to wait in the lowermost position).
In addition, for example, the specific game mechanism in the out zone unit 900 (in the case of this modification, the first induction flow channel 930a, the rotating body 920, the second induction flow channel 940a and the simulated winning opening 900a) It is possible to realize also in the case where it is configured to be in the pseudo winning possible state (described later) when stopped, and to be the pseudo winning impossible state (described later) when not temporarily stopped.

Further, the predetermined effect that can be executed when the result of the specific game is a predetermined result (that is, when the game ball flows into the simulated winning opening 900a) may be a resurrection effect.
Specifically, for example, when a battle effect is executed in the final effect of SP reach, etc., a resurrection effect in which the ally character is revived is started upon the game ball having flowed into the simulated winning opening 900a. Also good. Furthermore, similarly to the replay effect described above, when the game ball does not flow into the simulated winning opening 900a by a predetermined timing, the revival effect is started even if the game ball does not flow into the simulated winning opening 900a. It is also possible. In addition, a meter is displayed to notify the number of gaming balls that have flowed into the simulated winning opening 900a (for example, the number of gaming balls that have flowed into the simulated winning opening 900a from a predetermined time point to the current time). It is also possible to configure the resurrection production to be triggered when the maximum is reached.
By performing such a revival presentation, it is possible to enhance the added value to the pseudo winning combination port 900a, so it is possible to expect an improvement in interest.

In addition, the predetermined effect that can be executed when the result of the specific game is a predetermined result (that is, when the game ball flows into the simulated winning opening 900a) is displayed on the display device 41 etc. It may be a pending change effect that changes the display mode of the figure start memory display) to a display mode (hereinafter referred to as a “final display mode”) capable of suggesting a prefetch result and the like.
Specifically, for example, in the case of a gaming machine capable of displaying a hold display in a display mode (for example, an intermediate mode that glows white, etc.) for notifying that hold change effect may be executed, the middle mode The trigger for changing the display mode of the hold display displayed as etc. to the final display mode may be taken as the inflow of gaming balls to the simulated winning opening 900a.
Further, for example, in the case of a gaming machine, the final display mode is determined when the start memory is generated, and the change possibility lottery of whether to change the display mode every time the holding display corresponding to the start memory shifts is performed. (A game machine may decide the final display mode and the change timing to change the display mode when the start memory is generated.) The pseudo winning is more than the result of the change possibility lottery (or the determined change timing). The flow of gaming balls into the mouth 900a may be prioritized. Further, when it is determined that the display mode of the suspension display corresponding to the start memory is changed to the final display mode a plurality of times when the start memory is generated or the like, the flow of the game ball into the simulated winning opening 900a is triggered. The display mode of the hold display may be changed to the final display mode at once, or the display mode of the hold display may be changed each time the game ball flows into the simulated winning opening 900a.
Furthermore, as in the case of the replay effect described above, if the gaming ball does not flow into the simulated winning opening 900a by the predetermined timing (for example, at the start of the variable display game based on the starting memory to be held change presentation) Even if the ball does not win the simulated winning opening 900a, it may be configured to perform the on-hold change effect.
By performing such a hold change presentation, it is possible to draw attention to the inflow of gaming balls to the simulated winning opening 900a. In addition, since it is possible to enhance the relevance between the inflow of game balls to the simulated winning opening 900a and the effect, it is possible to expect an improvement in interest.

In addition, it is possible to display a specific image (cut-in image, character image, etc.) notifying the expectation of the fluctuation display game during and before execution, etc., triggered by the inflow of gaming balls into the simulated winning opening 900a. It is. Also in this case, interest can be expected to improve.
In addition, an effect of stocking the execution right of a predetermined effect (for example, advance notice effect for a predetermined variable display game) is possible, and a predetermined notification image for informing the stock number of the execution right can be displayed on the display device 41 etc. In this case, it is also possible to display the predetermined notification image in response to the inflow of gaming balls into the simulated winning opening 900a. Also in this case, interest can be expected to improve.

<< Play game ball pre-reading effect >>
Further, it is also possible to notify (suggest) the pre-reading result according to the result of the specific game (that is, whether or not the game ball has flowed into the pseudo winning hole 900 a). That is, it is also possible to execute the advance notice effect (game ball look-ahead effect) using the game ball that has won the winning area.
In this case, for example, the specific game mechanism in the out zone unit 900 (in the case of this modification, the first induction flow channel 930a, the rotary body 920, the second induction flow channel 940a and the pseudo winning opening 900a) The game ball can be converted into a state in which the game ball is allowed to flow into (hereinafter referred to as a "pseudo winning possible state") and a state in which the game ball is not flowed into the pseudo winning opening 900a (hereinafter referred to as "the pseudo winning impossible state"). Further, the effect control device 300 is configured to be able to execute control for converting the specific game mechanism into the pseudo winning enabled state and control for converting the specific game mechanism to the pseudo winning disabled state. Then, by converting the specific game mechanism into the pseudo winning enabled state, the player is highly likely to be in a high expectation state (high possibility of reaching, high possibility of special result, etc.) By notifying that the specific game mechanism is in a state in which the player can not win a prize, the possibility of the player being highly likely to have a high degree of Low, etc.).

  As described above, the gaming control device 100 performs various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) when there is a winning of the game ball in the start winning opening 36 making the first starting winning opening and the normal variation winning device 37 making the second starting winning opening. The game result pre-determination is performed to determine in advance the game result based on the winning at the stage before the start of the special view variation display game based on the winning. The result of this game result prior determination is the prefetch result. That is, the pre-reading result is a judgment result of the result related information (whether or not it is a big hit or the kind of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the starting memory, and the game before the start timing of the special view fluctuation display game based on the corresponding starting memory It is transmitted from the control device 100 to the effect control device 300.

Specifically, as a prefetch result, for example, a prefetch symbol system command (a prefetch symbol command including a result of a special view fluctuation display game based on a starter memory of a prefetch target) and a prefetch fluctuation system command (based on a starter memory of a prefetch target) The pre-reading fluctuation pattern command and the like including the information of fluctuation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300.
The pre-reading symbol system command and the pre-reading variation system command are commands including information necessary to execute the pre-reading notice effect. Pre-reading advance notice effect (also referred to as pre-reading notice or pre-reading effect) is whether the special figure fluctuation display game becomes a big hit when the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the start memory (pending) not executed is subsequently executed In order to notify the player in advance (with what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) to a predetermined degree of reliability, a decoration start memory display displayed on the display device 41 etc. may be performed in a mode different from normal, It is an effect of performing an effect display. And the pre-reading system command (pre-reading symbol system command and pre-reading fluctuation system command) is the command which informs beforehand the fluctuation pattern and the stop design which corresponds to the starting memory (the starting memory of pre-reading object) which becomes the object of pre-reading notice effect production, At the time of start winning, it is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. In addition, the normal symbol system command and change system command which are not pre-read are transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 to the effect control apparatus 300 at the time of the change display start.

  Here, when receiving the pre-read symbol system command, the effect control device 300 executes the pre-read symbol system command processing shown in FIG. Also, when the prefetch change command is received, the prefetch change command process shown in FIG. 85 is executed.

[Ahead reading symbol system command processing]
FIG. 84 shows pre-read symbol system command processing (step C244) in the received command analysis processing (see FIG. 34). In this pre-reading symbol system command processing, first, it is judged whether the latest reservation information is special figure 1 reservation (step C811).
If the latest hold information is the special view 1 hold (step C811; Y), that is, if the received prefetch symbol system command relates to the special view 1 hold, the command corresponds to the special view 1 hold number The special figure 1 prefetch symbol command area is saved (step C812), the prefetch variation command reception waiting flag is set (step C814), and the prefetch symbol system command processing is ended.

On the other hand, if the latest hold information is not special view 1 hold (step C811; N), that is, if the received prefetch symbol system command relates to special view 2 hold, the command corresponds to the special view 2 hold number The special figure 2 prefetch symbol command area is saved (step C813), the prefetch variation command reception waiting flag is set (step C814), and the prefetch symbol system command processing is ended.
The reason for which the prefetch change command reception waiting flag is set in step C814 is that the prefetch pattern command and the prefetch change command (prefetch change pattern command) are set (paired).

[Read-ahead change system command processing]
FIG. 85 shows pre-read variation system command processing (step C246) in the received command analysis processing (see FIG. 34). In this pre-reading variation system command processing, first, it is judged whether or not the pre-reading variation command reception is waiting (step C821). Here, when there is a prefetch variation command reception waiting flag set in the above-described prefetch symbol system command processing, it is determined that the reception is waiting.
If it is not waiting to receive the prefetch change command (step C821; N), the prefetch change system command processing is ended.
On the other hand, when waiting for reception of the prefetch change command (step C821; Y), the prefetch change command reception wait flag is cleared (step C822).

Thereafter, in the process of steps C823 to C826, a process of converting the prefetch change command (preread change pattern command) received from the game control device 100 so as to be convenient for the process in the effect control device 300 is performed.
First, the process (step C823) of setting the look-ahead fluctuation MODE conversion table corresponding to the pending number of symbols of the latest hold information is performed, and the information of the special view type of starting storage corresponding to the look-ahead fluctuation system command received this time A MODE conversion table for converting MODE is set according to the current number of reservations of the special drawing type.

  Next, with reference to the set MODE conversion table, the sub-prediction change command MODE corresponding to the read change command MODE is acquired (step C824). Next, the pre-reading fluctuation ACT conversion table is set (step C825), and the in-sub pre-reading conversion command ACT corresponding to the pre-reading fluctuation command ACT is acquired (step C826).

  Although the information on the first half fluctuation is included in the MODE, the contents and time of the first half fluctuation set based on this MODE change according to the number of reservations at the time of judgment. The judgment result may differ depending on the judgment at the time. Therefore, MODE is converted in the conversion mode according to the current number of reservations, in order to be able to perform processing of preview advance notice effect easily and reliably without being influenced by the number of reservations at the time of determination It can be handled in common regardless of the number of reservations. For example, there may be no reach loss fluctuation, which may result in a short first half fluctuation time depending on the holding status, or no reach out fluctuation fluctuation, such as a long first half fluctuation time regardless of the holding status. It converts into MODE classified into the item considered in the setting of pre-reading advance notice production so that processing of pre-reading advance notice production can be performed easily and certainly.

  In addition, ACT contains information on the latter half fluctuation such as the presence or absence of reach and the type of reach. The contents of the latter half fluctuation set based on this ACT do not change depending on the number of reservations at the time of determination. However, for example, even in the case of normal reach, there are various aspects even in the same kind of reach such that the final stop symbol stops at one frame before the reach symbol and the one at the end of the first symbol stops and the hit case is set. Because the ACT corresponding to each of these is set, the range of values is wide. For this reason, the number of the ACTs corresponding to the reach of the same system is reduced by converting the ACTs to the same ACT, and the processing load such as the check in the processing of the pre-reading advance notice effect is reduced.

Next, it is determined whether both of MODE and ACT after conversion are other than 0 (step C827).
If MODE and ACT after conversion are not both 0 (step C827; N), the command value is abnormal, so the prefetch change system command processing is ended.
On the other hand, if MODE and ACT after conversion are both other than 0 (step C827; Y), the converted command is saved in the latest hold information and prefetch change command area corresponding to the number of holds (step C828), Preread command consistency check processing (step C829) is performed to determine whether the combination of MODE and ACT (command combination) is normal.

If the command combination is not normal (step C830; N) as a result of the prefetch command consistency check process (step C829), the prefetch variation system command process is ended.
On the other hand, if the command combination is normal (step C830; Y), a pre-reading lottery process (step C831) for drawing pre-read advance notice effects is performed to determine whether to generate a game ball pre-reading effect (step C832) ).
If the game ball prefetching effect is not generated (step C832; N), it is determined whether or not prefetching notice effect other than the game ball prefetching effect is generated (step C834).
On the other hand, when generating a game ball look-ahead effect (step C832; Y), that is, when the game ball look-ahead effect is included in the prefetch notice effect selected in the look-ahead lottery process (step C831), it corresponds to the game ball look-ahead effect An operation to be performed is set (step C833), and it is determined whether or not a pre-reading advance notice other than the game ball pre-reading effect is generated (step C834).

If the advance notice effect other than the game ball advance read effect is not generated (step C834; N), the read change system command processing ends.
On the other hand, when the advance notice effect other than the game ball advance effect is generated (step C 834; Y), the advance notice effect that occurs (that is, the advance notice effect (game ball selected in the advance lottery process (step C 831) It is determined whether or not the previewed announcement effect other than the prefetched effect) is an effect to be started immediately (step C 835). The effect to start immediately is, for example, a pending change notice that changes the display mode of the decoration start storage display displayed on the display device 41 or the like from the current time. In addition, the effect of not starting immediately is a previewing notice effect performed during the execution of the special figure variation display game, and an effect or variation that causes a specific effect or reach condition to be generated continuously over a plurality of special figure variation display games. For example, an effect of giving a notice by a character appearing during display, a hold change notice of changing the display mode of the decoration start memory display at a timing later than the current time, or the like. In addition, as a timing which starts execution of such an effect which does not start immediately, if the special figure fluctuation display game is under execution, the special figure fluctuation display game is ended, execution of the next special figure fluctuation display game is started Timing etc. correspond.

If it is not an effect to start immediately (step C 835; N), the prefetch change system command processing is ended. In this case, the advance notice is set, for example, at the start of the special view change display game for executing the advance notice advance effect.
On the other hand, if it is an effect to be started immediately (step C 835; Y), a display corresponding to the selected advance notice effect (previous notice effect other than game ball advance effect) is set (step C 836). End command processing.

  In the pre-read lottery process (step C 831), for example, when the start memory of the lottery object is the first start memory (ie, when the latest hold information is the special view 1 hold), the lottery for the game ball advance reading effect is It is executed together with a lottery for other pre-reading notice effects. In the lottery for gaming ball look-ahead effect, when the result of the special view fluctuation display game based on the start storage of the lottery target is a special result, the result of the special view fluctuation display game based on the start storage of the lottery target is not a special result It is determined that the game ball advance presentation effect is to be executed (that is, the game ball advance presentation effect is selected) with a higher probability than in the case. Alternatively, when reach effect occurs during the special view change display game based on the start storage of the lottery target, it is higher probability than when the reach effect does not occur during the special view change display game based on the start storage of the lottery target. , It is determined that the game ball advance effect is to be executed (that is, the game ball advance effect is selected). Hereinafter, the game ball which generated start memory of the lottery object is called "target game ball".

  Then, when the game ball prefetch effect is included in the prefetch notice effect selected in the prefetch lottery process (step C832; Y), an operation corresponding to the game ball prefetch effect is set (step C833). When an operation corresponding to the game ball advance read effect is set, the effect control device 300 converts the specific game mechanism from the imitation impossible state to the imitation possible state after a predetermined first time has elapsed, and the conversion is performed. After the elapse of a predetermined second time, the specific game mechanism is configured to be converted from the pseudo winning enabled state to the pseudo winning disabled state.

For example, when the out zone unit 900 shown in FIGS. 81 and 82 is changed as shown in FIG. 86, specifically, all of the holes of the rotor 920 are changed to be the game ball accommodating portion 920a. When the discharge control wall 922 provided in each game ball housing portion 920a is changed to be able to be opened and closed, the specific game mechanism can be converted into the pseudo winning enabled state and the pseudo winning disabled state.
Specifically, in the closed state, the openable / dischargeable restriction wall 922 can restrict the discharge of the game ball (the game ball passes from the front to the back of the hole), but it is in the open state. In this case, it is impossible to regulate the discharge of gaming balls.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), when the discharge control wall 922 provided in the game ball housing portion 920a of the rotary body 920 is closed, the game ball having flowed into the game ball housing portion 920a. Is guided to the simulated winning opening 900a by the rotating body 920 and the second induction flow path 940a.
On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), when the discharge control wall 922 provided in the game ball housing portion 920a of the rotary body 920 is open, the game ball having flowed into the game ball housing portion 920a. Is passed through the game ball housing portion 920a and discharged to the ball discharging unit.
That is, the specific game mechanism is put in a state of being capable of pseudo winning by closing all the discharge control walls 922 (or the discharge control walls 922 provided in the game ball housing portion 920a into which the target game balls are to flow). By opening all the discharge control walls 922 (or the discharge control walls 922 provided in the game ball housing portion 920a into which the target game balls are to flow), the specific game mechanism enters the pseudo winning impossible state. In this case, it is possible to switch between the pseudo winning enabled state and the pseudo winning impossible state while keeping the movement of the rotating body 920 constant. That is, since it is difficult for the player to determine at first glance whether it is the pseudo winning possible state or the pseudo winning impossible state, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest even in the pseudo winning impossible state.

  As described above, after the elapse of a predetermined first time, the effect control device 300 converts the specific game mechanism from the pseudo winning impossible state to the pseudo winning possible state, and after the predetermined second time from the conversion, The specific game mechanism is configured to be converted from the pseudo winning enabled state to the pseudo winning disabled state. In the case of the configuration shown in FIG. 86, the first time is, for example, a time slightly shorter than the time required for the game ball to flow into the hole of the rotary body 920 after winning in the start winning hole 36, It is preset based on the length of the induction channel 930a and the like. In addition, for example, the time required for the game ball to flow into the second induction channel 940a after flowing into the hole of the rotary body 920, that is, the hole of the rotary body 920 is the first position In the case of the modification, it is a time slightly longer than the time required to move from the lowermost position to the second position (the uppermost position in the case of the present modification). It is set.

  Thus, for example, at a timing immediately before the target gaming ball flows into the hole of the rotary body 920 (a timing estimated to be immediately before the flow-in), the specific game mechanism is converted from the pseudo winning impossible state to the pseudo winning possible state. As a result, it is possible that the specific game mechanism can not be simulated from the pseudo winning possible state at a timing immediately after the target gaming ball flows into the second induction flow path 940a (a timing estimated to be immediately after the Can be converted to

Alternatively, when the out-zone unit 900 shown in FIGS. 81 and 82 is changed as shown in, for example, FIG. 87, specifically, the second guiding flow channel member 940 has a predetermined rotation axis (for example, the upstream side projection) Change so that it can turn around 941), and all the holes in the rotating body 920 will be the game ball holder 920a (the game ball holder 920a having the discharge restriction wall 922 which can not be opened and closed). Even when changed, the specific game mechanism can be converted into the pseudo-winning possible state and the pseudo-winning impossible state.
Specifically, the rotatable second induction flow channel member 940 is rotated so that the upstream side of the second induction flow channel 940a is disposed at a higher position than the downstream side; The upstream side of the second induction flow channel 940a can be converted to the upstream low state disposed at a lower position than the downstream side.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 87 (a), when the second induction flow passage member 940 is in the upstream high state, the gaming balls having flowed into the second induction flow passage 940a are downstream (the false winning opening). It flows down to the 900 a side), falls from the second induction flow passage member 940, and flows into the pseudo winning hole 900a.
On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 87 (b), when the second induction flow channel member 940 is in the upstream low state, the gaming balls having flowed into the second induction flow channel 940a are on the downstream side. It flows down to the opposite side to the 900 a side), falls from the second induction flow path member 940, and flows into the out port 30a of the outside (game area 32) of the out zone unit 900.
That is, by converting the second induction flow channel member 940 to the upstream high state, the specific game mechanism becomes a pseudo winning enabled state, and the second induction flow channel member 940 converts to the upstream low state, thereby specifying The game mechanism is in a state where the pseudo winning is impossible.

  As described above, after the elapse of a predetermined first time, the effect control device 300 converts the specific game mechanism from the pseudo winning impossible state to the pseudo winning possible state, and after the predetermined second time from the conversion, The specific game mechanism is configured to be converted from the pseudo winning enabled state to the pseudo winning disabled state. In the case of the configuration shown in FIG. 87, the first time is, for example, a time slightly shorter than the time required for the game ball to flow into the second induction flow passage 940a after winning in the start winning hole 36, It is preset based on the length of the induction channel 930a, the rotational speed of the rotating body 920, and the like. In addition, the second time is, for example, a time slightly longer than the time required for the game ball to flow into the second induction flow path 940a and then flow into the simulated winning opening 900a, and the length of the second induction flow path 940a It is set in advance based on

  Thus, for example, at a timing immediately before the target gaming ball flows into the second induction flow path 940a (a timing estimated to be immediately before the flow-in), the specific game mechanism is converted from the pseudo winning impossible state to the pseudo winning possible state. As a result, it is possible to convert the specific game mechanism from the pseudo winning enabled state to the pseudo winning disabled state at a timing immediately after the target gaming ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a (a timing estimated to be immediately after the flowing). It is possible to

When the out-zone unit 900 shown in FIG. 81 and FIG. 82 is changed as shown in FIG. 88, for example, the branch channel 930b (split from the first channel 930a) is divided into the first channel 930a. A flow path is provided to change the opening and closing door 931 at the branch point to the branch flow path 930b, and all the holes of the rotating body 920 are the game ball accommodating portion 920a (the uncontrollable discharge restricting wall 922). The specific game mechanism can be converted into the pseudo winning enabled state and the pseudo winning disabled state also when the game ball accommodating portion 920a) is changed to have the game ball housing portion 920a).
Specifically, the opening / closing door 931 is pivoted to open the inlet of the downstream portion of the first induction channel 930a and close the inlet of the branch channel 930b, and the first induction channel It can be converted to a mainstream closed state in which the inlet of the downstream portion of 930a is closed to open the inlet of the branch channel 930b.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 88 (a), when the open / close door 931 is in the main stream open state, the gaming balls flowing down the first induction channel 930a are in the downstream portion of the first induction channel 930a. It enters and flows into the hole (game ball housing portion 920a) of the rotary body 920, and is guided to the simulated winning opening 900a by the rotary body 920 and the second induction flow path 940a.
On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 88 (b), when the open / close door 931 is in the main stream closed state, the gaming ball flowing down the first induction channel 930a enters the branch channel 930b, and the first induction It falls from the flow path member 930, and flows into the out port 30a of the outside (game area 32) of the out zone unit 900.
That is, when the open / close door 931 is converted to the mainstream open state, the specific game mechanism is put in the pseudo prize enabled state, and when the open / close door 931 is converted into the mainstream closed state, the specific game mechanism is put in the pseudo win impossible state. .

As described above, after the elapse of a predetermined first time, the effect control device 300 converts the specific game mechanism from the pseudo winning impossible state to the pseudo winning possible state, and after the predetermined second time from the conversion, The specific game mechanism is configured to be converted from the pseudo winning enabled state to the pseudo winning disabled state. In the case of the configuration shown in FIG. 88, the first time and the second time are preset based on, for example, the length of the first induction channel 930a and the position of the branch channel 930b.
Specifically, the first time is, for example, at a timing immediately before the target gaming ball arrives at the branch point to the branch flow 930b (a timing assumed to be immediately before arrival), the specific game mechanism can not be simulated winning impossible Is set to the time when it is possible to convert from the above to the pseudo winning possible state. Also, for the second time, for example, the timing immediately after the target gaming ball passes through the entrance of the downstream portion of the first guiding channel 930a (that is, the entrance (front end) of the through hole 30b provided in the game board 30). It is set to the time when it is possible to convert the specific game mechanism from the pseudo winning enabled state to the pseudo winning disabled state (at a timing estimated to be immediately after passing).

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present modification includes a winning area (in the case of the present modification, the start winning opening 36) and an inflow area (out zone unit 900) in which gaming balls winning in the winning area flow. In the provided gaming machine, a specific game for performing a specific game (in the case of this modification, a game whether or not the game ball flows into the simulated winning opening 900a) using a game ball that has won a prize area in the inflow area The specific game (prefetching result in the case of this modification) of the mechanism (in the case of this modification, the first induction flow passage 930a, the rotary body 920, the second induction flow passage 940a and the simulated winning opening 900a) And notification means (effect control device 300) for giving notification according to the result of.

Therefore, the interest of the game can be enhanced while maintaining the fairness and the fairness of the game.
Specifically, the specific game (game ball effect) can be performed within the inflow area (out zone unit 900) such as the out area, and since predetermined information can be notified by the result of the specific game, the game Can enhance the interest of
Also, the specific game (game ball effect) is an effect using the game ball that has flowed into the inflow area (out zone unit 900), and is not an effect that uses a game ball that may be won in the winning area, The fairness and fairness of the game can be maintained.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present modification is a prize storage means (effect control device 300) for storing a prize storage based on the prize of the gaming ball in the prize area (in the case of this modification, the start winning opening 36). Based on the memory, the game execution means (effect control device 300) for executing the variable display game (the decoration special view variable display game) by the plurality of identification information, and the winning memory, the variable display game based on the winning memory is executed And the notification means (effect control device 300) is configured to notify the determination result (prefetching result) of the pre-determination means according to the result of the specific game. It is possible.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the result of the pre-reading according to the result of the specific game, so it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.
In addition, the predetermined information notified by the result of the specific game is not limited to the pre-reading result, that is, the game result of the variable display game before the execution (the result related information of undigested fluctuation), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be a game result of the variable display game being executed (result-related information of digestive variation).

<< game ball storage device >>
In addition, the out zone unit 900 may include the game ball storage device 960.
FIG. 89 (a) is a perspective view from the front side of the out zone unit 900 equipped with the gaming ball storage device 960, and FIG. 89 (b) is a perspective view from the front side of the gaming ball storage device 960. is there.
As shown in FIGS. 89 (a) and 89 (b), the gaming ball storage device 960 includes, for example, a case member 961 having a substantially rectangular outer shape, and an opening / closing member 962 for opening and closing an outlet 961b provided in the case member 961. And an open / close drive mechanism (not shown) for driving the open / close member 962.
The front wall of the case member 961 is provided with an inflow port 961a of a size through which gaming balls penetrating in the front-rear direction can pass. Further, the right side wall of the case member 961 is provided with an outlet 961 b of a size through which gaming balls penetrating in the left-right direction can pass. The arrangement position of the inflow port 961a and the arrangement position of the outflow port 961b can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, the outlet 961 b may be provided, for example, on the bottom wall of the case member 961.

As shown in FIG. 89A, the inflow port 961a of the case member 961 is connected to the rear end of the winning opening forming member 910. Therefore, the gaming ball having flowed into the simulated winning opening 900a passes through the opening 912 of the winning opening formation member 910 to enter the inside of the case member 961 from the inflow port 961a of the case member 961, and the case member It is stored inside the 961.
The case member 961 has light transparency so that the gaming balls stored inside the case member 961 can be viewed from the front. That is, the case member 961 is a transparent or translucent member.

For example, as shown in FIG. 89 (a), the opening / closing member 962 has the outlet 961b of the case member 961 closed and, for example, as shown in FIG. 89 (b), the outlet 961b of the case member 961 is opened. It can be converted to the state. When the open / close member 962 is in the open state, the gaming balls stored in the case member 961 pass through the outlet 961 b and are discharged to the ball discharging unit.
For example, the effect control device 300 converts the open / close member 962 from the closed state to the open state when the predetermined opening timing comes, and closes the open / close member 962 from the open state when the predetermined closing timing comes. It is configured to convert to the

Here, the open timing for converting the open / close member 962 into an open state can be appropriately selected, and may be, for example, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the close timing, or may be stored inside the case member 961. It may be when the number of playing balls exceeds a predetermined threshold, or when the player operates the operating means (for example, effect button 25) in a predetermined operation mode, or a predetermined effect It may be at the start of (or at the end of) or at the start of (or at the end of) the variable display game. The number of gaming balls stored inside the case member 961 can be determined, for example, by counting the number of times the simulated winning opening switch has detected the gaming balls.
Further, the closing timing for converting the opening / closing member 962 into a closed state can be appropriately selected, and is, for example, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the opening timing. The predetermined time is, for example, slightly longer than the time required to eject all the game balls in the case member 961 when the inside of the case member 961 is full of game balls, and the size of the case member 961 It is preset based on the shape and the like.

As described above, the amount of gaming balls won in the start winning opening 36 by storing the gaming balls that have flowed into the simulated winning opening 900 a inside the case member 961 by providing the gaming ball storage device 960 in the out zone unit 900. It is possible to make the player realize the
From the viewpoint of storing all of the game balls that have won the start winning hole 36 inside the case member 961, etc., it is preferable that all the holes of the rotary body 920 be the game ball housing portion 920a.

Start-up winning unit
Instead of the out zone unit 900, a start winning unit 360 may be provided. That is, in game board 30 of this modification, start winning unit 360 having start winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, start winning area) and simulated winning opening 360a is disposed above out opening 30a. May be

FIG. 90 is a view for explaining the main part of the game board 30 of the gaming machine 10 provided with the start-up winning unit 360, and is a view (front view) as viewed from the front side.
As shown in FIG. 90, the start-up winning unit 360 is attached to, for example, a substantially plate-like base member 361, a passage formation member 362 attached to the top of the base member 361, and a substantially central portion of the base member 361. And a rotating body 363.
On the left side and the right side of the rotating body 363 in the base member 361, a pseudo winning hole 360a is provided. Further, an outlet 364 is provided above the rotating body 363 of the base member 361 and below the passage opening forming member 362.

The passage formation member 362 forms a passage opening 362 a that opens toward the upper portion (stage portion 32S). The gaming ball having flowed into the passage opening 362 a passes, for example, a back surface flow passage (not shown) disposed on the rear surface side of the base member 361, and passes from the outlet 364 provided on the base member 361 to the base member 361. It flows out to the front side (ie, inside the start winning unit 360).
The passage port 362a has a shape that looks like a normal starting port. Thereby, although the game ball which entered into the inside of starting winning a prize unit 360 is able to win in starting winning a prize mouth 36, a starting mouth (for example, a starting mouth (for example, The gaming ball having won the start winning opening 36) can be shown as if it enters the inside of the starting winning unit 360.

On the front side of the base member 361, a rib-shaped left extending wall 365 and a right extending wall 366 extending forward are provided.
The left extending wall 365 forms a guiding flow path for guiding the gaming ball having flowed out from the outlet 364 to the simulated winning opening 360a on the left side.
Further, the right extending wall 366 forms a guiding flow path for guiding the gaming ball having flowed out from the outlet 364 to the pseudo winning hole 360a on the right side.

Furthermore, the left extending wall 365 and the right extending wall 366 also have a function of preventing entry into the gaming ball flowing down around the start-up winning unit 360. Specifically, the inside of the start winning unit 360 is surrounded by the passage formation member 362, the rotary body 363, the left extending wall 365, and the right extending wall 366, thereby flowing into the passage 362a. A game ball other than the game ball is prevented from entering into the start-up winning unit 360. That is, only the game ball having flowed into the passage port 362a can enter into the start winning unit 360.
In the front surface of the base member 361, at least a portion surrounded by the passage opening forming member 362, the rotating body 363, the left extending wall 365 and the right extending wall 366 is preferably decorated. .

The rotary body 363 has, for example, a shape provided with a concave portion recessed toward the center of a part of the outer peripheral surface of the disc member on the disc member, and the start winning hole 36 is formed in the concave portion. There is. The rotating body 363 is configured to rotate left and right at a constant speed. The rotating body 363 may be configured to rotate at a constant speed in a constant direction (for example, a clockwise direction when viewed from the front side).
By rotating left and right, rotary body 363 can convert the gaming ball that has flowed out of outlet 364 into a possible state where winning can be made to start winning hole 36 and a difficult winning state (or impossible). It is.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 91 (a), a state in which the start winning hole 36 faces the outlet 364 is a state in which winning is possible.
On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 91 (b), the state where the start winning opening 36 faces the pseudo winning opening 360a on the left side, or, for example, as shown in FIG. 91 (c) The state in which the player is facing 360 a is a difficult-to-win state. If the game ball that has flowed out of the outlet 364 can not flow into the start winning opening 36, such as when the rotating body 363 is in a difficult-to-win state, the gaming ball is the pseudo winning hole 360a on the left or the pseudo winning on the right. It will flow into 360a.

The gaming balls that have won the start winning opening 36 (that is, the gaming balls that flow into the starting winning opening 36 and are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36 a) are discharged to the ball discharging unit.
In addition, the game balls having flowed into the pseudo winning hole 360a are also discharged to the ball discharging unit. The game ball having flowed into the simulated winning opening 360a is detected by a simulated winning opening switch (not shown). A detection signal of the simulated winning opening switch is output to the effect control device 300, and when the simulated winning opening switch detects a game ball, the effect control device 300 is configured to execute a predetermined effect.

As described above, since the start winning unit 360 can internally distribute the gaming balls having flowed into the passage opening 362a to the start winning opening 36 and the pseudo winning opening 360a, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. Also, when the gaming ball flows into the simulated winning opening 360a (ie, when the starting winning opening 36 is not won), the gaming ball does not win the starting winning opening 36 in order to execute a predetermined effect. It is possible to reduce the discouragement and loss of the player.
The inside of the start winning unit 360 is visible from the front.

  In addition, when the game ball flows into the simulated winning opening 360a (that is, when a detection signal of the simulated winning opening switch is output to the effect control device 300), the effect control device 300 generates a predetermined effect (the simulated winning opening). The effect memory, which is an execution right of the effect to be executed when the game ball flows into 360 a, may be stored, and the number of unfinished effect memory may be displayed. It is preferable to display the number of undivided effect memories so as to be distinguishable from the decoration special drawing start memory display corresponding to the undivided start memories.

<< Modification of out zone unit >>
The out zone unit disposed above the out port 30a and provided with the start winning opening 36 (first start winning opening, start winning area) and the pseudo winning opening is limited to the out zone unit 900 shown in FIGS. 81 and 82. Alternatively, it may be changed as appropriate, and may be, for example, an out zone unit 1900 shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 92, the out-zone unit 1900 is attached to, for example, a substantially plate-like base member 1910, a distributing member 1920 attached to the upper portion of the base member 1910, and a substantially central portion of the base member 1910. A rotary body 1930 and a ball rolling member 1940 attached to the right of the base member 1910 are configured.
The start winning hole 36 is provided above the distribution member 1920 in the base member 1910, and the pseudo winning hole 1900 a is provided below the ball rolling member 1940 in the base member 1910. Further, an upper out port 1911 is provided behind the distribution member 1920 in the base member 1910, and a lower out port 1912 is provided below the rotating body 1930 in the base member 1910. Further, an outlet 1913 is provided above the distribution member 1920 in the base member 361 and below the start winning hole 36.

  For example, the gaming ball that has won the start winning hole 36 passes a back surface flow passage (not shown) disposed on the rear surface side of the base member 1910, and from the outlet 1913 provided on the base member 1910 to the base member 1910 Flow out to the front side of the (that is, the inside of the out zone unit 1900).

On the front side of the base member 1910, a rib-like left outer extending wall 1951, a left inner extending wall 1952, a right outer extending wall 1953, a right inner extending wall 1954 and an entrance preventing wall 1955 are provided. It is provided.
The left outer extension wall 1951 and the left inner extension wall 1952 form a guiding channel for guiding the gaming ball, which flows out from the outlet 1913 and is distributed to the left by the distributing member 1920, to the lower out port 1912. ing.
Further, the right outer extending wall 1953 and the right inner extending wall 1954 guide the game ball, which flows out from the outlet 1913 and is distributed to the right by the distributing member 1920, to the ball rolling member 1940. It is formed.

  In addition, the entry preventing wall 1955, together with the left outer extending wall 1951 and the right outer extending wall 1953, prevents the game ball flowing into the periphery of the out zone unit 1900 from entering the inside. Specifically, the inside of the out zone unit 1900 is surrounded by the left outer extending wall 1951, the right outer extending wall 1953 and the entry preventing wall 1955, whereby the game ball winning in the start winning hole 36 is achieved. The other game balls are prevented from entering the inside of the out zone unit 1900. That is, only the game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 can enter into the out zone unit 1900.

The distributing member 1920 is, for example, a substantially V-shaped member having a recess 1921, and the recess 1921 can receive gaming balls. The distributing member 1920 is configured to rotate leftward and rightward at a constant speed about the rotation shaft 1922.
The distributing member 1920 rotates to the left and right to receive the game ball which has won the start winning hole 36 and flowed out from the outlet 1913 by the recess 1921 and distributes it to the rear side (upper outlet 1911). The left sorting state in which the gaming balls having won in the start winning opening 36 and flowed out of the outlet 1913 are distributed to the left, and the right swing in which the gaming balls winning from the starting winning opening 36 and flowing out of the outlet 1913 are distributed to the right It can be converted to the minute state.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 93 (a), the state in which the recess 1921 is facing upward (start winning opening 36) is the post-sorting state. When the sorting member 1920 is in the rear sorting state, the gaming balls having won the start winning hole 36 and flowed out from the outlet 1913 are received by the concave portion 1921 of the sorting member 1920 and formed behind the sorting member 1920 It flows into the upper outlet 1911 and is discharged to the ball discharging unit.
Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 93 (b), the state in which the concave portion 1921 is facing right is the left allotment state. When the sorting member 1920 is in the left sorting state, the gaming balls that have won the start winning hole 36 and flowed out from the outlet 1913 are the left side surface of the sorting member 1920 and the left outside extension wall 1951 and the left inside extension wall It is guided to the lower out port 1912 by 1952. The gaming balls having flowed into the lower out port 1912 are discharged to the ball discharging unit.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 93 (c), the state where the concave portion 1921 is facing left is the right allotment state. When the sorting member 1920 is in the right sorting state, the gaming balls having won the start winning hole 36 and flowed out from the outlet 1913 are the right side surface of the sorting member 1920, the right outside extension wall 1953 and the right inside extension wall It is guided to the ball rolling member 1940 by 1954. The game balls guided to the ball rolling member 1940 flow into the pseudo winning hole 1900a through the ball rolling member 1940 and are discharged to the ball discharging unit.

The rotating body 1930 is a disk-shaped member, and is disposed in a state in which the thickness direction thereof substantially matches the front-rear direction of the gaming machine 10. The rotating body 1930 rotates at a constant speed in a constant direction (clockwise direction as viewed from the front side in this example).
The rotating body 1930 incorporates a magnet. The magnet is for attracting (holding in contact with) the game ball in contact with the magnet arrangement place (the place where the magnet is arranged) on the outer peripheral surface of the rotary body 1930. When the gaming ball comes in contact with the magnet arrangement place of the rotary body 1930, the game ball is attracted to the magnet arrangement place, lifted from the bottom by the rotating rotary body 1930, and guided to the ball rolling member 1940.

Therefore, the gaming ball guided to the lower out port 1912 does not flow into the lower out port 1912 if it is adsorbed to the magnet arrangement location of the rotating body 1930 before flowing into the lower out port 1912 , Ball rolling member 1940.
On the other hand, the gaming ball guided to the lower out port 1912 flows into the lower out port 1912 when it is not adsorbed to the magnet disposition part of the rotating body 1930.
In the example shown in FIG. 92 and FIG. 93, the magnet arrangement place of the rotary body 1930 is only one place (specifically, the place pointed by the triangular pattern applied on the front face of the rotary body 1930). The location may be multiple locations.

  The ball rolling member 1940 is a circular plate-like member and is a so-called so-called "clone", and the upper surface is an inclined surface which descends toward the center, and the pseudo winning hole below the game ball in the approximate center. A communication hole 1941 is formed to flow down to 1900a. The game balls having flowed into the ball rolling member 1940 gradually flow down to the center while circulating, and flow down from the communication hole 1941 to the pseudo winning hole 1900 a.

  The game ball having flowed into the simulated winning opening 1900a is detected by a simulated winning opening switch (not shown). A detection signal of the simulated winning opening switch is output to the effect control device 300, and when the simulated winning opening switch detects a game ball, the effect control device 300 is configured to execute a predetermined effect. As the predetermined effect, for example, an effect in which a high heat character or a group of characters appear is performed.

For example, when the game ball is won in the start winning opening 36, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not to perform the sorting effect of rotating the sorting member 1920 with the starting memory stored based on the winning being a lottery target. Perform distribution lottery whether to determine. The distribution effect is a type of previewed advance effect, and in the distribution effect whether or not the lottery, for example, when the result of the special view variation display game based on the start memory of the lottery object is a special result, the lottery object start It is decided to execute the distribution effect with a higher probability than when the result of the memory-based special view variation display game is not a special result. That is, it can be said that the distribution effect is a effect with a high degree of expectation (big hit expectation).
As the distribution effect, left distribution distribution effect, left distribution distribution production, right distribution distribution are set. The expected value is, for example, increased in the order of left allotment weak presentation <right allotment production <left allotment strong effect.

The distributing member 1920 rotates, for example, only at the time of distribution effect, and maintains the initial state (post-distribution state) at other times. Therefore, when it is determined not to execute the distribution effect in the distribution effect availability lottery, the gaming ball that has won the start winning hole 36 and flowed out from the outlet 1913 is received by the recess 1921 of the distribution member 1920 Flows into the upper outlet 1911.
On the other hand, when the execution of the right distribution effect is determined in the distribution effect possibility lottery, the effect control device 300 rotates the distribution member 1920 to start the right distribution state from the initial state (post distribution state) Convert to Thus, the gaming balls having won the start winning hole 36 and flowed out from the outlet 1913 are guided to the ball rolling member 1940 and flow into the pseudo winning hole 1900 a.

  In addition, when execution of left allotment strong rendition is determined in the allotment effect possibility lottery, the effect control device 300 rotates the allotment member 1920 and left allotment from the initial state (postal allotment state) Convert to state. As a result, the gaming balls that have won the start winning hole 36 and flowed out of the outlet 1913 are guided to the lower out port 1912. For example, the rotating body 1930 rotates only at the time of the left allotment strong effect, and does not rotate at other times. Therefore, when the game ball guided to the lower side out port 1912 in the left allotment strength effect is adsorbed to the magnet arrangement location of the rotating body 1930 which rotates before flowing into the lower side out port 1912, the rotation is concerned. The ball 1930 guides the ball to the ball rolling member 1940 and flows into the pseudo winning hole 1900a. On the other hand, when the magnet is not adsorbed to the magnet arrangement location of the rotating body 1930 rotating before flowing into the lower out port 1912, the magnet flows into the lower out port 1912. In this manner, in the left allotment strong effect, it is possible to perform a loser revival-like effect such that a game ball which could flow into the lower out port 1912 flows into the pseudo winning hole 1900a. Interest will improve.

  In addition, when execution of left allotment weak effects is determined in the allotment effect possibility lottery, the effect control device 300 rotates the allotment member 1920 and left allotment from the initial state (postal allotment state) Convert to state. As a result, the gaming balls that have won the start winning hole 36 and flowed out of the outlet 1913 are guided to the lower out port 1912. In the rotating body 1930, while the rotation is stopped, the gaming ball guided to the lower out port 1912 can not be adsorbed to the magnet arranging point (for example, the magnet arranging point is directed to the upper side (opposite to the lower out port 1912) Maintained). Therefore, the gaming ball guided to the lower out-port 1912 in the left distribution weak effect is not attracted to the magnet arrangement location of the rotating body 1930 and flows into the lower out-port 1912.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 equipped with the out zone unit 1900, a specific game (for example, the start winning opening 36) in the inflow area (out zone unit 1900) is performed using the game ball For example, a specific game mechanism (for example, a guide channel formed by the left outer extension wall 1951 and the left inner extension wall 1952) which performs a game of whether or not the gaming ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 1900a, right outer extension The guidance channel formed by the outlet wall 1953 and the right inner extension wall 1954, the distributing member 1920, the rotating body 1930, the ball rolling member 1940 and the pseudo winning hole 1900a) and the result of the specific game is a predetermined result Effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, effect such as intense heat character or a group of characters appearing) when it is determined It has a, and.

Therefore, the interest of the game can be enhanced while maintaining the fairness and the fairness of the game.
Specifically, since the specific game (game ball effect) can be performed in the inflow area (out zone unit 1900) such as the out area, the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, the specific game (game ball effect) is an effect using the game ball that has flowed into the inflow area (out zone unit 1900) and is not an effect that uses a game ball that may be won in the winning area, The fairness and fairness of the game can be maintained.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 provided with the out zone unit 1900, it is possible to constitute notification means (effect control device 300) for giving notification of predetermined information (for example, pre-reading result) by the result of the specific game.
Here, with the result of the specific game, for example, “the game ball has flowed into the upper out port 1911 (that is, the distribution effect is not executed)”, “the game ball is distributed to the left side and the lower side is out Flowed into the mouth 1912 (that is, left distribution weak effect was performed), "the game ball was distributed to the left and flowed into the simulated winning opening 1900a (that is, left distribution strong effect was performed)" Or “The game balls are distributed to the right and flowed into the simulated winning opening 1900 a (that is, the right distribution effect is executed)”.

Therefore, the interest of the game can be enhanced while maintaining the fairness and the fairness of the game.
Specifically, the specific game (game ball effect) can be performed in the inflow area (out zone unit 1900) such as the out area, and since predetermined information can be notified by the result of the specific game, the game Can enhance the interest of
Further, the specific game (game ball effect) is an effect using the game ball that has flowed into the inflow area (out zone unit 1900) and is not an effect that uses a game ball that may be won in the winning area, The fairness and fairness of the game can be maintained.

<Modification of distribution effect>
Here, the modification of the distribution effect which rotates the distribution member 1920 is shown. Specifically, an example is shown in the case where the probability setting value currently set and the big hit history are suggested by the effect mode of the distribution effect.
As described above, as distribution effects, left distribution weak effects (left distribution weak mode distribution effects), left distribution strong effects (left distribution strength mode distribution effects), right distribution effects (right The distribution effect of the distribution mode is set. That is, the effect mode of the distribution effect includes the left distribution weak mode, the left distribution strong mode, and the right distribution mode. And an expected value (big hit expectation degree etc.) is high in order of left distribution minute effect <right distribution effect <left distribution strong effect, for example. That is, in the above-described distribution effect, it is possible to suggest an expected value (such as a big hit expectation) by the effect mode of the distribution effect.

The information that can be suggested by the presentation mode of the distribution effect is not limited to the expected value and can be appropriately changed, and may be, for example, a probability setting value currently set.
Specifically, for example, when the game ball is won in the start winning hole 36, the effect control device 300 causes the sorting member 1920 to rotate, with the start memory stored based on the winning being a lottery target. Perform a distribution effect availability lottery to determine whether to perform or not.
The distributing member 1920 rotates, for example, only at the time of distribution effect, and maintains the initial state (post-distribution state) at other times. Therefore, when not winning the distribution effect availability lottery (when non-execution of the distribution effect is determined in the distribution effect availability lottery), the game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 and flowed out from the outlet 1913 Is received by the recess 1921 of the distributing member 1920 and flows into the upper out port 1911.

On the other hand, when the distribution effect determination lottery is won (when the execution of the distribution effect is determined in the distribution effect determination lottery), the effect control device 300 performs the distribution based on the probability setting value currently set. The effect mode of the minute effect is determined, and the distribution effect is executed in the determined effect mode.
For example, as shown in FIG. 94 (a), when the currently set probability setting value is “3” or “4”, the distribution effect (right distribution effect) of the right distribution mode is executed. Ru. Specifically, the effect control device 300 rotates the distribution member 1920 to convert the initial state (post-distribution state) into the right-distribution state. Thus, the gaming balls having won the start winning hole 36 and flowed out from the outlet 1913 are guided to the ball rolling member 1940 and flow into the pseudo winning hole 1900 a. That is, in this case, the right channel (the guide channel formed by the right outer extending wall 1953 and the right inner extending wall 1954) is selected as a channel through which the gaming balls having flowed into the out zone unit 1900 pass. .

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 94 (a), when the currently set probability setting value is “5” or “6”, the distribution effect of the left distribution strength mode (the left distribution strength production ) Is executed. Specifically, the effect control device 300 rotates the distribution member 1920 to convert it from the initial state (post-distribution state) to the left-distribution state. As a result, the gaming balls that have won the start winning hole 36 and flowed out of the outlet 1913 are guided to the lower out port 1912. For example, the rotating body 1930 rotates only at the time of the left allotment strong effect, and does not rotate at other times. Therefore, when the game ball guided to the lower side out port 1912 in the left allotment strength effect is adsorbed to the magnet arrangement location of the rotating body 1930 which rotates before flowing into the lower side out port 1912, the rotation is concerned. The ball 1930 guides the ball to the ball rolling member 1940 and flows into the pseudo winning hole 1900a. On the other hand, when the magnet is not adsorbed to the magnet arrangement location of the rotating body 1930 rotating before flowing into the lower out port 1912, the magnet flows into the lower out port 1912. That is, in this case, as a flow path through which the gaming balls having flowed into the out zone unit 1900 pass, there is a left rotation flow path (the left flow path (the induced flow formed by the left outer extending wall 1951 and the left inner extending wall 1952 Path) + rotation of rotor 1930 is selected.

  Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 94 (a), when the currently set probability setting value is “1” or “2”, the distribution effect of the left distribution weak mode (the left distribution weak presentation ) Is executed. Specifically, the effect control device 300 rotates the distribution member 1920 to convert it from the initial state (post-distribution state) to the left-distribution state. As a result, the gaming balls that have won the start winning hole 36 and flowed out of the outlet 1913 are guided to the lower out port 1912. In the rotating body 1930, while the rotation is stopped, the gaming ball guided to the lower out port 1912 can not be adsorbed to the magnet arranging point (for example, the magnet arranging point faces the upper side (opposite to the lower out port 1912) Maintained). Therefore, the gaming ball guided to the lower out-port 1912 in the left distribution weak effect is not attracted to the magnet arrangement location of the rotating body 1930 and flows into the lower out-port 1912. That is, in this case, as a flow passage through which the gaming balls having flowed into the out zone unit 1900 pass, the flow passage without the left rotation (the induced flow formed by the left flow passage (left outer extension wall 1951 and left inner extension wall 1952 Path) + no rotation of rotor 1930) is selected.

Thereby, by executing the distribution effect, it is possible to suggest that the distribution effect is won or not (that is, the jackpot expectation is higher than the case where the distribution effect is not won). In addition, the probability setting value currently set can be suggested by the effect mode of the distribution effect.
A flow path selected as a flow path (hereinafter, referred to as “out ball passing flow path”) through which the game balls flowing into the out zone unit 1900 pass differs depending on the presentation mode of the distribution effect. Therefore, in the case of this modification, it can be said that the currently set probability setting value can be suggested by the selected out-sphere passage.

  Thus, the gaming machine 10 of this modification is selected using a game ball (for example, selected) using a game ball that has won a winning area (for example, the start winning opening 36) in the inflow area (out zone unit 1900). Specific game mechanism (for example, the left channel (the guide channel formed by the left outer extending wall 1951 and the left inner extending wall 1952) for playing the game of which is the out ball passing channel), the right channel (A guide channel formed by the right outer extending wall 1953 and the right inner extending wall 1954), a distributing member 1920, and a rotating body 1930).

Therefore, the interest of the game can be enhanced while maintaining the fairness and the fairness of the game.
Specifically, since the specific game (game ball effect) can be performed in the inflow area (out zone unit 1900) such as the out area, the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, the specific game (game ball effect) is an effect using the game ball that has flowed into the inflow area (out zone unit 1900) and is not an effect that uses a game ball that may be won in the winning area, The fairness and fairness of the game can be maintained.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present modification can be configured to include notification means (effect control device 300) for notifying predetermined information (for example, the probability setting value currently set) by the result of the specific game.
Here, the result of the specific game is, for example, “selected out ball passage flow path is“ left side rotation not flow passage ””, “selected out ball passage flow path is“ right flow passage ” And “selected out sphere passage” is “left side passage with passage”.
Therefore, it is possible to play a specific game (game ball effect) in the inflow area (out zone unit 1900) such as the out area, and to notify of predetermined information according to the result of the specific game, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. be able to.
The inflow area is not limited to the out zone unit 1900, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the out zone unit 800 may be used, or the out zone unit 900 may be used. It is good.

Further, the selectivity of the flow path corresponding to the currently set probability setting value may not be 100%. That is, the channel not corresponding to the probability setting value may be selected, and the channel selection ratio corresponding to the probability setting value may be higher than the channel selection ratio not corresponding to the probability setting value. .
Specifically, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 94 (a), for example, the channel corresponding to the probability setting value "3" or "4" is the right channel, and the channel not corresponding is the channel without left rotation. In this case, not only the right side channel but also the left side channel and left side channel can be selected, and the left side channel selection rate and the left side channel are also available. The selectivity of the right channel may be higher than the selectivity of When configured in this manner, the player can estimate that the probability setting value currently set is “3” or “4” based on the tendency that the right channel is easily selected. . The other probability setting values can be similarly configured. Therefore, also when configured in this way, it is possible to suggest the currently set probability setting value by the selected out-ball passage flow path (i.e., the effect mode of distribution effect).

Further, the information suggested by the selected out-ball passage (that is, the information suggested by the effect mode of the distribution effect) is not limited to the probability setting value currently set, and can be changed as appropriate.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 94 (b), a jackpot history may be suggested by the selected out-ball passage. In the case of the example shown in FIG. 94 (b), in the case where the selected out ball passage flow path is "the flow path without left rotation" (or the case where "the flow path without left rotation" is most likely to be selected) It can be assumed that the cumulative value of the number of big hits is less than 15 and if the selected out ball passage is the “right channel” (or the “right channel” is the most likely to be selected) In the case where the accumulated value of the number of big hits can be estimated to be 15 or more and less than 30 and the selected out ball passage is “left side flow path” (or “left side rotation path”) It can be estimated that the accumulated value of the big hit is 30 times or more in the case where the “flow path” is most easily selected). Of course, the jackpot history suggested by the selected out ball passage channel is not limited to the cumulative value of the number of big hits (total value of the special gaming state occurrence count from the predetermined time to the current time), and can be suitably changed, for example Alternatively, it may be an accumulated value of the number of consecutive attempts (a total value of the number of consecutive attempts from the predetermined time to the current time).

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present modification, the game (special view variation display game) is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the special gaming state is generated when the result of the game becomes a special result. In a possible gaming machine, a plurality of flow paths through which game balls can pass (for example, a flow path without rotation on the left, a flow path on the right, or a flow path with left rotation) and predetermined information (for example, probability setting value currently set) Based on the selection means (effect control device 300) for selecting the flow path through which the game ball passes from the plurality of flow paths, and the switching means (sorting member 1920 for switching the flow paths according to the selection result of the selection means , Rotating body 1930).
Therefore, predetermined information can be suggested by the flow path through which the gaming ball passes. That is, since the effect which suggests predetermined information can be performed as an effect using a game ball, the interest of the effect using a game ball can be heightened.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present modification, setting means capable of setting one probability setting value out of a plurality of probability setting values to which probability values used for lottery of a game (special figure variation display game) are assigned The game control apparatus 100) can be provided, and the predetermined information can be configured to be the probability setting value (the probability setting value currently set) set by the setting means (see FIG. 94 (a)).
By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform an effect that suggests the probability setting value (the probability setting value currently being set) set by the setting means as an effect using the game ball. It is possible to enhance the interest of the effects used.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present modification, the predetermined information can be configured to be history information (big hit history) related to the special result (see FIG. 94 (b)).
By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform an effect that suggests history information (big hit history) about a special result as an effect using a game ball, so it is possible to enhance the interest of an effect using a game ball.

  The predetermined information is not limited to the probability setting value (the probability setting value currently set) set by the setting means or the history information (big hit history) about the special result. The predetermined information may be, for example, a base value or a character ratio. Here, the base value is a payout based on the number of detected game balls at an out switch that detects all the game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been fired to the game area 32 and finished the game, or a prize based on the winning area. The information required to display the base value includes, for example, information on the detected number of gaming balls at the out switch and information on the number of payouts based on the winning in the winning area, for example. . In addition, the item ratio is the jackpot state (that is, fanfare and ending of the total number of balls (total number of balls) obtained by winning the winning opening from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 until the present time The percentage of the number of winning balls (the number of winning balls by feature) obtained by winning the big prize in (excluded), and the information necessary to display the percentage of items For example, includes information on the total number of winning balls (total number of winning balls), and information on the number of winning balls (number of balls obtained by character).

Also, for example, below the normal symbol starting gate 34, a plurality of guiding flow paths capable of guiding the gaming ball to the starting winning opening 36 (or the general winning opening 35), the distributing member constantly rotating, and the game A switching means (for example, an induction valve) for switching an induction flow path through which the ball passes among the plurality of induction flow paths is provided, and the induction flow path is set according to predetermined information (for example, a probability setting value currently set). It may be configured to switch. Specifically, for example, in a plurality of induction flow paths, the advantageous induction flow path in which the gaming ball is easily guided to the start winning opening 36 (or the general winning opening 35), and the gaming ball is a start winning opening 36 (or There is a disadvantageous induction channel which is hard to be guided to the general winning opening 35), and the switching means is an opening and closing member for opening and closing the inlet of each of the plurality of induction channels provided. The gaming ball having passed through the gate 34 is guided by the distributing member toward the plurality of induction flow channels, and among the plurality of induction flow channels, the induction flow channel opened at the inlet (that is, selected based on the predetermined information) Flow into the induction channel).
When configured in this manner, for example, the higher the probability value corresponding to the currently set probability setting value, the higher the probability that a guiding flow path advantageous as the guiding flow path through which the gaming ball passes will be selected. It is good. Moreover, when comprised in this way, control of a switching means may be performed not by the presentation control apparatus 300 but by the game control apparatus 100. In addition, when configured in this way, the switching means may be operated (switching operation) when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 34 as a trigger.

Further, for example, on the stage portion 32S, a plurality of guiding flow paths capable of guiding the gaming ball to the start winning opening 36 (or the general winning opening 35) and a plurality of guiding flow paths through which the gaming ball passes A switching means (e.g., an induction valve) for switching in the path may be provided, and the induction flow path may be switched according to predetermined information (e.g., a probability setting value currently set).
When configured in this manner, for example, the higher the probability value corresponding to the currently set probability setting value, the higher the probability that a guiding flow path advantageous as the guiding flow path through which the gaming ball passes will be selected. It is good. Moreover, when comprised in this way, control of a switching means may be performed not by the presentation control apparatus 300 but by the game control apparatus 100.

Also, for example, a plurality of guiding flow paths capable of guiding gaming balls to a specific area (for example, V area) in the special winning opening, and a guiding flow path through which the gaming balls pass are switched among the plurality of guiding flow paths A switching means (e.g., an induction valve) may be provided, and the induction flow path may be switched according to predetermined information (e.g., a probability setting value currently set).
When configured in this manner, for example, the higher the probability value corresponding to the currently set probability setting value, the higher the probability that a guiding flow path advantageous as the guiding flow path through which the gaming ball passes will be selected. It is good. Moreover, when comprised in this way, control of a switching means may be performed not by the presentation control apparatus 300 but by the game control apparatus 100.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present modified example, the variable display game (special view variable display game) is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the special game state is obtained when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. Specific game execution means (effect control device 300) for executing a specific game different from the variable display game (for example, a game in which the selected out ball passage is selected), Setting means (game control apparatus 100) capable of setting one probability setting value out of a plurality of probability setting values to which probability values used for lottery of the variable display game are assigned, and depending on the result mode of the specific game, It is possible to indicate the probability setting value (the probability setting value currently set) set by the setting means. Specifically, in the case of this modification, the result mode of the specific game is “selected out ball passage flow path is“ left side rotation non-flow passage ””, “selected out ball passage flow path is“ It is one of “right side flow path” and “selected out sphere passage flow path is“ left side rotation and flow path ””.
Therefore, since it is possible to play a specific game capable of suggesting the currently set probability setting value as a game different from the variable display game, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game different from the variable display game.
Note that the information that can be suggested by a game different from the variable display game is not limited to the probability setting value currently set, but can be changed as appropriate, and may be, for example, a jackpot history.

<Modification of specific game>
The specific game different from the variable display game is not limited to the game performed in the out zone unit (for example, the game in which the selected out ball passage flow path is), and can be appropriately changed. Specifically, the specific game different from the variable display game may be, for example, a game that is triggered by a pseudo winning.
As a game to be executed triggered by the pseudo winning, for example, roulette effect is mentioned.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 95 (a), when the game ball flows into the simulated winning opening 1900a (or may be the simulated winning opening 870 or the simulated winning opening 900a), a plurality of character images are displayed. The roulette effect may be performed such that the roulette image including the roulette image is rotated and the roulette image is stopped at a predetermined timing.
At that time, for example, as shown in FIG. 95 (b), the probability setting value currently set may be suggested according to the result mode of the roulette effect. In the case of the example shown in FIG. 95 (b), the player is currently set when the first character stops at the position of the arrow (or the first character is most likely to stop at the position of the arrow). It can be inferred that the probability setting value is “1” or “2”, and the second character stops at the position of the arrow (or the second character is most likely to stop at the position of the arrow) Can be inferred that the currently set probability setting value is “3” or “4”, and the third character stops at the position of the arrow (or the third character is the most at the position of the arrow). When it is easy to stop), it can be inferred that the currently set probability setting value is "5" or "6". For example, in the roulette effect shown in FIG. 95 (a), since the second character is stopped at the position of the arrow as a result mode of the roulette effect, the probability setting value currently set is “3” or “4”. Suggests that.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present modification, the variation display game (special figure variation display game) is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and a special result is obtained as a result of the variation display game. In a gaming machine capable of generating a gaming state, a specific game execution means (effect control device 300) for executing a specific game (for example, roulette effect) different from the variable display game, and a probability value used for lottery of the variable display game Setting means (the game control apparatus 100) capable of setting one probability setting value out of the plurality of probability setting values, and the probability setting value being set by the setting means according to the result mode of the specific game It is possible to indicate the currently set probability setting value). Specifically, in the case of this modification, the result mode of the specific game is any of “stop at first character”, “stop at second character”, and “stop at third character”.
Therefore, since it is possible to play a specific game capable of suggesting the currently set probability setting value as a game different from the variable display game (a game triggered by a pseudo winning), the interest of the game different from the variable display game Can be enhanced.

In addition, information that can be suggested by a game different from the variable display game (a game triggered by a pseudo winning) is not limited to the probability setting value currently set, and can be appropriately changed. For example, a big hit history and a predetermined expectation It may be a degree (such as a big hit expectation or a reach occurrence expectation).
Further, the specific game (the game triggered by the pseudo winning) different from the variable display game is not limited to the roulette effect but can be appropriately changed.
In addition, an expected degree suggestion image G2 shown in, for example, FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (d), that is, a specific image (for example, a character image "?" Or a character image "!") You may

  In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine shown in the above embodiment as a gaming machine, and, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, ball ball gaming machines, etc. The present invention is applicable to all gaming machines that use the game ball of. Also, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine. The slot machine is not limited to a slot machine using medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as slot machines using game balls. In addition, the configurations of the above-described modified examples can be combined appropriately and applied.

Further, it should be understood that the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is indicated not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include all the modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.
For example, in the above-described modified example B and modified example C, the decorative special-image variation display game is executed on the main display device (segment display) 41a, and effects and the like are executed on the sub display device 41b. Further, the main display device 41a may be a display (such as a liquid crystal display) similar to the sub display device 41b.

10 game machine 30 game board 32 game area 32L left flow area (predetermined game ball flow area)
32R right flow area (predetermined game flow area)
32W warp flow path (predetermined game flow area)
41 Display Device (Display Means)
41 L Left side overlap area (overlap area)
41R Right side overlapping area (overlapping area)
41W Warp overlapping area (overlapping area)
100 game control device (setting means)
300 effect control device (game execution means, suggestion effect execution means, selection means, specific game execution means)
1920 Distribution members (switching means)
1930 Rotor (switching means)
G2 expectation degree suggestion image

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state when a variable display game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the result of the variable display game is a special result,
Specific game execution means for executing a specific game different from the variable display game;
And setting means capable of setting one probability setting value out of a plurality of probability setting values to which probability values used for lottery of the variable display game are assigned,
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability setting value set by the setting means can be suggested according to the result mode of the specific game.

Images